Grand Deluges – A Pedantic Wet Dream

A Book by Joe Peters

Proudly and humbly announcing my new book, Grand Deluges – A Pedantic Wet Dream

From a 32 page essay I wrote years ago and kept going back to, I fell down the rabbit hole it became and after a couple of years of writing at night and painting houses during the day, Grand Deluges appeared. Feedback so far has been very good, from “unique writing style and pace” to “very relative to today considering it’s like an encyclopedia written as a story” to “refreshing, rational and at times even funny”, and a “very interesting non-linear read”.

A dense tale told in fragments, covering a plethora of topics branching out from the inception of the planet Earth, through its geological, environmental and atmospheric changes, to the beginning of life forms, and the development of the human species, in body and mind. With forks in the road, covering such things as science, myth, spirituality, hunters and gatherers, the birth of agriculture, religions, civilizations, empires and our social worlds, and societies. And signposts along the way touching on everything from climate disruption and the actions of nature, whether human or otherwise, the degradation of forests, land, the sea and air, to pluralistic ignorance, cognitive dissonance, facts, myths and theories, education, politics, capitalism, socialism, monetary systems, and to be or not to be human.

Hope you enjoy the read.

484 Pages / 23 Pages Bibliography, Research & References

Proof-Reader/ Co-Editor: Janet James

Cover Design: Peter Scott

Author/Publisher/Editing /Formatting: Joseph Peters

Printed by Bruce A. Cadorette / Advantage Graphix Inc

Vancouver BC, Canada, August, 2018.

For ordering information –Go here


SARS-CoV-2 and COVID-19 – The Virus and Disease – Timeline

Hello everyone. Since I’m living on my boat in self-exile because I am the worst a man can be today, white, over 60, lung cancer, Chronic Pulmonary Obstruction Disease, nearly losing a battle with influenza-A over Christmas, and eking along on CPP Disability, I’ve been keeping a timeline of all the goings on as of late with the coronavirus. Timeline will be ongoing until further notice, and will be regularly updated when new info comes down the pike. Scroll to bottom for latest.

Be well and remember they have not yet restricted being rational and calm, or laughter and hope.


June 13, 2012 a 60-year-old Saudi man was admitted to a private hospital in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, with a 7-day history of fever, cough, expectoration, and shortness of breath. He had no history of cardiopulmonary or renal disease, was receiving no long-term medications, and did not smoke.

May 4, 2013, a sample of this Saudi SARS (aka novel coronavirus) from the very first Saudi patient arrived in Canada’s National Microbiology Laboratory (NML) in Winnipeg, the only level-4 facility equipped to handle the world’s deadliest diseases, via Ron Fouchier of Erasmus Medical Center in Rotterdam, Netherlands, who sequenced the virus sample.

May 30, 2018, Trump signs the Trickett Wendler, Frank Mongiello, Jordan McLinn and Matthew Bellina Right to Try Act. This law is another way for patients who have been diagnosed with life-threatening diseases or conditions who have tried all approved treatment options and who are unable to participate in a clinical trial to access certain unapproved treatments.

Mar. 2019, in a mysterious event, a shipment of exceptionally virulent viruses including Saudi SARS coronavirus from Canada’s NML ended up in China.

July 2019, a group of Chinese virologists were forcibly dispatched from the Canadian lab. One of them was Dr. Xiangguo Qiu who made at least five trips to the Wuhan National Bio-safety Laboratory located only 32 km away from the Huanan Seafood Market which was supposedly the epicentre of the outbreak. Theories abound that the coronavirus was then weaponized at the Wuhan Laboratory by adding two HIV molecules. And if it had been released the health of societies would crumble, with many millions dying, and anarchy would reign. And that an unelected centralized group would then arise and create their concept of order.

Oct. 18, 2019, the very opaque “Event 201” is held in in New York. It was sponsored by the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, the World Economic Forum (WEF), the CIA, John Hopkins Foundation, Mike Bloomberg, and the UN. The event was a rehearsal for an worldwide pandemic. Players in the exercise were presented with a scenario where a fictional coronavirus started in pig farms in Brazil, and then spread around the world, leading to a (fictional) 65 million deaths. Interesting that Bloomberg was involved. In 2019, Forbes ranked him as the ninth-richest person in the world, with an estimated net worth of $55.5 billion. In November 2019, Bloomberg began to run for the Democratic nomination for president of the US. He ended his campaign in March 2020, after having won only 61 delegates and having spent $676 million of his own money on the primary campaign, setting the record for the most expensive US presidential primary campaign in history. Coincidentally perhaps, when he began his campaign, Saunders was the predominate candidate, then after he stepped down nearly all the other candidates also began stepping down, and Biden suddenly became the predominate candidate.

The same day Event 201 began (Oct. 18th), The World Military Games, opened in Wuhan, China, and ran until October 27th. Similar to the Olympics, but for military personal, 140 nations and 9,309 athletes participated in 27 sports, including track and field and archery for para athletes, obstacle courses, Judo, and military pentathlons, along with many of the same individual and team sports played at the Olympics. And for the first time boxing competitions were opened to female military boxers. The US delegation was comprised of 300 military personal. Another theory suggests that perhaps one of two scenarios were carried out at this time, either the Wuhan laboratories were infiltrated and the weaponized SARS coronavirus’s two HIV molecules were extracted or it was replaced with a less deadlier version.

In related news, in Mar. 2020, in a tit-for-tat between the US and China, Zhao Lijian, a spokesman for the Chinese Foreign Ministry, tweeted of the possibility that “it might be US Army who brought the epidemic to Wuhan”, making a direct connection with the Military Games in Wuhan. He also directly quoted US CDC director Robert Redfield who, when asked whether some deaths by coronavirus had been discovered posthumously in the US, replied that “some cases have actually been diagnosed this way in the US today.” Zhao’s conclusion maybe suggests the virus was already in effect in the US before being identified in Wuhan, due to the by now fully documented inability of the US to test and verify differences compared with the flu. A manufactured epidemic event started in the US by the globalists to effect an election year and carry out their agenda? But were found out and a similar weaponized version (two HIV molecules) was replaced or had the molecules removed just before it was released? Who knows?

Dec. 10: In Wuhan, Hubei Province, China, Wei Guixian, one of the earliest known coronavirus patients, starts feeling ill.

Dec. 16: Guixian is admitted to Wuhan Central Hospital with infection in both lungs but resistant to anti-flu drugs. Staff later learned he worked at a wildlife market connected to the outbreak.

Dec. 27: Initially thought of as a mysterious case of pneumonia, the Wuhan Municipal Health Commission ruled out influenza, avian influenza, adenovirus infection, SARS, MERS and other commonly known respiratory diseases as the cause. Wuhan health officials are told that a new coronavirus is causing the illness.

Jan. 2, 2020: Chinese researchers map the new coronavirus’ complete genetic information. And identify it as a new coronavirus, which includes SARS and the common cold. It is named SARS-CoV-2, which causes the disease named COVID-19. Coronaviruses are common and spread through being in proximity to an infected person and inhaling droplets generated when they cough or sneeze, or touching a surface where these droplets land and then touching one’s face or nose. They publish the results on Jan.9th.

Jan. 11, China announced its first death from the virus, a 61-year-old man who had purchased goods from the seafood market. Treatment did not improve his symptoms after he was admitted to hospital and he died of heart failure on the evening of January 9.

Jan 12: China completed and published the genetic sequence of the new virus.

Jan. 13: First coronavirus case reported in Thailand, the first known case outside China.

Jan. 15: The patient who becomes the first confirmed US case leaves Wuhan and arrives in the US, carrying the coronavirus. No one in the US had yet to be tested.

Jan. 18: The Wuhan Health Commission announces four new cases. At the Annual Wuhan Lunar New Year banquet, tens of thousands of people gathered for a potluck.

Jan. 19: Beijing sends epidemiologists to Wuhan. A day later, Zhong Nanshan, a top Chinese doctor who is helping to coordinate the coronavirus response, announces the virus can be passed between people.

Jan. 20: China reported a third death and more than 200 infections, with cases also reported outside Hubei province including in the capital Beijing, Shanghai and Shenzhen.

The first case announced in South Korea (pop. 51 million). By the middle of February, a much more significant outbreak of the disease could be traced to one of the many cult-like religious sects in the country and their travels back and forth to Wuhan, and infections quickly rose into the thousands. The South Korean government quickly switched to testing overdrive. On Feb. 26, the country began drive-through testing. By Mar. 9, nearly 200,000 people had been tested for the disease. The government is also, more controversially, using a phone app that relies on GPS to track those in quarantine and make sure that they maintain their self-separation. A rigorous triage has sent all but the most serious 10% of the infected to recover at home, lessening the strain on the medical system. The hyper-connected country has been able to practice social distancing with relative ease as people went online to work remotely, order groceries, and maintain contact with friends. Instead of the authoritarian quarantining that China implemented, South Korea has relied on a test and track approach, using technology, a rapid response, a smart and techno-savvy culture, lots of testing and follow-up, and a general spirit of compliance. To-date the rate of infection has levelled off, and the death rate remains very low at less than 1 percent.

Jan. 21: The US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) confirms the first coronavirus case in the US.

Jan 22, the death toll in China jumped to 17 with more than 550 infections. Many European airports stepped up checks on flights from Wuhan.

Jan. 23: With the Chinese government reporting only 830 infections, Wuhan and three other cities go under quarantine. Everything is shut down, from schools to factories, internal transportation, and even any further Lunar New Year celebrations are cancelled. All air and rail departures were suspended. Unfortunately, as the lock-down began, the Lunar New Year holiday (Jan. 24th to 30th) also began, and hundreds of millions of people were in transit around the country, as well as flying in from elsewhere around the globe, as they visited relatives. At the same time, approximately 5 million people leave Wuhan city without being screened for the illness.

And the World Health Organization (WHO) announce the outbreak did not yet constitute a public emergency of international concern and there was “no evidence” of the virus spreading between humans outside of China.

Jan. 24: China (pop. 1.4 billion) extends the lock-down to cover 36 million people and starts to rapidly build a new hospital in Wuhan. From this point, very strict measures continue to be implemented around the country for the rest of the epidemic. One week later the number of infections had climbed to nearly 10,000. The quarantine methods wouldn’t show much effect over the next three to four weeks, but countries around the world criticized them for being so authoritarian.

Though authoritarian, and perhaps guilty of suppression and censorship of information in the early days, the actions implemented are seemingly working. And though they stumbled, they acted far quicker than many democratically elected leaders have to date. Besides it’s not as if the democratic countries that are acting now and implementing similar actions, put their decisions to a vote. Tony Perman, who was quarantined in Shanghai, said that “Certainly the reality of authoritarian control, the subservience of the individual to the state or the collective, and the pressure to conform made widespread habit change both more feasible and acceptable, even if due to fear of retribution. But there was a palpable ‘all for one and one for all’ ethos.” The success of China’s approach owes as much to the public’s sense of responsibility as it does to the government’s autocratic methods.

Most deaths in China occurred in Hubei province, with most all patients over 65 years old with chronic diseases or compromised immune systems. But then in the Wuhan area, lung cancer and emphysema/COPD are significantly higher than national averages in China, a country where half of all men smoke. Interestingly, and a matter of fact, the coronavirus genome variations in Iran and Italy were sequenced and it was revealed they do not belong to the variety that infected Wuhan.

Jan. 25, travel restrictions were imposed on a further five cities in Hubei, taking the overall number of people affected to 56 million. Hong Kong declared a virus emergency, cancelled Lunar New Year celebrations and restricted links to mainland China.

An 80-year-old passenger from Hong Kong who embarked in Yokohama, on board the Diamond Princess cruise ship, sailed one segment of the itinerary and disembarked in Hong Kong on Jan 25th. Six days after leaving the ship, he visited a local Hong Kong hospital where he later tested positive for COVID-19. When the ship returned to the Port of Yokohama in Japan, Feb.4th, it was quarantined for nearly four weeks. Home countries arranged to evacuate their citizens and quarantine them further in their own countries, and by Mar. 1st, all on board including the crew and the captain had disembarked. The Diamond Princess gives the best indication of how fatal the disease is than global statistics. It was a controlled environment, without many variables that normally are impossible to control.We know that all but one patient boarded the boat without the virus. We know that the other passengers were healthy enough to travel. And we know their whereabouts and exposures.” All of its passengers and crew were tested, with 712 people out of the 3,711 people on board testing positive (about 17%), 334 of whom were asymptomatic (showing no symptoms). The infections included at least 138 from India (including 132 crew and 6 passengers), 35 Filipinos, 32 Canadians, 24 Australians, 13 Americans, 4 Indonesians, 4 Malaysians, and 2 Britons. Seven people from the boat have died, giving a death rate of 0.86 percent. And that not a single death among passengers has been in a person under 70.

Jan 30, seven days after saying there wasn’t one, WHO declared coronavirus a global emergency as the death toll in China jumped to 170, with 7,711 cases reported in the country, where the virus had spread to all 31 provinces.

India and the Philippines confirmed their first cases of the virus, with one infected patient in each country.

Jan 31st, In Italy (pop. 60 million), two Chinese tourists in Rome tested positive for the virus. The Italian government suspended all flights to and from China and declared a state of emergency. Then the virus appeared again, on Feb. 14Th, just outside the northern city of Milan. The patient was originally thought to have been infected by a colleague returning from China. But the colleague tested negative. A comedy of errors then played out. According to The Washington Post, “the patient had sought medical attention multiple times, starting on February 14, but he wasn’t diagnosed until February 21 (after he infected his wife, hospital staff, several patients and others).” Even though basically shutting down the country, with everyone on lock-down, Italy is undoubtedly getting so hard hit today because it has the second highest proportion of seniors in the world, with 23% of the population over 65. Only Japan has an older population. This may explain their high mortality rate of 7.3 per cent, which is nearly double of what China’s rate was at its peak, of 3.8 per cent. While an Italian virologist says that in the early days of the outbreak the country’s attempt not to appear “racist” and concerned over being politically correct, hindered the ability to properly respond to the pandemic.

The number of confirmed cases in China jumped to 9,809. While Russia, Spain, Sweden and the United Kingdom confirmed their first cases of the virus.

Russia closes 4,200 km border with China. Bans Chinese citizens from entering country. As does Singapore.

Feb. 1st: Philippines announced their first death, the first one outside China.

Feb 3rd. Across 25 countries, 17,205 people had been infected with the virus, which had claimed the lives of 361 others. But 99 percent of cases still remained in China.

The same day, with 11 confirmed cases and no deaths yet reported, the US (pop.327 million) announces that any citizens who had visited Hubei province in China, within 14 days of their return to the US, will be subjected to a mandatory quarantine of up to 14 days. And that all aircraft arriving from China were being directed to 11 authorized airports to receive them, where the CDC is working with the Department of Homeland Security (DHS), the Transportation Security Administration (TSA), and individual airlines to identify potentially infected persons. And further, that foreign nationals (other than immediate family members, US citizens, permanent residents, and flight crew) who have been in China within 14 days of their arrival to the US will be denied entry into the country. The US mainstream news called their government fear mongering, racist and xenophobic for doing so.

Feb. 8th: The death toll in China reached 722, with 34,546 confirmed infections.

Feb. 9, the death toll in China surpassed that of the 2002-03 SARS epidemic, with 811 deaths recorded and 37,198 infections. A beaming, Canadian PM Trudeau, sends 16 tons (32,000 lbs) of face masks, gloves, goggles and clothing to China.

Feb. 13, North Korea imposed a month-long quarantine on all foreign visitors and others suspected to have COVID-19. The death toll in mainland China hit 1,300, with nearly 60,000 infections recorded. Meanwhile, Japan confirmed its first death from the virus.

Feb. 18th: China reported around 72,000 infections. A month later, it had only reached around 81,000. Since, the rate of infection has levelled off, and the death rate remains very low at less than 1 percent rather than the 3.8 per cent at the peak of it’s epidemic.

Feb. 19th: First confirmed case in Iran (pop. 83 million). Just over a month later, Mar. 20Th, they had 19,644 cases, with new cases also still rising, reporting 1,237 new cases on that date. To-date death toll is 1,433 people, with over 8 % (23) of their parliamentary members contracting the disease. As of Mar. 20th, Iran has the third highest number of COVID-19 deaths after China and Italy, the highest in Western Asia, and the fourth-highest number of cases, surpassed only by Mainland China, Italy, and the US (which on Mar.21st had 25,493 cases).

Feb. 19, Iran reported two deaths from the coronavirus, hours after confirming its first cases.

China’s daily infection figures drop below 2,000 for the second straight day, with the country’s health commission reporting 74,185 infections on the mainland and 2,004 deaths.

Feb. 20, South Korea reported its first death from the coronavirus. Meanwhile, And though China reported the death toll had risen to 2,118 while the total number of cases reached 74,576, the country’s health commission reported daily infections dropped to the lowest in almost a month, a result of authorities only counting cases confirmed by genetic testing in Hubei.

Feb. 22: South Korea saw its largest spike in a single day with 229 new cases of the virus.

Italy reported its first two deaths, while Iran confirmed a fifth death among 10 new infections. A sixth death was later confirmed, though it was not clear whether this case was included in the country’s 28 confirmed cases.

In China, the number of new infections fell significantly with 397 cases reported.

Feb. 27, Estonia, Denmark, Northern Ireland and the Netherlands reported their first coronavirus cases. The number of infections passed 82,000 worldwide, including more than 2,800 deaths.

Mar. 1: Global averages at this time showed 10% of those infected needed to be hospitalized, and 1 to 2% died, mostly all elderly and already medically compromised. Survivability rate was 98 to 99%. This rate may even rise, since with proper testing, there is undoubtedly going to be many more infected than now confirmed, but who do not die.

Mar. 5th. Dr Jeremy Samuel Faust, emergency medicine physician at Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston, and an instructor at Harvard Medical School, pointed out that 25,000 people die in China every day, a high proportion of which is due to respiratory diseases which show symptoms similar to coronavirus. At the peak of the outbreak figures show that just 25 of the typical 25,000 daily deaths were from coronavirus, and that many of the deaths were of individuals in the same age groups and in the same areas where the deaths from respiratory diseases was already high. So he askedHow were doctors supposed to sort out which of those 25 out of 25,000 daily deaths were solely due to coronavirus, and which were more complicated?

Mar. 6, OPEC+ called on Russia to coordinate an oil production slow down in an effort to stabilize oil prices. All expectations were that a supply reduction would be agreed upon and the price of oil would stabilize. A shock not heard, Russia said “nyet” and turned the offer down, creating a price war.

Russia and Saudi Arabia can produce oil at around $20 per barrel, while US shale production costs average around $46 per barrel. And so Saudi Arabia and Russia can live with sub $30 oil for quite some time. Russia stated they could go 10 to 15 years. The US energy sector will collapse very quickly with sub $30 oil unless banks and hedge funds are willing to lend more dollars, which they now don’t have. One also has to consider that the US has spent the last 12 years using borrowed capital to invest in things and expecting the profits made to be greater than the interest payable. Which hasn’t always been the case, instead they simply print more money to make up for it. And they are currently at their “weakest moment perhaps since the Great Depression, perhaps ever.” Over the same 12 years, Russia, one of the least indebted countries in the world, has been the largest buyer of gold, and the biggest seller of US Treasuries in the world.

Related, today (Mar 25/in Victoria BC) I went to put some gas in the car, while keeping a safe distance from anyone I encountered of course. Three weeks ago we were paying up to $1.48 per liter, today it was down to a loonie per liter.

Mar. 7, the coronavirus had killed nearly 3,500 people and infected another 102,000 people across more than 90 countries.

China’s Health Commission reported 99 new cases, down from 143 cases the day before, with a total of 80,651 cases nationwide. Official data, meanwhile, showed China’s exports plunging 17.2% in the first two months of the year after the outbreak brought much of the country to a halt.

Mar. 11th, WHO declared the coronavirus outbreak a pandemic.

The US barred the entry of all foreign nationals who had visited China, Iran and a group of European countries during the previous 14 days. The ban applied to Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. On Mar.16th the ban was also applied to foreign nationals departing from the United Kingdom and Ireland.

Mar. 12th to Mar. 20th, most countries around the world soon followed and would shut their borders and heavily restrict or outright ban all incoming and outgoing flights. Venezuela, Bolivia, El Salvador, Russia, Pakistan and Cuba, all shutdown most flights soon after the US did. One of the many to do so on Mar.16th, was Canada (pop. 37 million) which finally announced it was blocking the entry of anyone who is not a Canadian citizen or permanent resident, except for airplane crews, diplomats, immediate family members of Canadian citizens. Many felt and have said, that PM Trudeau, had held back until now because he felt limiting entry was racist.

Mar. 13th Bill Gates stepped down from the public boards of Microsoft and Berkshire Hathaway. His stated reasons include, to dedicate more time to philanthropic priorities including global health, vaccination programs and development, education, and tackling climate change. And comes on the heels of the Gates Foundation’s announcement that it is involved in efforts to “identify, assess, develop, and scale-up treatments” for COVID-19.

Mar. 16, New York Mayor Bill de Blasio ordered the city’s bars, theatres and cinemas to close down, as the number of cases continued to rise in the US.

Renowned scientist Frank Plummer who received the original Saudi SARS coronavirus sample back in May 2013, and was currently working on coronavirus (HIV) vaccine in the Winnipeg NML labs, collapsed and died in mysterious conditions in Kenya. According to CBC, Plummer, 67, was a keynote speaker at the annual meeting of the University of Nairobi’s collaborative centre for research and training in HIV/AIDS/STIs. No confirmed cause of death has yet been released.

Marillyn Hewson, the chief executive of the world’s largest defense contractor, Lockheed Martin, and one of the most powerful women in the world announced that she will step down as CEO on June 15. Since the pandemic started in January, CEO’s have been dropping like flies. Some of them include (starting in January) IBM CEO Ginni Rometty, LinkedIn CEO, Jeff Weiner, MGM CEO, Jim Murren, Credit Suisse CEO, Tidjane Thiam, JCPenney CMO, Shawn Gensch, St. Luke’s Hospital CEO, Christine Candio (one of St. Louis’ biggest hospitals), MasterCard CEO, Ajay Banga, UPS, David Abney, Disney CEO, Bob Iger, and the previously mentioned Bill Gates. The majority of them have stepped down in the past three weeks. Over the past year nearly 1,400 CEO’s have left their posts in the US. In October 2019 alone, 172 chief executives left their jobs. The highest monthly number on record. An advocate for corporate governance says its because company boards “have been too compliant and they’re finally recognizing it’s their job to be vigilant about chief executive misbehaviour.” Perhaps. But severance, stock options and buyouts were beyond exceptional, and maybe not so lucrative today.

Mar. 17th European Union (EU) leaders, announced they were closing off at least 26 countries (with more than 400 million people) to nearly all visitors from the rest of the world for at least 30 days. While in reality many European countries had already done so, the borderless ideology of the EU be damned.

Mar. 18th Flattening Curves – China, Singapore, Japan, Iraq, South Korea.

Australian Prime Minister Scott Morrison declared for the first time ever a “human bio-security emergency” in the country, and the travel advisory had been upgraded to the highest level. Australians were told, “Do not travel abroad, do not go overseas.”

Italy, meanwhile, recorded 475 new deaths, the highest one-day toll of any nation, taking its total to 2,978. The total number of infections in the country reached 35,713.

For the first time since the start of the epidemic, no new domestic cases were reported in China.

Mar. 19, Italy overtook China as the country with the most coronavirus-related deaths, registering 3,405 dead compared to 3,245 in China. Globally, there had been 8,843 deaths to date, or around 7% of the numbers who have died over the same time period of the current seasonal flu.

Australia and New Zealand finally begin to restrict travel in and out.

Tulsi Gabbard, the second to last candidate in the Democratic primaries to do so, stands down, endorsing Biden, and leaving he and Saunders the two old white guys left in the race to run against another old white guy.

Trump announced he was going to unveil measures to get experimental treatments into the hands of patients, despite some resistance from the Federal Drug Administration. Including chloroquine, an inexpensive anti-malaria drug that’s been around for over 70 years and has been shown to halt coronavirus in patients who have mild to moderate symptoms. It was first approved in the US in 1949, and has been widely used as a low-cost method to treat a variety of diseases, including malaria, lupus and rheumatoid arthritis. In several studies and through anecdotal evidence, chloroquine appears to significantly limit the replication of COVID-19, particularly when combined with the antibiotic azithromycin (zithromax Z-pak).

In a study published March 18th 2020, by French physician-researchers, a total of 36 patients (20 who were treated with chloroquine and 16 controls who were not) revealed that 50% of the treated group turned from positive to negative on the third day, then grew to 70% by the sixth day. Six test patients were treated with both chloroquine and Z-pak, and all six tested negative for coronavirus on day six. “Despite its small sample size our survey shows that hydroxychloroquine treatment is significantly associated with viral load reduction/disappearance in COVID-19 patients and its effect is reinforced by azithromycin,” the study concluded.

Both the Dutch CDC and the Italian Society of Infectious and Tropical disease have recommended the use of chloroquine for coronavirus patients, along with doctors from China, South Korea and Belgium – which have added the drug to their treatment guidelines. Meanwhile there are over two dozen clinical trials currently underway to study the efficacy of the drug. US physicians aren’t waiting for the trial results – as prescriptions for chloroquine have surged from 531 weekly prescriptions to 1,290, according to recent tracking data from IQVIA, (cited by Raymond James). The drug has become so popular that the UK has added both chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine to a list of drugs which cannot be exported for fear that there will be a shortage in the country. According to Italian scientist Andrea Savarino, who has worked at the Italian National Institute of Health since 2006. During the 2003 outbreak of SARS coronavirus, Savarino showed in laboratory research that chloroquine may be a useful weapon against it. But by the time his research was published in “The Lancet” in November 2003, the outbreak had dissipated and there were no human cases available to test.

Another drug which has shown significant promise for COVID-19 is Avigan, which has shown to shorten COVID-19 infections from 11 days to 4, as well as drop fever in patients from 4.2 days to 2.5 days after treatment is started. Avigan is an antiviral small molecule Favipiravir developed by Toyama chemical. It was tested in two small clinical trials of 80 patients (35 treatment/45 control) in Shenzhen, China, and in a second multi-centre trial in Wuhan, China. Favipiravir is a pyrazine carboximide derivative similar to an old TB drug but is an antiviral by virtue of inhibition viral RNA dependent RNA polymerases.

All these drugs just listed, and others, and despite some not being fully tested yet, can be used immediately according the US’s Right to Try Act of 2018.

And then there are the Cubans (pop. 11 million) Though under harsh sanctions and demonized since forever by much of the Western world, it’s too bad we are not allowed to do business with them. Their anti-viral Heberon – or Interferon Alpha 2b – a therapeutic, not a vaccine, has been used with great success in the treatment of coronavirus. A joint venture in China is now producing an inhalable version, and at least 15 nations are suddenly very interested in importing the therapeutic.

Since 1986, the Center for Genetic Engineering and Biotechnology of Havana, Cuba, has produced the recombinant human interferon alpha-2b, marketed as Heberon® Alfa R. The therapeutic use of this product has accumulated a high number of researches carried out in the country’s public health network. For the analysis of its safety profile, 28 years of reports of adverse events were reviewed in 5806 individuals, both children and adults, coming from 147 clinical trials or healthy assistances using the product. This review also contains a safety comparison between lyophilized and liquid formulations. In addition, an analysis of the connection between the occurrence of adverse events and the demographic characteristics of the patients, an analysis of immunogenicity and another on the variation of the thyroid function associated to the use of Heberon® Alfa R were included. Finally, a general analysis of the product’s efficacy based on the number of treated patients and the clinical results obtained are presented. Adverse events were reported in 4864 subjects (84 %). The main adverse events were those corresponding to the flu-like syndrome, with higher frequency in male white patients. Hypothyroidism and immunogenicity behaved lower than similar products in the international pharmaceutical market. Approximately 60 % of the treated patients obtained a relevant therapeutic response and a liquid formulation offered a better benefit/ risk ratio. The extensive clinical information evaluated recognizes a Heberon® Alfa R as a safe and effective drug, 30 years after its first production.

Mar. 20 The White House Coronavirus Task Force said it was closing the border with Mexico (pop. 126 million) to any nonessential travel, beginning March 21. The measure comes days after they announced that the US and Canada were closing their border by mutual decision. The measure allows trade to continue but restricts non-essential travel, such as tourism, from Canada. Canadian nationals who daily commute to the US for work would still be allowed in.

Coronavirus-related deaths surged past 10,000 globally.

Mar. 21 Globally there have been 276,474 cases (35.5 cases per million people), with 11,417 deaths. The hot spots currently include Italy, with 4,032 deaths and 778 cases per million, China (which has flattened it’s curve) with 3,255 deaths and 56 cases per million, Iran 1,433 deaths/ 234 cases per million, and Spain (pop. 47 million), 1,093 deaths/ 461 cases per million. While in North America, the US have 275 deaths and 60 cases per million, Canada 12 deaths and 29 cases per million, and Mexico with 2 deaths and 2 cases per million. Other countries with 2 or less cases per million people include Venezuela, Pakistan, Russia, and Cuba.

Epicentre in the US is New York City who as of today (Mar.21st) has 5,151 confirmed cases, which accounts for a third of the US cases, and half of NY State’s cases (17,041 nationwide and 7,102 in New York state) along with 29 deaths. But then New York State has the fourth largest population in the US at 19.5 million people. With 18.8 million of them crammed into New York City. The median age of those infected in the US is currently 47. The biggest problem the US will have with this epidemic, besides more than half their population being obese, is that its a nation of people who believe in their American exceptionalism, that they are an exception to the rules that apply to the rest of humanity.

Here in British Columbia (pop. five million), we’ve had 348 cases to-date, with 200 located in the Vancouver Coastal Health region, which extends from Richmond to Whistler. Ninety-five others are located in the Fraser Health region, which stretches from Burnaby to Hope. And 30 cases in the Island Health region, which includes Vancouver Island, 19 in the Interior Health region, which includes Kelowna and Kamloops, and 4 in Northern Health, which covers the province’s north. And there have been eight deaths from the virus in B.C., all of them associated in some way with the Lynn Valley Care Centre in North Vancouver, which was the first seniors’ care home to have an identified outbreak. In total, 36 residents and 18 health-care workers at Lynn Valley Care Centre have tested positive for the coronavirus.

Overall, it seems the populations who are “social distancing” (maintaining a distance of about 2 meters or 6 feet from anyone), are doing the best in stopping the spread. Imagine that, and it’s free. Frequently washing of the hands, stop playing with our faces, don’t sneeze, spit and cough when around others, keep one’s distance, and it hurts me to say it, but cutback on the hugging and kissing of acquaintances for a bit. And avoid crowds, stores, sporting or mass entertainment events, and other situations likely to attract large numbers of people.

The experts in the viral world figure things will settle down and we will return to our typical herd immunity rate of 70 to 80%, when two things happen. First a large enough quantity of us have caught the disease and become immune, and secondly, someone comes up with a vaccine or a prophylactic antiviral in time to cut off, reduce, or contain the spread. And though it ain’t no disco nor fooling around, it isn’t a zombie apocalypse or a mass extinction event either. Infection isn’t our primary risk at this point, it’s the shutting down of our sense of reason.

As to the youth of the “Five Eyes”, the UK, New Zealand, Australia, Canada, and especially the US, who seemingly have no regard for containing the virus or admitting there is even an epidemic underway, they are like their parents, who have blamed all the world’s ills on their grandparents and parents, us boomers. Everyone aghast when during spring break they filled the beaches in an hedonistic ego, alcoholic and drug mosh pit. As is the privileged way. Seemingly oblivious to what was going on around them. And for most, paid for by their parents, who’ll greet them when they return with a smile and shake of the head uttering “kids”. But remember, just a few months ago these “kids” were the extinction rebellion, blaming the boomers for climate change, and believing that the world was going to end in ten years. Often insincerely, and following the herd, they attended pro-abortion rallies, pride parades, and protests of all kinds, because their lib-tard professors at school told them to. They would ban and attack any conservatives, and comedians, from speaking or performing at their school. While during the day they’d demand free speech by yelling in someone’s face and not allowing them to be heard. They blocked railroads, attacked anyone not thinking their group’s way, and even had a military arm called Antifa (anti-fascist) who acted like fascists. They had a deep lack of respect for government, and for others not in their tribe. While all of us were divided this way and that. By gender, age, generation, skin color, political affiliation, music preference, what type of car one drives, class, religion, and spirituality, or not, all the while staring at and playing with our phones for much of our day. Besides the young see that the virus is not affecting them, other than perhaps getting a cold-like flu for a few days and being carriers without knowing or caring, as much as it’s affecting and killing us evil boomers. This is also the same generation who only a few months ago would film themselves on their phones, going to supermarkets, and opening ice cream containers out of the freezers and licking some off the top then putting the lid back on and returning it to the freezer. Today they are filming themselves going to a supermarket and coughing and licking the fruits and vegetables, then putting them back, for someone to buy. They are shameless, with the goal for many to become an internet star and “influencer”, and have no idea what the word empathy means. And sadly, unlike the young in other societies, they have no sense of responsibility for anyone other than themselves, so they simply don’t care. But then who can blame them, they grew up in a world we boomers created by being the largest most silent majority in history for over fifty years now, and collectively allowed to happen. Does one not reap what they sow? At the same time many of us boomers are now perfectly willing to give up even more of our freedoms for a little bit of security, to shame those not willing to also give up such things, and who refuse to be a part of the collective. We falsely hope that once the epidemic is over our freedoms will return to us and it’ll be like it was before, a society extremely divided and ripe to be conquered. While in actual fact, nothing will be the same. Which itself could be good or bad. We simply don’t know yet, the fight is still being fought. We are really just pundits giving our opinion, based on the opinions told to us, with us talking to each other saying the same things verbatim.

Mar. 22nd With time passing each day, more and more information, case study and data is becoming available. The subtle scary aspect of this coronavirus, is many infected people are well enough to go about their daily business, unwittingly spreading it to others because any symptoms don’t appear for, on average, five to six days after infection. New data coming out of China shows that as many as a third of the people who test positive for the coronavirus may show delayed symptoms or none at all. While scientists have been unable to agree on what role asymptomatic transmission plays in spreading the disease, they do know that in many cases, the virus appears to cause a mild illness lasting about two weeks in children, adolescents and younger adults, and potentially more severe disease lasting three to six weeks in older people.

In summary someone who has Covid-19 but has no symptoms, may infect one person out of every ten they meet, if too close or in a confined space together, while only one per cent of those people who get infected and may get sick for a week of flu symptoms, may die because they are compromised.

If we can believe them, The World Health Organization (WHO) released one of the most exhaustive pieces published on how the virus spreads. The results of their research show that COVID-19 doesn’t spread as easily as we first thought or the media had us believe. The report shows that if you come in contact with someone who tests positive for the disease you have a 1–5% chance of catching it as well. The variability is large because the infection is based on the type of contact and how long, with the majority of infections coming from prolonged exposures in confined spaces with other infected individuals. Person-to-person and surface contact is by far the most common cause. When a cluster of infected people appeared, 78 to 85% of the time, it was caused by an infection within the family by droplets, and other carriers of infection in close contact with an infected person.

Or as Dr. Paul Auwaerter, the Clinical Director for the Division of Infectious Diseases at John Hopkins University School of Medicine echoes, “If you have a COVID-19 patient in your household, your risk of developing the infection is about 10%…. If you were casually exposed to the virus in the workplace, and you were not locked up in conference room for six hours with someone who was infected (like a hospital), your chance of infection is about 0.5%”. According to Dr. Auwaerter, these transmission rates are very similar to the seasonal flu.

According to WHO’s report, air-based transmission or untraceable community spread is very unlikely. The data from China shows that community-based spread was only a very small handful of cases. And that the “transmission by fine aerosols in the air over long distances is not one of the main causes of spread. Most of the 2,055 infected hospital workers in China, were either infected at home or in the early phase of the outbreak in Wuhan when hospital safeguards were not raised yet”.

And according to a working paper from the Department of Ecology and Evolutionary Biology at Princeton University, “The current scientific consensus is that most transmission via respiratory secretions happens in the form of large respiratory droplets … rather than small aerosols. Droplets, fortunately, are heavy enough that they don’t travel very far and instead fall from the air after travelling only a few feet.” As one doctor, who wants to remain anonymous says, “Corona doesn’t have wings”.

To summarize, China, Singapore, and South Korea’s containment efforts worked because community-based and airborne transmission aren’t common. The most common form of transmission is person-to-person or surface-based. And is why the best things we can do is keep our distance when around others and wash our hands often. While the true viral capacity is unknown at this moment, it is theorized that COVID-19 is more than the seasonal flu but less than other viruses. The average number of people to which a single infected person will transmit the virus, range from as low as 1.5 to a high of 3.0.

In China, only 8.1% of cases were 20-somethings, 1.2% were teens, and 0.9% were 9 or younger, while there isn’t a single death reported below the age of 10 in the world, and most children who test positive don’t show any symptoms at all. As of Feb. 20th, 78% of the cases reported were ages 30 to 69. The WHO report hypothesizes this is for a biological reason and isn’t related to lifestyle or exposure. “Even when we looked at households, we did not find a single example of a child bringing the infection into the household and transmitting to the parents.It was the other way around. And the children tend to have a mild disease.” said the report.

Global data shows that around 95% of people who are tested aren’t positive, but the rate does vary by country. Every country has a different population size which skew multiple and cumulative case comparisons. And though viruses don’t acknowledge our human borders, by controlling for population, you can properly weigh the number of cases in the context of the local population size. For instance the US population is five and a half times greater than Italy, six times larger than South Korea, and only a quarter of the size of China, so comparing cases is mundane. As is already happening with China and many other countries, regardless of particular policy solutions, such as shutting the borders or social distancing, the virus, as with most things in nature, is displaying it’s typical pattern of not growing linearly forever but accelerating, plateauing, then quickly declining. As the virus spreads it will follow this pattern, and whether it is environmental or our own efforts, viruses quickly decline, despite what the media tells us. Every country will follow a similar pattern. And is why the Bell curve is the dominant trait of outbreaks and indeed, a fact of nature. But mainstream media shows only the more dramatic looking graphs of linear projection of the virus, instead of the more truthful, logarithmic scale. And of course they show us the symbolic sport-like scoreboards of cases and deaths.

Globally, 80–85% of all cases are mild, and will not require a hospital visit and home-based treatment/ no treatment is effective. While reports from the CDC, suggest that 12% of COVID-19 cases need some form of hospitalization, which is lower than the projected severity rate of 20%, with 80% being mild cases. The report also suggests that 1% of everyone in the US who is tested for COVID-19 will have a severe case that will require a hospital visit or long-term admission. For context, this year’s flu season has so far led to at least 17 million medical visits and 370,000 hospitalizations (0.1%) out of 30–50 million infections.

Based on the initial results, and the results from other countries, the total number of positive COVID-19 cases will increase as testing increases, but the fatality rate will continue to fall and the severity case mix will fall. As the US continues to expand testing, the case fatality rate will decline over the next few weeks. Reasonable estimates for the case fatality ratio in the general US population vary from 0.05% to 1%. The US fatality rate is already drastically declining as the number of cases increases, halving every four or five days. The fatality rate will eventually level off and plateau as the US case-mix becomes apparent. This can already be seen. On Mar.8th the US fatality rate was 4.06% (22 deaths of 541 cases), five days later the rate dropped to 2.27% (49 deaths of 2,247 cases) and by Mar.20th the rate was 1.32% (256 deaths of 19,383 cases). With most of the deaths, people had underlying conditions. In hard hit Italy, 99% of all deaths had an underlying pathology. Only 0.8% had no underlying condition. And that most of those infected were over the age of 60, while the median age of a fatality was 80. All of Italy’s fatalities under the age of 40, were males with serious pre-existing medical conditions.

Comparatively, these fatality rates are similar to Pneumonia and influenza (1.53% to 1.93%), Chronic lower respiratory disease (1.48% to 1.93%), all respiratory causes (3.04% to 4.14%), Heart disease (3.21% to 4.4%), Cancer (0.68% to 1.05%) and Diabetes (0.26% to 0.39%).

Mar.23rd. Globally, 338,307 cases of COVID-19 have been reported, including 14,602 deaths. Comparably, over the same time frame, 13.7 million people around the world have died. 152,000 died each day/ 6,500 every hour. Predominately from cardiovascular diseases of the heart (4.9 million), cancer (2.5 million) and respiratory diseases (1 million).

A poll shows 13% of Americans believe they are currently infected with COVID-19 (mathematically impossible), so of course full-on panic is blocking their ability to think clearly and determine how to deploy their resources to stop this virus. The same poll showed over three quarters of Americans are scared of what is being done to society through law and hysteria, not of infection or spreading the virus to those most vulnerable. At this rate, we will spend more money on “shelter-in-place” (house arrest) than if we completely rebuilt our acute care and emergency capacity. Rampant hoarding and a volatile stock market aren’t being driven by the coronavirus, but rather such hoarding behaviour strongly demonstrates an irrational hysteria, from purchasing ineffective household masks to buying toilet paper by the hundreds of rolls. The fear card is being played, and is being driven by government action, and the fear of what the government will do next. All this because the virus has impacted 0.004% of the nation’s population.

While countries around the world are passing bills to help small business’ and people who are being affected by the crisis and economic downturn, with hats in hand, and leaving a slug trail behind them, the “coronavirus corporate coup” moves ever forward. For a crisis must never go to waste. While this is happening in many countries, in the US, the aerospace and arms manufacturer Boeing, is asking for a $60 billion bailout. Even though their financial problems predated the crisis, with the mismanagement that led to the 737 Max as well as defense and space products that don’t work. They are now trying to get the taxpayer to foot the bill for its errors, so it can go back to making more of them. Elon Musk, and Jeff Bezos (the richest person in the world) want $5 billion in grants or loans to keep their commercial space company employees on the job and launch facilities open. They also want the IRS to give them cash for R&D tax credits. Defense contractors want their payments sped up, and they want to widen a giant loophole called ‘other transaction authority’ to get around restrictions on profiteering, which will allow the Pentagon to shovel money to defense contractors without restrictions. The hotel industry wants $150 billion, restaurants want $145 billion, manufacturers want $1.4 trillion, and the International Council of Shopping Centers wants a guarantee of up to $1 trillion. The beer industry wants $5 billion, candy industry wants $500 million, and even though gyms and fitness centers are closed, Adidas is seeking support for a long-sought provision allowing people to use pretax money to pay for gym memberships and fitness equipment. Meat-packers want expedited visas for seasonal workers, so they can undercut wages of their workers, and importers want to stop paying duties they incurred for harming domestic industries for illegally dumping products into the US.

And while all schools have also shut down, even though they would provide a single point of testing a large population for a possible infection in the home to prevent community spread, based on transmission evidence children are more likely to catch COVID-19 in the home than at school. As well, they are more likely to expose older vulnerable adults as multi-generational homes are more common.

The data is overwhelming at this point that community-based spread and airborne transmission is not a threat. We don’t have significant examples of spreading through restaurants or gyms. When you consider the environment COVID-19 prefers, isolating every family in their home is a perfect situation for infection and transmission among other family members. Evidence from South Korea and Singapore shows that it is completely possible and preferred to continue on with life while making accommodations that are data-driven, such as social distancing and regular temperature checks.

And due to coronavirus’ sensitivity to UV light and heat (just like the normal influenza virus), it is very likely that it will “burn off” in many areas as humidity increases and temperatures rise. The University of Maryland mapped severe COVID-19 outbreaks with local weather patterns around the world, from the US to China. They found that the virus thrives in a certain temperature and humidity channel. “The researchers found that all cities experiencing significant outbreaks of COVID-19 have very similar winter climates with an average temperature of 41 to 52 degrees Fahrenheit, an average humidity level of 47% to 79% with a narrow east-west distribution along the same 30–50 N” latitude”.

Mar. 24th Globally: 414,661 cases and 18,552 deaths so far. And though one of the reasons why viral outbreaks attract concern from medical authorities is that they may have the potential to kill many more if they are allowed to spread unchecked. Comparing the COVID-19 death total to-date, over the same time frame, more than 238,000 people have died of HIV/AIDS.

Curfews, quarantines, lock-downs and house arrests continue to expand. In China, two months after they imposed strict lock-down measures, such measures are now being lifted. But elsewhere, extreme measures to meet the threat and control of the virus are indeed underway, but does that mean we should destroy our economies and societies to achieve it? It reminds me of what a US army officer in Vietnam once said, “We had to destroy the village in order to save it”.

In the US, 16 states have now locked down their populations, more than 158 million people. At it’s peak China locked down 760 million. Today India is locking down more than 1.3 billion people. And while Italy, Iran, and South Korea case rates are high and in some cases accelerating, they are perhaps two weeks away from those numbers beginning to flatten, then drop. It has been estimated, and according to nature, that, Spain, Germany, France, the UK and the US, Japan and India, whose cases are all quickly accelerating, will begin to see a flattening and then a quick drop-off in three to four weeks. It looks like a typical lock-down will last 21 days. After which, we should be allowed back outside. If not, something is definately amiss.

In Europe, Sweden (pop.10 million) and Germany (pop. 83 million) have closed their borders to Europeans and all foreign citizens, but migrants claiming asylum from the Middle East and Africa are still allowed to enter. Much like in Canada, where an emergency bill is trying to be passed to help the economy and Canadians, 500,000 of which are now out of work, but which includes an exemption from air travel restrictions, which took effect Mar. 18Th, where temporary foreign workers will still be allowed to enter the country to fill jobs that have been shutdown in the agriculture, seafood processing and other key industries, for cheaper wages, and can now stay twice as long (temporarily) for one to two years. While many governments are passing bills where people will be paid for staying at home, just like the concept of a “Guaranteed Minimum Income”, which has already been programmed into the narrative over the last ten years. On many levels, the solutions our governments are coming up with are worse than the epidemic. But there is a method to their madness. I suggest if you do not know about Agenda 21 and 30, it might be a good time to do your homework.

But on a human level, there are positives out there. Parents are playing with their children for the first time in who knows when, relationships are getting better, some are getting worse. With many families under quarantine are at long last getting to know each other again. Asking each other “Where have you been these last few years?” Hopefully people are also thinking about the need to stop spending money for things we don’t need, with money we don’t have.

What scares me is how many sheeple have become afraid of their own shadows, believe the fear-mongering by the government talking heads on TV, and are willing to give up any freedom they had for security. Or as Benjamin Franklin once said: “Those who would give up essential Liberty, to purchase a little temporary Safety, deserve neither Liberty nor Safety.”

I foresee that soon the global population will be vaccinated. No matter how one feels or thinks about vaccines, after the COVID-19 pandemic, many are predicting that people will have to prove that they’ve been vaccinated in order to do anything at all such as study, work, travel, and receive government benefits. Being vaccinated, we will not care, as long as we stay alive. Unfortunately there are far worse things than death.

It’s like we’ve become packs of dogs where after a talking head stands up, points somewhere and yells “squirrel” at the top of their lungs, we all go off running, barking our heads off. But we are supposedly smarter than dogs, so we’ll go off running whenever a mainstream news talking head comes up with any number of words to replace the word squirrel, whether Russia!, Racist!, Ukraine!, Impeach!, or COVID-19! Then like a pack of dogs chasing a car and catching up to it, we don’t know what to do about it when we get there.

Playing the fear card, the CDC announces that, worst case scenario, more than 150 to 200 million infections will happen in the US. This estimate is hundreds of times bigger than China’s infection rate (30% of the US population compared to 0.006% in China). Does that really sound plausible to you?

What I personally fear is the “shock doctrine”, as described by Canadian writer Naomi Klein, that is being played out yet once again. It is when collective crises or disasters happen (real or manufactured) are used to push through deeply unpopular policies on people and societies who are disorientated to notice or even protect their own interests. Klein calls this “disaster capitalism”. For instance, a month and a half after 9/11 the US passed their insidious Patriot Act without anyone in the public knowing or caring that many of their rights and privacy had been taken away and the country has been fighting wars ever since. Many people believe today is one of those moments where the global elite are rolling out a pre-planned phase of social and economic chaos, and which afterwards their totalitarian new world order will be unleashed. Order from the chaos they say.

And as already mentioned Agenda 21 is their plan. It is an inventory and control plan of all things; food, land, water, energy, minerals, plants, animals, construction, all means of production, information, and all people. It is a plan for the destruction of representative government, and for unelected regional boards to take its place. It is mostly driven because the current and past lifestyle consumption patterns of a once large affluent middle class (the baby boomers) are no longer sustainable. Consumption patterns that the globalists created, but now deemed a problem. A classic “problem reaction solution”, where solutions they created goes to the problems they created. To end the focus on personal responsibility and instead make the solution a collective action. Basically a herd where one size fits all. So because of our meat intake, consumption of frozen processed convenient food, use of fossil fuels, use of motor vehicles, air-conditioning, a huge inventory of small electrical appliances and suburban housing, but a few examples, the globalists will make it sustainable not by getting rid of such things, but by controlling such things.

In a large nut shell, the globalist’s agendas are behind zoning, land and water use control, wealth redistribution, one cashless currency, cap and trade, smart grid of AI and 5G, smart meters, carbon taxes, high gasoline prices, global citizens, global public education system, common core nationalized education standards, bio-fuels, Marxist ideology advancing across the world, food control, gun control, health control, unchecked immigration and open borders so as to strip countries of their identity, and color-coded uprisings and other coups against the few countries left in the world who do not abide by the globalist’s central bank system. There plan also includes a digitalised smart grid and ‘internet of things’, a robotic transport system, facial recognition population surveillance programs, new strains of genetically modified organisms and vaccines, control of private land, and shorelines, whether of oceans, lakes or rivers, one military/intelligence machine, complete command and control, and one centralized unelected body governing the world.

They must also re-set global finance, to pretend they support any Green New Deals which wave the flag of Zero carbon. The extinction rebellion folks, paid by the globalists, specifically George Soros, are over-joyed over the fact as the global economy shuts down as does carbon emissions, and that the elderly are being culled from the global population, easing even more stress on Mother Earth.

Which brings us to one of the most important parts of their agenda, depopulation. In order to keep the house of cards standing, it has been postulated that such people-hating globalist’s plans hinge on sacrificing the working poor, the impoverished, seniors on fixed incomes, people with disabilities, and the tens of millions of people living between starvation and death. Afterwards, the percentage of people left will continue status quo, then a few years down the road, with ever more dwindling resources, another cull would then be needed.

Perhaps, this is what our world is going through today. The scare tactics being employed are more dangerous than the virus that is the excuse for deploying them. Under this induced state of fear, hysteria, and anxiety all sorts of nefarious endeavours are being played out. Its success depends upon “a large body of people following the instructions passed down by the political puppets of the deep state and by the cowardly repetition of these instructions by the mainstream media.”

And that those able to recognize the true nature of the scam are being forced into not stepping out of line, “thereby risking their job, security or status within the rigidly enforced master/slave relationship of the status quo. By complying with it such a narrative, a mute populace establishes the basis of its own debasement and slavery.”

Mar. 25th. The US announces a sweeping $2 trillion measure to aid workers, businesses, families, and a strained healthcare system. Meanwhile, they and we in Canada, get over 70% of our pharmaceuticals, most of our antibiotics, and drugs such as Advil and Ibuprofen, from China. Or rather used to get.

India’s 1.3 billion people have joined the global lock-down, and Spain recorded more than 700 deaths over the past 24 hours, surpassing China in the total death toll, making the country now second to only Italy.

Mainstream news runs with the story that a man has died from the previously mentioned drug, chloroquine. Of course what they didn’t tell you was that the man actually died from ingesting another type of chloroquine, which is used to clean out bacteria in fish-tanks.

Extinction Rebellion affiliate in East Midlands, England, start putting up posters around the region exclaiming that “Corona is the Cure. Humans are the disease”, and announcing that the virus is revenge for climate change.

On the finger pointing topic. On Jan. 21st the first case of human-to-human transmission of the coronavirus was recorded. Two days later, and with only 500 confirmed cases and 17 deaths, China shut down most of the nation and enacted a city-wide quarantine of Wuhan. Even though such an early and clear and present danger signal shot across their bows, how did Europe and the US react? Italy, with a population around 4% of that of China, did not instate a national lock-down until after it reached some 12,462 confirmed cases and 827 deaths. Many doctors there now recall seeing “very strange pneumonia, very severe, particularly in old people in December and even November.” When Italy shut itself down, the UK were doing the “ignore the virus to hopefully build a “herd mentality” routine, then a week later quickly changed it’s policy. The US did nothing domestically to prepare for the virus until mid-March when hospitals began to be saturated with patients, doctors ran out of basic medical supplies, and cities and states across the nation began shutting down.

Other questioning voices have recently been heard as to some extraordinary anomalies, such as the dramatic differences among the dead from Coronavirus between, say, Italy and Germany. For example, on Mar. 19Th, there were 52 deaths in Germany and 3,405 in Italy. The difference is in Germany, whoever dies of cancer, pneumonia, cardiac arrest and Coronavirus, is considered as having died of cancer, pneumonia etc. That is, the virus is not computed as the cause of death, unless it is the exclusive cause. In Italy, instead, whoever has contracted the Coronavirus, is deemed to have died from it – if he dies – along with pre-existing pathologies. Aware of this statistical anomaly the Italian Superior Institute for Health has published an analysis based on the medical records of the deceased, that is, those who died from existing causes, to which the coronavirus may have contributed, and those who died from the coronavirus. In this new statistic, the percentage is 0.8%, comparable to the numbers in Germany.

As to the belief, bat-eating Chinese people caused the current COVID-19 pandemic. According to the most recent science research, the origin of the COVID-19 is actually unknown. And shows it is unlikely that bat consumption caused it. Most scientists believe that the virus did not enter the human population directly but through an intermediate host such as pangolins (scaly anteaters), civets, ferrets, or even turtles, pigs, or cats. The much studied 2003 SARS virus – a cousin of the COVID-19 virus – for example, is thought to have leaped from bats to civet cats, mutating there before making a final jump to humans. Initially believed the virus to have originated in a seafood market in Wuhan, subsequent studies by researchers from Japan, Taiwan, and Mainland China itself have cast strong doubts on that theory, primarily because Chinese people as a whole generally do not have a tradition of eating bats. Journalists from France 24 TV recently tracked down the makers of five of the six most-shared videos and found that none of these videos were filmed in Wuhan, or in China, as many netizens had claimed. Instead, all videos were filmed in Palau or Indonesia, in locales where bats have traditionally been consumed as food, and where adventurous visitors from around the world are welcomed to sample their local, traditional cuisine.

And though the COVID-19 epidemic first arose in Wuhan it doesn’t necessarily mean that the virus must have arisen there. Take the AIDS epidemic as an example. While the AIDS epidemic arose in Los Angeles in the 1970’s, the HIV virus actually arose in the human population much earlier – around 1908, in the southeastern corner of what is present day Cameroon. The virus then mutated and spread within the human population for more than half a century – below everyone’s radar – before exploding onto the global scene in the 1970’s.

In Canada, there were 145 new confirmed cases of COVID-19 in BC, bringing the total to 617. There are now 44 cases on Vancouver Island, 330 in the Vancouver Coast Health Authority, 194 in Fraser Health, 41 in Interior Health and nine in Northern Health. Fifty-nine people are in hospital, including 23 in intensive care units. Eight long-term care homes now have cases of the virus, up two from on Monday (23rd). The two new facilities affected are Little Mountain in Vancouver and Evergreen Heights in White Rock. Each has one resident and one staff member with COVID-19.

The Lynn Valley Care Centre in North Vancouver has had 42 cases, and 10 of the 13 deaths in BC from the virus. Only 30,000 people in the province have been tested for the virus.

The BC government has closed six provincial parks (all having a beach) on Vancouver Island amid concerns that a spike in visitors was putting people’s health at risk during the outbreak. The city of Victoria is going to allow temporary shelters for the homeless at Beacon Hill and Topaz parks during the outbreak. What they will do after the epidemic, they haven’t thought about yet.

The casual attitude that some take toward physical distancing has pissed off many, so social media is full of calls to enforce the kinds of lock-downs seen in other countries, with police fining, even jailing, those who venture from their homes without proof of a valid reason. Vancouver city council has just armed itself with the ability to slap fines of up to $50,000 for businesses, $1,000 for individuals, on those who break emergency orders. Following Victoria’s lead, West Shore Parks and Rec and Saanich, worried that people weren’t following social-distancing measures either, closed their playing fields and other outdoor facilities Monday. The harbour authority closed the Ogden Point breakwater for the same reasons.

Data shows roughly half of the more than 2,790 people in Canada with the coronavirus got it from community transmission. This is a dramatic shift in how the virus is spread. According to Canada’s chief medical health officer, Dr. Theresa Tam, the trend is turning toward community transmission, as opposed to contracting the coronavirus from travel. Twenty-seven people have died of COVID-19 to date in Canada. Of the cases reported, approximately half (53%) are male and approximately one third (30%) of cases are 60 years old and over. The date of symptom onset of the first case of COVID-19 in Canada was January 15, 2020, more than two months ago.

The Canadian government has no immediate plans to use cellphone data to track people’s movements during the COVID-19 crisis, but the prime minister did not rule out resorting to the tool at some point, saying “all options are on the table” to keep Canadians safe in exceptional times. Trudeau’s comments followed suggestions that municipal officials in Ottawa and Toronto were considering use of telecommunications data to monitor people’s whereabouts in the fight against the virus. Cellphone data could be used to create a “heat map” of where people are congregating or even to pinpoint an infected person’s location.

Russia, which has recorded 1036 cases of the coronavirus, and 4 deaths, orders all cinemas, nightclubs and children’s play areas in the country to close, after barring foreigners and closing borders back on Jan.31st. Bars and restaurants are still open and people are allowed to travel freely but to avoid non-essential trips, avoid leaving home and of course keep social distancing. Singapore, who also closed it’s borders on Jan 31st, so far has had 2 deaths, and have made standing too close to someone now illegal.

Poland has also ratcheted up its restrictions on movement and gatherings in an effort to slow the accelerating spread of coronavirus. The new measures, which will apply from today until April 11, would restrict people to only being allowed to leave their homes for essential work, visits to the doctor or pharmacy, to buy food, or to walk the dog.

In Philadelphia, the Police Department has been instructed its offices to temporarily stop making arrests for certain nonviolent crimes, including drug offences, burglary, economic theft and vandalism, until next month. With the arresting officers detaining the offender, processing the paperwork, and then releasing the offender back into the general population. The announcement came 24 hours after Philadelphia courts closed until April 1 to limit the spread of the coronavirus.

In Fort Worth, Texas, the police will cease arresting people for “low-level crimes” (Class C misdemeanours) such as thefts involving less than $100 and vandalism, if a citation can be issued in its place.

In California, officials say 56 percent of the state, or more than 20 million people could be infected, even though just 2,724 positive cases and 59 deaths have been reported in the state thus far. They also announced a “stay home” order for the state’s nearly 40 million residents. The clampdown includes the closure of various types of businesses, including dine-in restaurants, entertainment venues and public events and gatherings. The state’s Department of Water and Power announced they will shut off water and power for the businesses that don’t comply with the “safer at home” ordinance.

In Los Angeles (pop. 4 million – 669 cases and 11 deaths), the LA County Sheriff ordered all gun stores closed (fearing that too many first-time gun-owners were getting access to weapons), though this has since been overturned. And LA Mayor Eric Garcetti, lashed out at non-essential stores that refuse to close, making ominous threats. This all seems to be accelerating down the extremely slippery slope towards full authoritarian control, something the politicians will be unwilling to easily give up once this crisis blows through.

About 56% of all new cases in the US are in New York City, while 60% of all US new cases are in New York State. To-date New York City has 14,776 cases and 131 related deaths, amongst it nearly 19 million people.

Overall as of today the US has 55,568 cases, with 809 deaths.

The Prime Minister of Australia has just announced that around 80% of Australia cases are imported from the US.

Mar. 26Th: From 0 to 250,000 cases: 3 months. From 250,000 to 500,000 cases: 1 week. Epidemiologists expect 2-3 million cases will be diagnosed eventually, and with approximately an average mortality rate of 1.5%, about 37,500 deaths, then will drop off. Once again comparably, 85 million die each year from diabetes, 59 million from influenza and pneumonia, in fact, pneumonia kills more than 800,000 children under the age of 5 each year. (67,000 a month) Accounting for 15% of all deaths of children under five years old. Aspiration Pneumonia alone has a mortality rate of 21% overall, 29% hospital-associated, and 30-62% in “older, sicker patients”. On average, 9,300 people die on the planet every year from natural disasters, 26,000 from terrorism, and in the US alone, around 167,500 people die each year from accidents/unintentional injuries (48 per 100,000). Speaking of “per 100,000”, with all other demographic/population, murder, birth, death, etc, rates, the standard is “per 100,000 people”. So lets do that. Current Covid deaths per 100,000 people: Italy- 9.4 deaths per 100,000, Spain- 4.3 per, Iran- 2.2 per, Switzerland- 1.4 per, France- 1.3 per, Netherlands- 1.2 per, UK- 0.5 per, South Korea- 0.2 per, US- 0.2 per, Germany and Canada- 0.1 per. This may all change, if say the virus mutates, but we still of course do not know. But we do know how nature works.

While regions in France have just banned all sales of alcohol, and in the US pot dispensaries are now deemed “essential businesses” and may stay open, in Canada, we are now under a mandatory quarantine. If you do not abide by the actions of keeping social distancing and not going to a beach, you can now be fined up to $750,000 or 6 months in jail (just as governments are emptying their prison populations of the least violent offenders, because of COVID). If you are deemed a danger to someone’s life, like forcing a hug on someone or refusing to get out of their now expanded “safe space” its a one million dollar fine and/or five years in prison. And what if, COVID becomes just another seasonal flu? When does the lock-down end?

Canada also announced an $82 billion emergency bill to help workers, business’ and households, and to help them meet their liquidity needs. $30 million of the plan is going to the media “for advertising”. So that we continue to have the latest news and information given to us through verbiage and dramatic visuals of the global elite’s mouthpieces. In fact, the Canadian government has given $30 million to the media each year since the Liberals have been in power. In a blatant quid pro quo, mainstream media then tell only one narrative that they are told to tell, and tell it repetitively. The same message no matter what site, TV channel, or radio station.

Canada has also earmarked $50 million, as part of its response to today’s launch of the United Nations $2 billion, COVID-19 humanitarian response plan. Which is calling for a co-ordinated response to “help the world’s war-torn, displaced and most destitute people, who are facing new misery because of the pandemic”. Or as Canada’s International Development Minister Karina Gould stated, “It’s a bit of an enlightened self-interest, to help the world’s most desperate people fight COVID-19 because it is in the country’s long-term security interest as well as being the right thing to do.” The appeal is targeting the spread of the virus in South America, Africa, the Middle East and Asia. One just has to ask, why not help Canadians? Why are we sending supplies our own health care workers desperately need, elsewhere. The government’s wet cardboard stand is that such foreign aid “protects Canada’s future security and economic prosperity from a virus that knows no borders.”

After millions of Chinese left China when the virus was spreading, before they were locked-down, today, China claims it has its domestic outbreak under control and that their new cases are only from foreigners, they have decided to suspend entry of all foreigners’ entry to China, including the entry of foreigners with currently valid visas and residence permits.

Jeff Bezos and other corporate executives across the country sold approximately $9.2 billion in shares of their own companies between early February and the end of last week, salvaging potential losses of up to $1.9 billion, according to an analysis of more than 4,000 regulatory filings by the Wall Street Journal. Richest man in the world Bezos, was the largest seller selling $3.4 billion in Amazon shares the first week of February, right before the market peaked, avoiding paper losses of approximately $317 million through March 20. The sale constituted roughly 3% of his holdings and was nearly as much stock as he sold during the previous 12 months.

With lock-downs spreading, as we continue to be abused by government and mainstream media, and give up ever more of our freedoms, it seems our reaction might prove to be deadlier than the virus will ever be. And remember, with the ongoing lock-downs, all demonstrations, protests, marches, festivals, fairs, concerts, blockades, and town hall meetings are done. Perhaps never to be allowed again. The whole unity thing, of people coming together to rise up before injustices, walking arm in arm and hand in hand by the sometimes hundreds of thousands is no more. And we folded like a cheap suit. What sickens me is how easily we surrendered. We all know something is going on. But, seemingly at the drop of a hat or because somebody yelled squirrel, we easily and very quickly, erased any logic, common sense, reasoning, and rational thinking we had left. We should be asking questions and not allowing the media and sheeple to form or shape our thoughts and emotions.

A list of twelve medical experts whose opinions on the Coronavirus outbreak contradict the official narratives of the mainstream media, and the memes so prevalent on social media. Or as one of them, Dr Peter Goetzsche, Professor of Clinical Research Design and Analysis at the University of Copenhagen and founder of the Cochrane Medical Collaboration, states, “Should it turn out that the epidemic wanes before long, there will be a queue of people wanting to take credit for this. And we can be damned sure draconian measures will be applied again next time. But remember the joke about tigers. “Why do you blow the horn?” “To keep the tigers away.” “But there are no tigers here.” “There you see!”

Mar. 27Th : The facts to date of Covid -19. It is a new virus, not a flu. Antibiotics do not work against viral infections. And it is more severe than the flu because it’s new to our bodies, so we have yet to develop an immune system which can take it on. It is passed around by physical contact and in droplet form, from shaking hands etc. If transmitted airborne from a cough or sneeze or even just breathing it can linger in the air for up to 3 hours. But then we are talking still air, for Covid-19 is not wind resistant. And it is transmitted from us touching surfaces where a droplet of Covid lies, for up to 3 hours. Especially stainless steel and plastic surfaces. So wash hands often and more importantly become more aware and conscious of what your hands touch, and stop playing with your face. And as already mentioned cover your mouth when coughing or sneezing, which we should have been doing our whole lives. And remember social distancing does not mean social isolation.

Start honouring the incredible intelligence of our own bodies and become more aware of what we put into them. As to this new virus, the body knows more what it has to do then we do. It is adapting to take on this new threat to it’s existence, by developing it’s immune system. The best thing we can do to help strengthen it is by relieving our stress levels, by taking a very large chill pill. But which mainstream news are trying to keep elevated. Exercise, walk, and stretch. Think nutrition and natural supplements, like Vitamin C, Zinc, anti-viral mushrooms, such as Reishi and Agarikon, which are anti-inflammatory, anti-bacterial, and anti-viral and other traditional and natural medicines.

At this point in time we are past the point of being able to contain the spread. It is now all about reducing and mitigating the problem. The biggest problem that is arising in many countries is that their health care capacity is being overwhelmed. The US, Spain and Italy are getting so hard hurt because they waited too long to take action and unlike China, South Korea, Germany, Canada, the UK, and other countries, they lack a national, publicly-funded universal health care system. As for the US health care system, both heads of the US’s two-headed one-party system have spent decades pandering to, and giving the majority of government money (their citizens money) to the banks, corporations and the military. This has created their current situation where uninsured COVID-19 patients are racking up $35,000 medical bills, with even insured patients paying out-of-pocket expenses in excess of $1,300. And along with the millions of Americans getting thrown off of employer-provided health insurance, and millions now unemployed, their health system crash is inevitable, or as comedian Megan Amram tweeted a couple of weeks ago, “Corona is a black light and America is a cum-stained hotel room.”

As for the US health system, of the US’s federal budget this year ($4.407 trillion), $2.739 trillion of it is mandatory spending (providing for individuals who need help in some capacity). This includes Social Security (including programs like unemployment benefits and welfare), which demands $1.046 trillion of it. The remaining mandatory spending budget ($1.693 trillion) is spent on items such as Medicare and Medicaid. Both of which are vital and necessary programs, but are not self-sustaining. Medicare is currently underfunded, relying on general tax dollars to make up the difference. Only a portion of the $625 billion Medicare budget is covered by Medicare taxes. More than what they spend on their health care system, they also have a $1.203-trillion discretionary spending budget. Nearly 70 % or more of which is spent on the military. In fact, the US allocates more money to military spending than the next 10 countries combined. The discretionary budget pays for such things as the Department of Defense, all military spending, Veterans Affairs, the Department of Defense and Homeland Security, and 17 intelligence-surveillance agencies, 70% of whose monies is then paid out to private defense contractors and mercenaries. Brown University professor and Co-director of the Costs of War Project at Brown University’s Watson Institute for International and Public Affairs, Catherine Lutz, found that “if you count all parts of the federal budget that are military-related, including the nuclear weapons budget, the budget for fuel for military vehicles and aircraft, funds for veteran care, etc, it makes up two-thirds of the federal budget, and it’s inching toward three-quarters.”

The remaining US federal budget must cover all other domestic programs, which include funding for education, health and human services, housing, urban development, administration of justice, natural resources and environment, the Department of Energy, science, space, and technology. And of course paying interest on the US current debt of $23 trillion.

In comparison to their recent $2 trillion package to fight the coronavirus, among other things, since 9/11, the US has spent the last twenty years at war against terrorism, spending upwards of an estimated $6.4 trillion, of which $1.9 trillion was spent in Iraq, and mostly to arms manufacturers. Their “War on Terror”, has also cost at least 801,000 lives who have died due to direct war violence, and several times as many indirectly, with over 335,000 civilians killed as a result of the fighting, with 21 million war refugees and displaced people and counting. If one were to add to these numbers indirect deaths, namely those caused by loss of access to food, water, and/or infrastructure, war-related disease, etc, then the total deaths to-date, in Afghanistan, Iraq, Syria, Pakistan, and Yemen is likely to reach 3.1 million or more, around 200 times the number of US dead.

The US, besides currently conducting counter-terror activities in over 80 countries, have also flaunted constitutional, international and moral law, and continue to perpetuate crimes against humanity, all the while enabled by a seemingly morally lost, misinformed, dumb-downed, and apathetic populace. In further revenge against the 9/11 attacks, they seem to have also destroyed their middle class, bailed out the banks, and have been able to replace basic rights, privacy and freedoms with government granted privileges. Now it’s the “WAR on COVID”. But we must remember that, historically, even though they are often late for the party and inept when crises first appear, once they go on a “war-footing” and crank up their capabilities, shit gets done. We’ll have to see if they’ve still got it in them. For this crisis is not due to a lack of of health spending, but from a lack of foresight, prevention and management. And it is often the case is such crises that, using South Korea and Singapore as examples today, they are overcome thanks to human ingenuity, science, technology, and business, rather than the interventionists idea to manipulate the economy and society, which will cost so much more, in lives, employment, growth, and in opportunities.

The key to nipping this virus epidemic in the butt is speed. WHO’s Bruce Aylward has said, “the faster you can find the cases, isolate the cases and track their close contacts the more successful you’re going to be.” Author, scientist, researcher, and educator, Gregg Braden, who does very well, linking science and spirituality, has said that we must stop filling our days with diversions and instead look within. To honour our body. To rationally realize that after this epidemic, it will be a new normal for our societies, economics and lifestyles, because our just past normal was no longer sustainable. And he stresses that the key is, “To know that we will get through this, but what comes afterwards will be determined by how we respond right now.” We must also remember that in times of crisis a person’s true character comes out and shows itself, or doesn’t.

Research of 20th century epidemics show that most cases of viral infections show up in the months of March, April, and May, then taper out over the summer. Today, according to when the first cases appeared, and acceleration rates, the virus possibly, will peak in about five weeks, then fading in June, July and August.

The US now has 101,321 cases with 5 deaths per million people or 0.2 per 100,000. In Canada, 4,689 cases and one death per million people or 0.7 per 100,000. Testing is accelerating, and apart from high incident/density populated areas such as New York, L.A., and others, 90% are testing negative.

Globally, of the 7.53 billion people on the planet, .00036 have died from COVID or about .02 people per 100,000.

Mar. 29Th : Here in BC, with a population of five million people, half of whom live in Vancouver and the Lower Mainland, there has been 884 COVID cases, with 81 hospitalized, of those, 52 are in intensive care. And there have been 17 deaths, most all, in care homes. On Vancouver Island (pop. 794,000) there are 60 cases, three currently hospitalized, and no deaths to-date.

These numbers are below the trends that Provincial officials have been using, where it is being presumed that 14% of patients (one in seven) would need to be hospitalized for about 12 days. Another five per cent (one in 20) would be in intensive care for at least 10 days, with 80% of them needing the assistance of a mechanical ventilator to breathe. BC also announced they are testing anti-malarial and anti-viral drugs at an “undisclosed facility.”

In the US more than 600,000 people have now been tested, with nearly 500,000 testing negative. More than 14,000 people have been hospitalized, with over 2,400 deaths (one in six). The majority of cases and nearly half of all deaths in the US, are currently happening in the dense and “practically living on top of each other” New York City. The US extended their federal social distancing guidelines for an additional 30 days, up to April 30.

Latest numbers out of South Korea show that 99% of all their cases were/are mild.

And while most of us here in BC are following the government guidelines; larger safe space when outside, washing hands, self-isolating themselves, etc, which is showing in the above numbers to be working, I worry about our mental health. Talking to some people I hear the fear in their voices. The stress of being isolated from others, fear they might have the disease, and the fear of leaving their homes. Some are even having serious medical concerns but too afraid to go to emergency, because then they surely will get it and die. Add in the fact that much of the population are already medicated, many are afraid of having to re-fill a prescription. Let alone, able to see one’s doctor at the clinic. I have a tooth that’s starting to hurt. Do I pull out the old string and prepare a doorknob?

Here in Victoria I took a drive today, since it was a mild sunny Sunday afternoon. Downtown, people were out and about, though scattered and keeping their distance from each other. It was a beautiful day. Traffic was minimally average for a Sunday, though many businesses are shut-down. I went into a supermarket to replenish coffee and banana stocks, and everyone was staying away from each other. Silently people were restricting the aisles to one or two at a time. Nobody was sneezing or coughing, and if they did, they would hopefully have covered up, and people would take a very wide berth passing around them. No one was excessively fondling the products and shelves were filled with toilet paper. I did pick up something fresh for a change, six croissants, which I use as hot-dog buns. A treat unto itself. When I got home, I used a sterilized wipe on the steering wheel, and when I got back down to the boat I washed my hands as if I was a surgeon.

With most downtown businesses closed, the heavily addicted and often mentally ill homeless have been setting up camp in their door and entry ways. Three blocks of Pandora and parts of Johnson street looked like a meth-head festival (which are currently banned, festivals that is), and are now dense tent cities. The drug trade has never had it so good. All their customers all in one place living practicality on top of each other. Have they washed their hands today. But then, where are they going to even do that? Or is the virus being relied on to dwindle their numbers, just like the virus is maybe being relied upon to dwindle those seniors in care homes who are on either government or privately insured assistance? Just asking, because the adage the elite treasure, “never let a crises go to waste” keeps surfacing.

The psychological impact of this coronavirus crisis is going to stay with us for a very long time. I wonder what the effects are going to be on the children of today, and who they will become. Because of our decisions and actions today.

Mar. 30th With many of us just hanging out at home now, try to the best of your ability to ignore the 24/7 mainstream news cycles, repeated over and over again. This only leads to doom and gloom, depression, anxiety and a loss of hope. Their agenda is completely different from ours. Focusing on the big numbers like coronavirus cases, instead of the fact that only 10% of those with the virus have to go to a hospital. Instead take that time to look at the device which can repel such a virus. Your body. Coronavirus, in all it’s forms, kills people whose immune systems are compromised or they don’t have one, and/or from pre-existing health problems. If you are going to wait for the government or the pharmaceutical industry to save you. Good luck with that. Focus on what you put into your body instead.

Besides all the other very promising options the medical world are quickly looking at today, with an actual vaccine perhaps a year away, one can include Vitamin C. The pharmaceutical industry would rather I hadn’t just typed that, because there is no patent on Vitamin C. One of the biggest things this vitamin does is attack inflammation, and COVID is all about inflammation. This is what actual kills people who have the virus, for it overpowers our immune system through inflammation. Studies over decades, have shown that if enough oral Vitamin C is taken at an early enough stage of an illness the inflammation can be stopped, and unable to ever get to the exponential growth phase. As of right now, there are doctors in China, the US and elsewhere, who are using intravenous Vitamin C on virus patients with great success. The medical journal Lancet reports that 100% of the early COVID deaths in Wuhan, China, had sepsis (a condition that can be compared to pneumonia). Vitamin C would have helped with stopping the growth of inflammation, thus less deaths. A doctor in the US used intravenous Vitamin C treating his patients, and reduced the death rate from sepsis, from 40% down to 8.5%. It has been said that in treating inflammation, “Vitamin C is like water on a fire.”

Italy, where they not only shake hands but kiss each other on each cheek, and as already mentioned have the second highest population of seniors in the world, has perhaps hit it’s peak, and rates will hopefully begin to drop. Oddly, the US and the European Union have turned their backs on them during the crises. So Russia, China, and Cuba stepped up to the plate instead, to assist the shocked nation.

Many people get sick with a virus a few times a year, and like clock work each new seasonal flu season brings a new strain. Globally, about one billion people catch the seasonal flu, five million of which are severe. Between 291,000 to 646,000 people who are elderly and with compromised immune systems die each year (0.1% of global population). They spread through respiratory droplets, with each diagnosed person passing it on to 1.3 persons. There are many vaccines available that provide immunity against multiple strains of influenza. With the economy never having to shut down because of it.

The 2009 swine flu pandemic was an influenza pandemic that lasted from January 2009 to August 2010, and the second of the two pandemics involving the H1N1 influenza virus (the first being the 1918–1920 Spanish flu pandemic), but simply a new strain. The first case was in Mexico, and the media soon had people panicking because it was a new strain which was spreading fast with no known vaccine. About 24% (700 million to 1.4 billion) of the global population got it, 60.8 million in the US, while in Canada it affected about 10% of the population (or 3.5 million). There were 284,000 global deaths (0.2% of the population), 12,469 in the US and 428 deaths in Canada. Children had the highest rates. Forty-seven per cent of children between 5 and 19 developed symptoms compared to 11% of people ages 65 and up. Treatment included the antivirals (oseltamivir and zanamivir), with most people recovering without complications. The BC government reported 1,060 severe flu cases as of Feb 2, 2010, with 49 of 56 fatalities, people with underlying medical conditions. There was no self isolation, stay at home orders given, with only a minority of schools actually shutting down because of it. At no time did the economy have to shut down. Since, about 40% of Canadians have been immunized against H1N1. Meanwhile, smoking kills one hundred people a day in Canada, but I digress.

Interesting tidbit of information, as to our health. According to a major analysis from the Global Burden of Disease Study (GBD), done seven years ago, in 2013, and published in The Lancet. At the time, just one in 20 people worldwide (4.3%) had no health problems whatsoever, while a third of the world’s population at the time of seven billion people, (2.3 billion individuals) were experiencing more than five ailments. Since, has our society become healthier. I figure it all depends where you live and who you are.

Mar.31st In Canada, people are facing fines for endangering others by failing to close small businesses, limit gatherings, and people who have the disease who have been ordered to stay isolated at home, but go out anyways, are being arrested. To clear all this up I’m sure everyone will soon be tested whether you want to or not, and documentation will be given to show if they have tested either positive or negative. The negatives will be allowed out to carry out essential services, such as acquiring food and supplies, while the positives will not be allowed to leave their homes, with about one in ten needing to be hospitalized. As for the acquiring part, the government will no doubt soon declare all coin and currency as unsafe due to the virus and force the digitization of the entire country.

Here on Vancouver Island, there are 67 confirmed cases, with four people hospitalized. At the ready, the Island has 96 intensive care unit beds, and 140 ventilators, including 22 transport ventilators used in ambulances, helicopters and airplanes.

Hours after laying off more than 20,000 educational workers, the Alberta government gives $1.1 billion to Canada’s largest oil company, TC Energy, so that they can start construction on the Keystone XL pipeline, which will run from the tar sands near Hardisty, Alberta, 1,897 km south to the US state of Nebraska. Though once they hit the border they will have to stop, because the pipeline is tied up with multiple lawsuits in the US, and they do not have the permits and regulatory approvals necessary to move forward.

Today, a week was a long time ago, so there is no doubt the numbers in an Angus Reid poll put out on Mar.22nd, have only increased. In the previous six weeks, people worried about getting the virus’s disease went from 30% to 65%. Seventy-five per cent worried about family members and friends getting sick, and 66% worried about their own economic circumstances.

Also today, I drove over to Esquimalt to pay my storage locker fees, for anyone living on a boat usually has a storage locker somewhere. Anyways, the storage fellow was telling me he misses the drives he used to take to unwind. Motoring along Dallas road and Beach drive on a sunny Saturday, or out to Saanichton and the fields and open spaces. He doesn’t do these things anymore because he says he is afraid of getting into an accident, and having to be hospitalized, where he would then undoubtedly, die of the virus.

Back on Mar.16th, with the epidemic only worsening, and shutdowns being implemented elsewhere, Illinois billionaire and Democrat Governor J.B. Pritzker was under pressure to do the same, and reschedule the Democratic primary to be held Mar.17th. This was about the halfway point in the Democrat presidential primaries, with 23 states still left to vote. But all of them began to postpone voting to a date to be announced. Except for Arizona, Florida, and Illinois. And on that day millions of voters and thousands of election workers went to voting sites. Two days later, with all results confirmed, Pritzker in Illinois, orders everyone to stay at home. Illinois and Florida are now two of the hotter spots in the US.

New York state had 1,412 coronavirus patients hospitalized on Monday (Mar.30th) marking the biggest single-day increase since the start of the outbreak in the state. Bringing the total number of hospitalizations to nearly 11,000, including 2,710 people in intensive care. California now has 6,932 confirmed virus cases statewide, with 150 deaths and 1,617 people hospitalized. California and New York populations combined, 60 million people (or two Canada’s). While so far this year, there have been 23,000 US deaths due to flu, and 3,000 from coronavirus.

The progressive socialist Spanish government, is facing legal action for alleged negligence in its handling of the coronavirus pandemic and unnecessarily worsening the humanitarian crisis now gripping Spain, currently the second-worst afflicted country in Europe after Italy. A class action lawsuit filed on Mar. 19, accuses the Spanish government of knowingly endangering public safety by encouraging the public to participate in more than 75 feminist marches, held across Spain on Mar. 8th, to mark International Women’s Day. This was also allowed to happen in many countries around the world, including the US and Canada. Hundreds of thousands or perhaps millions of people participated in those marches, as well as many high-profile attendees. It is unknown how many people were infected by the coronavirus as a result of the rallies.

Earlier, on Mar. 3rd, Spain announced that the first coronavirus fatality in Spain died on Feb. 13th, with health authorities not knowing he had the virus until 19 days after his death. Since coronavirus cases that end in death last between two and eight weeks, in addition to a 14-day incubation period, it is possible that the man was infected as early as the beginning of January. The same day, Spain and many other countries ordered major football, hockey, and basketball matches to be held behind closed doors with no spectators allowed, then soon cancelling all events altogether.

On March 7, the Spanish government’s, Fernando Simón, said in a nationwide press conference that there was no risk of attending the rallies on March 8. Insidiously perhaps, despite rising cases and those needing hospitalization, the government failed to report new coronavirus cases between March 6 and March 9, apparently in an effort to downplay the danger to the public of attending the rallies. The day after the rallies, the number of confirmed coronavirus cases in Madrid doubled in one day, and the President of the Autonomous Community of Madrid, Isabel Díaz Ayuso, ordered all schools in the capital to be closed for at least two weeks. The decision by the regional government caught the central government by surprise and effectively forced it to act. Later that same day, Health Minister Salvador Illa recommended that all people with chronic diseases or multiple pathologies do not leave their homes except for emergencies.

Typical for this virus crises it seems, inept planning, lack of preparedness, and embarrassing leadership.

Apr. 1st. April Fool’s day, no kidding.

Instead of the decisions and lack there of, of governments around the world who did not prevent the global spread of the virus, and actually allowed it to be spread, Canadian PM Trudeau says the longer it takes for all Canadians to follow the rules and stay home the longer it will be before life can return to normal. When that time arrives he can’t say. It’s up to us now, if we win he gets the accolades, we lose and it’s because it was our fault. One scenario presented to cabinet is that the strict public health measures and quarantines will have to continue until at least July, but in his daily briefing to Canadians Trudeau said the length of the lock-downs will depend on “the choices and behaviour of Canadians.” And called on Canadians to “do their duty” as if we were being called to serve our country. “This is a service most of have never been called upon to do,” and that “The government alone cannot win this fight.” Though they allowed the foe to enter the ring in the first place, while knowing they were totally unprepared, but hoping being politically correct would somehow keep the monster at bay. He stated all this while still “self-isolated” at home after testing negative of the virus, and where he has been for three weeks now, while his wife, who tested positive, and their kids, are “self-isolated” in one of his other homes. But once a day he reads over the script given to him, steps out of his safe space lair and gives a speech, then answers questions from hand-picked reporters whose questions he already knew would be asked. Very unlike other world leaders who go out each day and face the music, with their coronavirus teams behind them, and stand before mainstream media without a script and answer questions from reporters from around the world, even from ones that are heavily biased and hate him or her, no matter what comes out of their mouths. But then the mainstream media today is sounding very much like they did during the wind up to the Iraqi invasion. When Saddam Hussein was the badman and building weapons of mass destruction.

Having lied for the past two months about the severity and the extent of coronavirus pandemic which its virologists started in Wuhan, and eager to convey the message that the crisis is now “under control” just so people return to work, full of hope and enthusiasm, and rejoicing at how they conquered the virus. Reuters reported that Jia county (pop.600,000) in central China’s Henan province, announced it had “virtually banned all outbound movement of people, following several cases of coronavirus infection in the area.” And that no one can travel out of Jia county without proper authorization. Additionally, residents are not allowed to leave their homes for work unless they have clearance to do so. And so, the virus is back to China, despite the best intentions of the World Health Organization and its Beijing sponsors to make it seem that China had managed to defeat the virus.

Possibly because the US president on Mar. 19th announced that several studies, and through anecdotal evidence, that the drug chloroquine appears to significantly limit the replication of COVID-19, particularly when combined with the antibiotic azithromycin (zithromax Z-pak). Last week, Democratic Michigan Governor Gretchen Whitmer sent a letter warning physicians and pharmacists of punishments and “administrative actions” such as revoking the medical licenses of doctors who prescribed hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine, claiming that hydroxychloroquine had not met the benchmark for “proof of efficacy.” Four days later, Whitmer is now begging the federal government to send her hydroxychloroquine, because “We want to ensure that doctors have the ability to prescribe these medicines”, and that “We also want to make sure that the people who have prescriptions that predated COVID-19 have access to the medication they need. And so all of the work that we’ve done is trying to strike that balance.”

In many US cities, most businesses are not only closed, but their storefronts are now being boarded up. What are they expecting? But you already know what they are expecting. Unfortunately, much of the population actually believe that once the crisis is over everything will go back to normal. But was it really normal before? Personally I don’t think so, but there is still a sliver of hope in me that we could do much better if we get the chance, but another part of me thinks its a red pill/blue pill moment. Many of us took the red pill years ago, and found out about, and can see before us, the many once hidden, unpleasant truths. And realized that living the “truth of reality” is harsher, open to ridicule, and more difficult. But sadly, it seems the majority of the herd has been swallowing the blue pill, to remain in blissful ignorance. Living in confined comfort without want or fear within a manufactured reality.

Apr. 2nd. Here on Vancouver Island, the first two Covid deaths have been confirmed, with 72 cases and seven people hospitalized. In total, BC has 1,121 cases, 149 hospitalized with 68 in intensive care units, and 31 deaths. There are currently 4,171 empty beds at the ready, many of those due to cancellations of elective surgeries. Elsewhere, half the planet’s human population is now locked-down on some level.

My son came by yesterday and picked up my laundry because I was running out of clean clothes. So today I was out and about gathering a few necessities, like chocolate milk and a couple more boxes of Kraft dinner. Picked up my laundry, all meticulously folded and smelling fresh, and was able to chat and play with my granddaughter for a bit outside though I kept my distance, which she found odd, since she’s usually running into my arms and we are inseparable when together. During this self-isolation I think I miss her the most.

There was lighter than normal traffic, but being a sunny day people were out doing much the same. City workers were repairing curbs and working on various projects, landscapers were out in full force, and public transit is still running. What I especially noticed, even those just out walking, far less people had a phone in front of their face, and it seemed everyone was more aware of their surroundings and of each other. There was a lot of respecting others going around. It was wonderful to see.

If the virus hadn’t caused the current economic crash, something else would have. Any fall in revenue is indeed problematic, but manageable without excessive debt. Global debt as a percentage of GDP rose from 250% in 2007, to 325% in 2019. With current overall debt levels triple what they were in 1999. Today, for every $100 a typical Canadian earns, they owe $160.

On April 1st, the fracking shale for oil company, Whiting Petroleum, filed for bankruptcy and unable to pay it’s debts. Only five days after the company’s board approved $14.6 million in cash bonuses for it’s top executives.

In Sweden, Extinction Rebellion and Greta Tintin Eleonora Ernman Thunberg fans have been deliberately coughing, sneezing, and spitting beside the elderly “to save the planet.” While others on the left of the spectrum are deeming the epidemic Mother Nature’s response to human transgression, or as our fore-bearers once viewed such disasters, as the gods enraged by human’s disrespect. But then the pause Covid has given us, could also be interpreted as perhaps a warning that maybe we’ve gone too far, and must alter our behaviour so that we don’t risk further contamination of ourselves and the environment as well.

Even after colleges around the US cancelled classes or converted to all-digital learning, hundreds of thousands of “Covidiot” teenagers and early twenty-somethings, enjoying the extended spring break of their dreams on beaches everywhere. But as studies are now showing, such “selfishly ignorant” teenagers helped spread the virus around the country. But then these are young people who are almost pathologically incapable of staying at home and doing nothing, because that are being raised by parents who have made themselves impotent, by being their “buddies” instead of being parents. Some parents are still allowing kids to have group sleepovers and parties.

Maybe these kids will remember the coronavirus as their big struggle, their “World War II” as it were. Though, given the tendency to accept and embellish unpleasant experiences into “traumas”, we imagine that American teens will use this as one more excuse why the government owes them every handout imaginable, from paying off their student loans to covering health-care costs for life.”

And even though in the propaganda world, a “wet market” sounds more dramatic than a “lab”, evidence is mounting that the origin of the virus probably came out of a lab in Wuhan and not the wet market just a few kilometers down the street. With that being said, so far China has offered Covid-19-related equipment and medical help to no fewer than 89 nations – and counting. Including Africa (especially South Africa, Namibia and Kenya, but also to many other African nations; Latin America (Brazil, Argentina, Venezuela, Peru); the arc from East Asia to Southwest Asia; and Europe. Key recipients in Europe include Italy, France, Spain, Belgium, the Netherlands, Serbia and Poland. Most are donations. Some are trade – like millions of masks sold to France and the US.

Another ploy to strike fear into the masses, the mainstream media is screaming that the US now has double! the confirmed cases of Covid than Italy, the next highest country! What they forget to say, in their need for ratings and clicks, is, of course. Italy’s population of 60 million is only one fifth of the US’s 330 million.

Peace. Stay calm and rational. If the sun is out, stand outside or open the window and look at it with your eyes closed for a few moments, and just focus on its warmth upon your face, and nothing else.

Apr. 3rd. The reason I began this Covid timeline was because I had so many friends and family, many which I hadn’t talked to in awhile call me, and after some small talk ask, what’s really going on. For they knew I gleefully dabbled in going down rabbit holes in search of truth. And many no doubt thought I was what the CIA has termed a conspiracy theorist, though they never held it against me, for I sometimes made sense whether they wanted to believe it or not. I found many conspiracy theories simply fiction, but I also found many to be based on facts, reasoning and common sense, rather than what mainstream media and the education system wants us to believe instead. So trying to be not so long-winded.

Theory has it that the New World Order (NWO) concept is simply the wish of a handful of international bankers that want to economically and politically rule the whole planet as one happy family. Such an order used to be called simply an empire, and actually started back in 1773, at the height of the British global empire. But really picked up steam after the discovery of oil in the late 19th century. Since 1944, they began looting the planet by using the US dollar as the weapon of choice. They are now threatened by hyperinflation, as their printing machine has been rotating for years to cover their absurd spending to sustain oil and resource wars that they’ve all ultimately lost. In order to prevent this upcoming hyperinflation, they have perhaps generated a virus attack on four countries (China, Iran, Italy and now the US) to spread panic in the population, with the artful help of their shameless mainstream media. Even though this coronavirus isn’t different from any new viruses that attack humans every year, the media scare pushed people to voluntarily isolate themselves through fear and terror. When in fact the only ones who should be quarantined are the elderly and those people whose health is compromised, and not everybody else. The people who either caught the virus but showed no symptoms, with their bodies now immune to it, nor the ones who would have to take a week or two off work and stay at home, sick with a virus on steroids, and then afterwards, and now also immune to this particular virus, could go back to work. There are millions upon millions of perfectly healthy people locked in their homes. Many have lost their jobs, and which they may never get back again, companies are going bankrupt, with many of them, maybe never reopening, while the media induced panic created a stock exchange crash that emptied wallets and dried up assets. The virus isn’t destroying us, our economies, ways of life or mental health, the lock-down is.

Dr Didier Raoult, the top virologist on the planet recently confirmed that chloroquine, as already mentioned, a nearly inoffensive drug that has been used for 60 years to treat malaria, was used by the Chinese with spectacular results to cure patients. Raoult then improved his elixir by adding a pneumonic antibacterial called azythromicin, and saved everyone of his first 1,000 cases, but one. The US immediately imposed the same treatment through a fight against its own Federal Drug Administration, which is bought and paid for by the deep state of the central bankers. All the Western governments, their medical agencies, the World Health Organization, and mainstream media then tried to destroy Dr. Raoult’s reputation, by inventing, that the drugs had “dangerous side effects”. At the same time, in Germany, internationally praised Dr Wolfgand Wodarg noted that the engineered panic was totally useless, since this virus isn’t any different than the others that affect us every years. With the pathological lies of the official communication channels of every New World Order country being exposed with each passing day, they are ramping up the fear factor and willing to destroy the social fabric of many societies. Remember, people are nothing to them.

Suddenly, with the mainstream media being forced to talk about such remedies, many big Pharma CEO’s were fired because they had just lost the vaccine contract, at first countries like Canada refused to even consider the use of such cheap and inoffensive medication, while in Jan. 2020, a couple of weeks before the burst of the fake pandemic, the French proclaimed that chloroquine was harmful and had also restrained its use.

In 1991, after the fall of the Soviet Union, the international central bankers controlled about 95% of the planet. They felt invincible and that nothing could slow or even stop their ultimate mission to complete their Orwellian dream, of destroying the few countries left that did not abide by their rules or rely on their central banking empire, enlarge Israel, and get the total control over the world oil market. They’ve been working on this ever since the Balfour declaration in 1917, which eventually would create the State of Israel, their military bastion to control the Middle East.

Then a Russian by the name of Vladimir Putin, who had graduated in 1975 with a law degree and then worked as a KGB foreign intelligence officer for 16 years, rising to the rank of Lieutenant Colonel before resigning in 1991 to begin a political career, appeared on the scene. From 1999 until 2008 he served as the president of Russia. Then prime minister, and since 2012, once againthe president. After a few years spent at draining the Russian swamp from the oligarchs and mafia gangs that his stumbling predecessor left behind, he took to the task at hand. Portrayed by western mainstream media as the badman, an ex-spy who is driven by nostalgia rather than any ideology, while in reality he embodied the reincarnation of the long lost Russian ideology of total political and economical independence. Because his opponents in the West had been looting the planet for 250 years through colonization insured by a military dominance, Putin knew that for Russia to have any sort of independence he had to start by building an invincible military machine. And he did. Then to make sure that a nuclear war wouldn’t be an option, he came up with stuff which nightmares are made of, such as the Sarmat, the Poseidon and the Avangard weapons systems, all unstoppable and able to destroy any country in a matter of a few hours. Then in Sept. 2015 in Syria (who was not a member of any central bank, just like Libya wasn’t), he proved to every country that independence from the NWO banking system could now be a matter of choice.

Then seemingly right out of left field came the coronavirus and the ensuing media creation of a fake pandemic. The main focus of the NWO was to avoid a catastrophic hyperinflation of the humongous mass of US dollars that no one wants anymore, and to have the time to implement their virtual world crypto-currency. With everyone instead of “essential employees” under house arrest and paid a guaranteed monthly income. It seemed at first that the plan could work. But with the decisions made by Russia at the recent, and already mentioned, OPEC+ meeting in March, the Russians now control the all-mighty oil market, the unavoidable energy resource that lubricates economies and armies. The quaking bankers’ NATO can only watch, without any means to get it back. Or as Sylvain LaForest, via OrientalReview.org says, “The Empire of Banks has been terminally ill for five years, but it’s now on morphine, barely realizing what’s going on.”

Then on Mar. 28th Russia announced its own anti-corona drug cocktail based on Dr Raoult’s formula. Big pharma is now at its wits end. Do most Western countries now implement the good doctor’s treatment, or face the slap of a Russian pill coming to save its citizens. With Russia and China now deeply immersed in sending doctors and medicine to Italy, especially the hard hit Lombardy region, the NWO is now worried that they might find the truth, where the high death rate there is not necessarily because of Covid, but probably from a deadly cocktail hybrid from two earlier vaccines for meningitis and influenza, that they were injected in separate vaccination campaigns, very recently.

The next day, Mar.29th the NWO and their minions in the media were shocked to their core when the US government took control over the private central bank, the Federal Reserve, which is now handled by two representatives of the US Treasury of State. And for all intents and purposes has taken private banks out of US public affairs, ending a century of exploitation of the American citizens. The infamous Blackrock investment group has been chosen to start buying important corporations for the Fed, meaning that many chunks of the economy are now being nationalized, while avoiding the crash of the market by implicating important private investors in the deal. The Blackrock group is widely known as the biggest money manager on the planet. They own 5% of Apple, 5% of Exxon Mobil, 6% of Google, second largest shareholder of AT&T (Turner, HBO, CNN, Warner Brothers), but just a few examples.

A realization that must not be ignored, especially at this crucial point in time, that unbeknownst to many and which flies in the face of mainstream media, perhaps Russia and the Trump administration are actually united in their goals. Who knows? Regardless, the NWO are blatantly desperate because their pandemic option like all the others is not working. What is truly scary is that to prevent them from using all that’s left, the nuclear option to get it done, they are facing Putin and Trump, who are both not as stupid as the media portrays, though their particular personalities may offend some, nor are they the boogeymen.

Many believe that if the BIS (Bank for International Settlements), the World Bank, the International Monetary Fund, the European Central bank, the EU, and NATO, disappeared, our world would still not be anywhere near perfect, but it might get much better sooner rather than later or never.

There are many who doubt the NWO induced Western strategy of locking down the planet. The Mar. 26th report, Covid-19 – Navigating the Uncharted, co-authored by Dr. Anthony Fauci – the White House face of the fight, H. Clifford Lane, and CDC director Dr. Robert R. Redfield, basically the heart of the US healthcare establishment, explicitly states, “the overall clinical consequences of Covid-19 may ultimately be more akin to those of a severe seasonal influenza (which has a case fatality rate of approximately 0.1%) or a pandemic influenza (similar to those in 1957 and 1968) rather than a disease similar to SARS or MERS, which have had case fatality rates of 9 to 10% and 36%, respectively.”

John Lee, recently retired professor of pathology and former NHS consultant pathologist, has recently argued that, “the world’s 18,944 coronavirus deaths represent 0.14 per cent of the total. These figures might shoot up but they are, right now, lower than other infectious diseases that we live with (such as flu).” He recommends, “a degree of social distancing should be maintained for a while, especially for the elderly and the immune-suppressed. But when drastic measures are introduced, they should be based on clear evidence. In the case of Covid-19, the evidence is not clear.” Even New York governor Andrew Cuomo admitted on the record about the error of quarantining elderly people with illnesses alongside the fit young population.

The strangest thing about Covid is how was it that most all Western countries were caught completely unprepared for the spread of it, even after being provided a head start of two months by China, and having the time to study different successful strategies applied across Asia. One reason is because in Jan. 2020 the mainstream media had the world enraged over the attempted impeachment of a man who some people simply don’t like. Another reason is that the NWO know he is a threat and have been at war with who he represents for going on four years now. And finally previous administrations have raided the cupboards dry. Remember the hurricanes and FEMA’s feeble responses? Haiti anyone?

In early March, the Chinese Journal of Infectious Diseases, pre-published the Expert Consensus on Comprehensive Treatment of Coronavirus. Treatment recommendations included, “large doses of vitamin C…injected intravenously at a dose of 100 to 200 mg / per kg per day. The duration of continuous use is to significantly improve the oxygenation index.” That’s the reason why 50 tons of Vitamin C was shipped to Hubei province in early February. It’s a stark example of a simple “mitigation” solution capable of minimizing economic catastrophe.

Is this crises a controlled demolition of the global economy? Is martial law, severe social media policing, and the return of strict border controls, not the markings of a massive social re-engineering project, complete with inbuilt full monitoring, population control and social distancing promoted as the new normal?

The US are weathering a perfect storm, a totally shattered economy; a financial crash, barely masked by the trillions in helicopter money from the Federal Reserve and the European Central Bank, tens of millions of unemployed, millions of small businesses that will simply disappear, and a widespread, global mental health crisis. Not to mention the masses of elderly, especially in the US, that will be issued an unspoken we will not save you notice on the triage list.

At the ID2020 Alliance summit in Sept. 2019, in New York, (a month before the previously mentioned Event 201, also held in New York City) it was decided by the European Commission, that the “Rising to the Good ID Challenge” program would be launched in 2020. The European Commission, is deeply involved in a crucial but virtually unknown project called CREMA (Cloud Based Rapid Elastic Manufacturing), which aims to facilitate the widest possible implementation of AI (artificial intelligence) in conjunction to the advent of a cashless one-world system. Which itself implies a central unelected body which is capable of dispensing and controlling Universal Basic Income to those in lock-down. Where anyone is liable to be erased from the system if an algorithm equals this individual with dissent. ID2020 is self-described as a benign alliance of “public-private partners”. Essentially, it is an electronic ID platform based on generalized vaccination. And its starts at birth; newborns will be provided with a “portable and persistent bio-metrically-linked digital identity.” While one of the partners, Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization, pledges to “protect people’s health” and provide “immunization for all”. Top partners and sponsors, apart from the WHO, include, predictably, Big Pharma. It is basically absolute social control that is being promoted as an innocent vaccine. Such a digital identity, within the vaccine, will be first tested with the people of Bangladesh, this year, if they haven’t postponed it or anything. Journalist Pepe Escobar poses a serious question: was ID2020 timed to coincide with what a crucial sponsor, the WHO, qualified as a pandemic? Or was a pandemic absolutely crucial to justify the launch of ID2020? Escobar argues that “the powers that be, taking their cue from the tried and tested, decades-old CIA playbook, of course are breathlessly calling it a “conspiracy theory”. Yet what vast swathes of global public opinion observe is a – dangerous – virus being used as cover for the advent of a new, digital financial system, complete with a forced vaccine cum nanochip creating a full, individual, digital identity.”

Consider that about 99% of people who contract the disease live through it, whether feeling any symptoms or not, and are now naturally immunized to the disease, so why would they need a vaccine for something they are now immune to? So we must be wary when some big pharma outfit miraculously brings out a vaccine to eliminate the threat of coronavirus, and we are forced to receive it under threat of arrest. And then find out later that key government officials had invested heavily in the company that developed the cure. Is someone going to be targeted as a bio terrorist germ spreader if they want to contract the seasonal cold/flu and let their bodies beat it on its own? Of course, though many vaccines have to be given today because our immune systems are degrading, they do have all kinds of toxins in them, including nanochips in the ID2020 vaccine, and since some will get rushed to market in the current hysteria, there’s a huge likelihood of making many people sick and more babies being born autistic, making the vaccine much more harmful than beneficial. Is anyone going to be held responsible for that if it were to happen?

To be continued…

For anyone wanting to dive deeper, as to perhaps the reasons why, and if this is an agenda being played out or not, and then make your own decision, please visit : Agenda’s 21 and 30.


Military Spending

Military-Intelligence-Industrial Complex

A Short Story By Numbers

Military spending, military expenditure as a share of government spending, and countries most capable of defending themselves.

Military Budgets

1 US $649 billion ($738 billion in 2020) 3.2% GDP
2 China $250 1.9%
3 Saudi Arabia $67.6 8.8%
4 India $66.5 2.4%
5 France $63.8 2.3%
6 Russia $61.4 3.9%
7 UK $50 1.8%
8 Germany $49.5 1.2%
9 Japan $46.6 0.9%
10 South Korea $43.1 2.6%
11 Italy $27.8 1.3%
12 Brazil $27.8 1.5%
13 Australia $26.7 1.9%
14 Canada $21.6 1.3%
15 Turkey $19 2.5%

Tied for 15th with Turkey is Iran and Iraq, which each spend about the same ($19 billion). The US spends more on national defense than every country on this chart combined. NATO spends over $1 trillion. The majority of all this money goes to US arms manufacturers and intelligence agencies.

-List by the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute
2019 Fact Sheet (for 2018)
SIPRI Military Expenditure Database (US Dollars)

Meanwhile, military expenditure as a share (%) of government spending (2018) are the highest for countries fighting and/or supporting terrorism and/or tribal ethnic or religious groups infighting, based on revenge, and/or because of their neighbours, and/or oppressing their own people.

1 Belarus 31.9 %
2 Saudi Arabia 24.6
3 Armenia 20.9
4 Oman 19.0
5 Pakistan 18.5
6 Singapore 17.1
7 Iran 15.8
8 Lebanon 15.6
9 Myanmar 15.2
10 Jordan 15.0
11 Chad 14.6
12 Mali 14.3
13 Algeria 13.8
14 South Korea 12.4
15 Columbia 11.6

Which brings us to the question, after all that spending, which countries are the most capable of actually defending themselves. Indeed, is their military spending not called a defense budget. Thus, and but of course, there is the Global Militarization Index (GMI), which figures out “the relative weight and importance of the military apparatus of one state in relation to its society as a whole.” For this, the GMI uses a number of indicators to represent the degree of militarization of a country:

  • Military Expenditure Index Score: comparison of military expenditure with its gross domestic product (GDP) and its health expenditure (as share of its GDP);
  • People Index Score: contrast between the total number of (para)military forces with the number of physicians, and the overall population;
  • Heavy Weapons Index Score: ratio of the number of heavy weapons available and the overall population.
  • As for nuclear weapons, having them doesn’t necessarily mean you’ll be able to defend yourself.

Of 155 countries listed, those who are the most capable of defending themselves. According to it’s GMIndex.

1 Israel 911
2 Singapore 886
3 Armenia 860
4 Cyprus 850
5 South Korea 839
6 Russia 839
7 Greece 833
8 Jordan 833
9 Brunei 821
10 Belarus 819
11 Kuwait 818
12 Azerbaijan 816
further down..

27 Iran 700
29 US 683
64 UK 594
87 China 550
94 Canada 535

2019 edition of “The Military Balance” from the International Institute for Strategic Studies (IISS) (15 February 2019). The Military Balance 2019


Chapter Two – Half-Way There

Chapter Two (11 Pages)

As for the fable, that we are born a blank slate, increasing scientific research today is showing that our “slates” are only partially blank at birth. For through our genes, we are already somewhat biologically programmed. Henceforth, we are constantly at war with our unconscious and conscious selves, while we become products of our environments. Over the past 70 years at least, such programming of our unconscious level has been hacked by the media, politics, and advertising. Especially since we are storytelling animals, and whoever controls the stories being told, controls us. Whether today or tens of thousands of years ago, when we sat enthralled around the evening campfire.

Just because someone tells us something, or we see something online or on TV, until otherwise proven by facts, actions, and/or behaviour, we should take it with a grain of salt. Much like when we were young children walking around asking, why, how come, why not, and what do you mean? To do otherwise would seem something was wrong with us. But then we also continue to give people the benefit of the doubt, which is also pretty crazy. Considering this is where the predators, exploiters, and abusers hide behind. Hence, over 95 per cent of child and spousal mental, physical and sexual abuse is done by a known family member.

The one continuous mental narrative that dominates our consciousness about who we are and about the world we live in, is nothing but an endless stream of stories. These stories can be manipulated and distorted in many ways either by people we know or on a mass scale by people pulling levers behind the curtain. It’s not shameful to be deceived, because our cognitive wiring is prone to believing stories. The people that do the manipulating are the shameful ones. But we must not let shame or cognitive dissonance take away healthy skepticism of the stories told to us. And one must pay attention with as much objectivity as possible to the behaviour that goes with the story. This allows us to be aware of the false story-tellers and side-show barkers, because of the huge gap between what their words say and what their actions mean.

It has been said that by the time we are about five years old, we reach what some call a golden age of development, with the premise that what we become later has already been molded and ready to be shaped into form. While memory supposedly begins when we are about three years old. And though I don’t, some people remember snippets of this time in their lives, and remember very well, and I’m sure it is true to a certain point and all a matter of recall. But the events that shape our lives after we are five often create the biggest changes, only because, before we are five years old we have no choice. While after five years we begin to learn that life becomes about making decisions, where we have a choice. Unfortunately however, we may be apt to later forget we have such choices or are programmed to think that we do. We follow our unconscious choice, which has been altered by outside sources as already discussed, and we think it’s free will. Carl Jung (1875-1961) Swiss psychiatrist and psychoanalyst, who founded analytical psychology, put it best, “Until you make the unconscious conscious it will direct your life and you will call it fate”.

Among the different developmental psychologists who have, and do study developmental change from conception to death, Sigmund Freud (1856-1939) believed that personality is formed mainly in the first six years, through unconscious processes under the influence of one’s parents, and that such personality formation is irreversible. According to Freud, the unconscious continues to influence our behaviour and experiences, even though we are unaware of these underlying influences. The unconscious can include repressed feelings, hidden memories, habits, thoughts, desires, and reactions.

Industrialist Walt Disney (1901-1966), once admitted, “I think of a child’s mind as a blank book. During the first few years of his life, much will be written on the pages. The quality of that writing will affect his life profoundly.” And he would know. Through his talent he was a master of virtue signalling, the “conspicuous expression of moral values by an individual done primarily with the intent of enhancing that person’s standing within a social group”. The term was first used in signalling theory, to describe any behaviour that could be used to signal virtue. Disney would also become very adept at subliminal messaging and the use of sexual imagery. To that end he and his brother started up Disney Brothers Studio in the early 1920’s, created Mickey Mouse in 1928, and released the movie Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs in the middle of the Great Depression. In the lead up to the US entering WW II they released Pinocchio (1940), Fantasia (1940), Dumbo (1941), and Bambi (1942) then switched and became a government contractor, pumping out an onslaught of propaganda supporting the war machine, including military training films, and short Donald Duck cartoons to promote war bonds. And though Mickey Mouse and Snow White were to calm children, the same images were painted on many bombs, tanks and aircraft.

As well as keeping an eye on Hollywood for Herbert Hoover’s Federal Bureau of Investigations (FBI), the seventy cigarettes a day smoking Disney continued to build a magical happy kingdom, which from birth has shaped our interests, values, relationships, and even our hopes and dreams. Molding children’s reality, and making us lifelong followers, with some of us believing that we can stay children forever. Disney’s animated films alone have shaped many generation’s morals and attitudes toward life, much of it absorbed by our subconscious. Especially when such stories are viewed many times far more than just once. And why, I must ask, is it that many, if not most, of the main characters in such animated stories are motherless.

A definite populariser of culture, some found Disney’s work to also be a “smooth facade of sentimentality and stubborn optimism, its feel-good re-write of American history”. Others have said that his vision was “of a modern corporate utopia as an extension of traditional values”. There is no doubt he was also an ingenious merchandiser, and more importantly, the central figure in the history of animation. He was so successful that even after his death; his company is still an unchecked global cultural force, because of their distracting, some say manipulative, and entertaining, “wholesome image”.

Besides their flagship of family-oriented brands, since the 1980’s, Disney has acquired other entertainment companies in order to market more mature content than they typically produced. Today, Walt Disney Studios, which includes Walt Disney Pictures, Walt Disney Animation Studios, Pixar, Marvel Studios, Lucasfilm, 20th Century Fox, Fox 2000 Pictures, Fox Searchlight Pictures, and Blue Sky Studios, also now owns the ABC broadcast network, the cable TV Disney Channel, ESPN, Freeform, FX, National Geographic TV, and A&E Networks. Other Disney divisions include publishing, merchandising, music, and theatre. They also have their own cruise ship line, and 14 theme parks spread around the world. Recently they debuted their own online streaming source. Many titles of their earlier, animated or otherwise, films now available, are labelled with an “outdated” (trigger) warning, due to content at the time the film was made. Such “watch with caution films”, now branded include Mickey Mouse shorts from the 1920s through the 1940s, Fantasia (1940), Swiss Family Robinson (1940, 1960), Dumbo (1941), Song of the South (1946), Peter Pan (1953), Lady and the Tramp (1955) and The Sign of Zorro (1958), The Jungle Book (1967), and The Aristocats (1970).

A student of Freud’s, Erik Erickson (1902-1994), considered personality formation to be more malleable and continues throughout life, to be influenced by friends, family and society, and gave more emphasis to social and cultural forces of development. Much like Robert Havighurst (1900-1991), who prepared a developmental model in which he presented a list of developmental tasks from birth to old age, finding every cultural group expects its members to master certain essential skills and acquire certain approved patterns of behaviour at various ages during their life span. According to him, a developmental task is “a task which arises at or about a certain period in the life of the individual, successful achievement of which leads to happiness and to success with later tasks, while failure leads to unhappiness and difficulty with later tasks”. Although most people would like to master these tasks at the appropriate time, some are unable to do so, while others are ahead of schedule.

While educator and author Stephen Covey (1932-2012) called the natural laws of growth, the maturity continuum. He argues it starts with dependence; you make me happy, you take care of me, and I blame you for any bad results. Then independence; I can do it, i am responsible, i can choose, and I am not selfish. Where one’s sense of self worth should not be determined by how one is treated or liked. And finally interdependence, when we can combine our talents and abilities and create positive, something greater than me. This the most advanced and most mature concept, when we become, “Self reliant and capable but at the same time knowing working together with others can accomplish more than one can accomplish alone. Having a great sense of self worth within oneself, but at the same time knowing the need for love, and the giving and receiving of such a thing. Intellectually knowing the rewards of sharing thinking knowledge with others. And knowing the best is when we share ourselves deeply, meaningful with others brings access to the vast resources and potential of others”.

Jean Piaget’s (1896-1980) theory of cognitive development explained how a child constructs a mental model of the world. He disagreed with the idea that intelligence was a fixed trait, and regarded cognitive development as a process which occurred due to biological maturation and interaction with the environment. Piaget believed that people of all ages developed intellectually. Piaget’s stages of development are from birth to 18-24 months old, which he called the sensorimoter stage, and all about object permanence. The preoperational stage of symbolic thought, from 2 to 7 years old, concrete operational thought from 7 to 11 years old, and the formal operational stage of abstract concepts from adolescence to adulthood. He believed that once a person reaches the formal operational stage, it’s more about building upon knowledge, not changing how it’s acquired or understood. Going with the definition of development as being “a progressive series of changes that occur in an orderly predictable pattern as a result of maturation and experience”, then the development of a human being must be a continuous process from conception to death. And although most developmental theories have been specifically concerned with children, their ultimate aim is to provide an account of development throughout the life span.

Trying to understand age-related behavioural changes, specifically in children, and although kids may develop at varying rates and in their unique way, there are standards of childhood development. In order to fully understand a child or anyone for that matter, you need to take into account their temperament, situational factors, age-related developmental stages, and whether they are in a period of balance or instability in their lives. In view of these factors, the social and emotional experiences during the first few years of life will influence health and well-being, and psychological and physical development throughout their lives.

Harvard University’s Center on the Developing Child, estimates that a million connections are made in the brain in the first three years of life, and that the relationship between infant and caregiver is crucial. Whether the security of balanced relationships and attachments, or the trauma of a variety of types of emotional abuse, caregiver mental illness, household violence, or poverty. Unfortunately, the vast majority of children who suffer such trauma in their earlier years do not get beyond these problems later in life. Thus, we have the present and now generational, societal problems of high incarceration rates, homelessness, drug abuse, and failure to graduate high school, owing to too many children being born to parents unprepared to provide the necessities of life, including love and attention.

Other psychologists, anthropologists and scientists from across the spectrum, from Carl Jung to Joseph Campbell to Stephen Pinker, have all shown extensive evidence of inborn psychological traits and inherent constructs within the human psyche. For example, a baby will often cry and be afraid when an animal shows its teeth, perhaps because such a reaction is inherited over the eons from a time when humans were prey. Much like a person’s IQ (intelligence quotient), which shows one’s intelligence, is most often inherited, or that while sociopaths are made through training, psychopaths, who lack empathy and any fight or flight reflex, are born that way.

Others including Dr. Bruce Lipton, believe that about 95 per cent of life is coming from the programming of our existence and experimental knowledge gained in our first seven years. And that such programming consists of downloading “normal” through the greatest forms of mind control ever created, repetition, repetition, repetition. And that under seven years of age we operate in the low-vibration frequency of consciousness, the “Theta” or imagination.

Dr. Lipton, an American developmental biologist, is best known for promoting the idea that gene expression can be influenced by environmental factors, i.e. people have a greater impact on their health than genetic research has previously determined. He argues that the Jesuits have known this for over four hundred years, as in their credo “give me your child until they are seven and I will give you a man”. Lipton also surmises that today, about five per cent of our daily lives are lived by using our conscious, which is creative, and as already noted, the other 95 per cent of our day coming from programs previously installed in our subconscious.

English theorist and often called a “human singularity of insanity” David Icke, gets it right sometimes, and believes that perception is everything, and is passed down to us from our parents. He goes on to say “Out of womb and in only five years are sat down at a desk with an authority figure standing before us, representing the state’s version of all you are taught and how to behave. Telling you when you have to be there, when you can leave, when to speak, go to the toilet, when and what to eat, what is and what isn’t. What’s possible what’s not possible and the nature of everything”. There is also religion to teach us what to believe and how to act, and of course Disney to teach us how we are supposed to feel.

While growing up is determined by variable factors and connotations, one of the most important is family. Throughout our evolutionary history the mother and father have assumed different parental roles. Mothers have always interacted with their children more than fathers. They maintain more physical contact and are more nurturing, comforting, and empathetic to the physical and emotional pains and needs of the child. This extremely intimate and close relationship with the mother-figure creates in the child a lasting emotional bond psychologist’s call, a “mother complex”. Fathers do not create this same bond of dependency with the child. Instead, their role has traditionally been to provide the developing child with resources and protection, but just as importantly with guidance. More specifically, the role of the father has been to help the child break free from their bond of dependency upon their parents and help them emerge into the world as an independent and functional adult. But unfortunately, not all fathers can supply their children with this guidance, for to do so, the father must be strong and independent himself and emotionally present in the child’s life. He must be able to show that there is something worth seeking and struggling for in this world; for to successfully encourage his daughter or son to break from the comforts of childhood, they need to be convinced there is somewhere worth going.

Family is also the bedrock of civil life. For tens of thousands of years, it has been the smallest form of government. It is where children are taught how to become adults, and knowing both a mother’s love and a father’s, are taught about responsibility, respect, honesty, empathy for others, having a work ethic, love and forgiveness, and pride of one’s country or tribe.

Unfortunately, this critical balance of human nature is currently being disrupted. We are living in an age which is hung up on the breakdown of traditional family values, and of the absent father. Yet we are all still expected to leave the comforts of home and venture out, to overcome any mother complex, welcome the opportunity to stand up for ourselves, to fail and fix our own mistakes, make decisions for ourselves, and to make a life worth living, all without the psychological support of a father. Both boys and girls are affected by not having a father, with the girls most often getting out into the world earlier than boys, and just as often then seeking a father-figure, provider and protector in a mate.

In 1959 Marie-Louis von Franz, a Swiss psychologist, gave a series of lectures on the psychology of the Puer Aeternus, Latin for “eternal child”. Her teacher, psychologist Carl Jung, had come up with the term for psychological purposes to describe an individual who suffers “Peter Pan” syndrome; he who fails to grow up. Someone who “…remains too long in adolescent psychology; that is, all those characteristics that are normal in a youth of seventeen or eighteen are continued into later life, coupled in most cases with too great a dependence on the mother.”

Many young men today are struggling academically, socially, spiritually, financially, and sexually. They are living at home into their late twenties and thirties, choosing the comforting confines of their parents’ care, video games, online porn, and fearing the unknown world of independence, and missing out on the confident high of standing on one’s own. In the past, and in many cases, the father would not have accepted such a situation. It was called being kicked out and, more than often, worked out just fine. Because the son found that the world did not end if he continued to put one step in front of the other, and that family remained, and would be there when really needed no matter how much he screwed up, as long as there was effort after admitting the error of one’s way. Above all else, many young men today are starving for responsibility, for its being taken away from them, as it is with the women, becoming brainwashed in how we should live, behave and look.

Pertaining to boys because I am one, in Under Saturn’s Shadow, James Hollis writes, “Sons also need to watch their father in the world. They need him to show them how to be in the world, how to work, how to bounce back from adversity…They need the activation of their inherent masculinity both by outer modelling and by direct affirmation.” When this doesn’t happen, Sam Osheron in his book Finding Our Fathers, discusses fatherless homes and like everything else involving cause and effect, he cites an expansive study in which only 17 per cent of American men reported having a positive relationship with their father during their youth. In the remaining cases the father was physically or emotionally absent. Today, every fourth man in Canada, the US and much of Western Europe, grew up without a father. It may be said that 25 per cent of men is no big number, and that a father’s love isn’t really needed to predict the social, emotional, and cognitive development and functioning of children and young adults. To that, studies by the US Department of Health/Census, the Center for Disease Control, the National Principles Association Reports, and others, show that in the US 63 per cent of youth who commit suicide are from fatherless homes, as well as 90 per cent of runaways and homeless youth, 85 per cent of children with behavioural issues, 80 per cent of rapists who have anger issues, 70 per cent of those who drop out of high school, 70 per cent of those in government operated institutions, and 85 per cent of all juveniles in prison. All these people, more than likely came from a fatherless home.

Children are twice as likely to be victims of abuse or neglect living without their father, while daughters of single parents without a father involved are 53 per cent more likely to marry as teenagers, 71 per cent more likely to have children as teenagers, 64 per cent more likely to have a pre-marital birth, and 92 per cent more likely to get divorced themselves. And that, adolescent girls raised in a two parent home with involved fathers, are significantly less likely to be sexually active at an earlier age than girls raised without involved fathers.

The effects of an absent father on a single mother have also been extremely disruptive to such a critical balance. The mothers often become more authoritarian to compensate for the lack of a masculine figure in the child’s life. And without the love and support of the father, the emptiness of sole parenthood often forces her to satisfy such emotional needs through her relationship with her child, perhaps even unconsciously manipulating her child into remaining dependent on her well into adulthood. They cede the title of mother to, instead, being the best of friends. Just like fathers who retreat from being a father and instead becoming buddies. The problem is compounded by the welfare states of the Western World, which are set up in such a way that it’s to a single mother’s advantage to stay single. Unable to find a man who could support her and her child, the fallback position stays with the government within a system, which brings further financial benefits with each new child.

As an adult many children (mostly men) who are still living with their mom, aren’t necessarily seeking independence or developing their consciousness but instead are possessed by what Jung called “the spirit of regression”. And if they don’t remain dependent on their biological mother, they will often seek other women who will be nurturing replacements, or else just as often succumb to the embrace of some sort of addiction.

With all that being said, the first four years of my life I had a mother and a father. After that my mother became Mom, and my father was replaced with a succession of Dad’s. And if it wasn’t for a collection of black and white, and early color photographs, I don’t remember much. But generally, during the first eighteen months of our lives we learn to take solid foods, to walk and at least babble. We also tend to put any object given or within reach, immediately into our mouth in a sort of oral fixation, and we just simply need to explore. Recently, at a Christmas dinner, my ten month old granddaughter, dressed in black leggings and an oriental style red and black dress, with a ribbon in her black spiky hair, played at my feet upon a smooth and shiny fake wood floor as I sat on the corner of a couch. She espied the lit Christmas tree, dropped to all fours and began the crawl, no doubt hoping to put one of those bright shiny things or any tinsel lying around directly into her mouth. I casually leaned over and held the back of her dress while she crawled in place for a bit. She then stopped and sat up with a quizzical look on her face, while I had already pulled back my hand and hid it. Looking around quickly, she dropped to all fours again and headed off to the shiny thing, and once again I reached over and held the back of her dress where she once again crawled in place for a little while, then stopped and sat up looking around with a face that was calm but wondering “what the ?” We did the whole routine again, but when she sat up the last time I let her see my hand holding onto the back of her dress. She looked around, having noticed my hand, took a quick glance at me with no expression on her face, nonchalantly dropped to all fours and headed off in another direction, and I got up and slowly followed. The whole time we did not acknowledge each other or say anything, other than exchanging quick glances. It was beautiful.

At an early age we also begin to establish the important understanding of object permanence; knowing that an object still exists even when you can’t see it. We must turn, push, pull and taste anything we come across. Some call these first eighteen months the age of trust and mistrust, where if the parent fulfills what the infant needs, the infant learns to trust others and develops confidence, even though at times the infant will experience moments of anxiety and rejection. If the infant fails to get needed support and care, it develops mistrust which affects the personality in later stages of life.

Dr. Louise Bates Ames, and The Gesell Institute of Human Development, describes that at roughly eighteen months of age we begin our “I’ll do it myself” stage. Where we tend to do the opposite of most instructions given by the parent, seldom obey any verbal command, use “No!” as our main word, and constantly seem to find ways to frustrate ourselves. We learn to turn light switches on and off, figure out a key turns on a car and opens the front door, but get frustrated because we can never get the key in the lock, and we like to go around turning on every faucet encountered. We must turn, push or pull anything we come across. Unfortunately, some tots will treat others like objects (as to step on, push, and hit without remorse). And while some will gladly share, others will not. Though not often followed, one word commands work best because we are still very limited in what we understand, and even though we now can use words to some extent, we are extremely immature emotionally, may affect a tantrum easily and often, but can be distracted or lured away from a forbidden object or activity. The scariest thing I find today is when a thirteen month old baby is allowed to play with someone’s “smart” phone and the intense reaction when it is taken away. Basically nuking a child’s developing brain every time one lets them play with one. And of course introducing the child to a dopamine rush. This also goes for big screen TV’s where, though I’ve never had one, whenever I am in the presence of one today, I can’t keep my eyes off of it. Parental guidance is imperative at these ages.

By our second year of life, the muscular and nervous systems have developed markedly, and we quickly acquire new skills because we are no longer content to just sit and watch. We’ve got to get our nose and hands in everything unfortunately, judgment develops more slowly. We begin to move around more and check out everything in our environment, and are able to empty drawers and cabinets of all their contents. We become more coordinated, less likely to fall, and less pre-occupied with keeping one’s balance we run and climb more easily. Better language skills, allows us to be less frustrated because we can make ourselves more easily understood. Incredibly, considering earlier in life we were not capable of waiting for anything, we can now wait a few minutes for something we want, and can even tolerate slight or temporary frustration. We may actually consider the idea of pleasing others by being loving and affectionate, though we often still cannot share, we simply give another child a substitute toy instead. And we become very adept at attaching meaning to objects with language, thinking about things symbolically where we use a word or object to represent something other than itself. But the time also represents what some have called the “terrible twos”. At this age many of us are the most violent we’ll probably ever be. And have no problems with kicking, biting, hitting, and pushing when we become angry for usually, inane and uncalled for reasons. But by four years old most of us will have been socialized, with our behaviour determined by our peer group and parents, while others stay perpetually angry for the rest of their lives.

By three years of age, we use the word yes more easily and feel more secure in our relationships with others and with ourselves. We enjoy cooperating and like the whole concept of having a friend. Our motor abilities continue to grow, and there is a marked increase and interest in vocabulary and language. We are easily influenced by exciting new words, such as “secret,” “surprise,” “different,” “guess”, and always ready to willingly engage in new adventures, still having no clue of the consequences.

Over these initial years we learn to use a toilet, the differences between sex, and sexual modesty. We also learn to distinguish right and wrong and begin to develop a conscience, memory and imagination. But the most critical issue in these first few years is a child’s feeling of independence. This stage extends from three to five years. The crisis faced during this period is one of a battle between independence and doubt, which can bring either initiative or guilt. In an extremely permissive environment, a child encounters difficulties that he or she cannot handle, and develops doubt about their abilities, especially if they are not encouraged and supported, and can develop feelings of guilt. Proper guidance is imperative, for guilt is one of the only things that prevent us from letting go of the past and moving on with life. Similarly if the control is severe, the child feels worthless and shameful of being capable of so little. The appropriate middle position, respecting the child’s needs and environmental factors, and recognizing their creative efforts in attempting to do certain activities should influence them in the future to take the initiative, which brings about a sense of independence, and the child’s willingness to try new things is either facilitated or suppressed.

In our fourth year we are able to learn about time, and can understand the past, present and future. We are also able to figure out the concept of days; today, everyday, yesterday, tomorrow, a week, a month, every morning, afternoon, evening, and can learn seasons and holidays. We are also able to understand spatial concepts: up, down, in, out, over, around, and under, and can be extremely interested in what is behind things. We should be able to count three objects, recite numbers from one to ten, and draw a person with two parts: head and legs. We love anything new, whether adventure or the need to experiment, though often, we can be less interested in completing an actual activity or talk as when beginning it, and move on quickly to the next new thing. Some frustration may occur when we are unable to understand an explanation given after someone answers one of our most well used words at that time, “why”. We don’t need to know the exact mechanics involved or how it works, we just need to know the purpose of something, the why of it. Needing to ask why so much at this age is often because the desire to understand remains, but the intellectual maturity to fully understand explanations is not yet developed.

A typical four year old can have approximately fifteen hundred vocabulary words available to them, and can become quite the conversationalist, fulfilling the need to share new found words and slowly realizing the power behind them. Many at this age learn to start a conversation, by once again, simply using their favourite word, why. And when we do talk to others everything is hugely exaggerated, a flock of Canadian geese flying overhead becomes, there were a million billion of them. Or someone was as tall as their house, or their parent was driving about seven hundred kilometres an hour on the way to the grocery store. Or as my son used to say on a hot day, at that age, “Dad, I’m sweating more than a dead dog”. Four year old’s also love to boast, about being most of anything, whether the biggest, baddest, strongest, best, happiest, smartest, prettiest, or meanest. They also love “potty” language, in my day it was words like “pooh-head”, “poop”, “kaka”, most will not dare to say piss, shit or fuck yet, but if their environment dictates it, of course, they will. Repeating words they hear on a regular basis, but having no idea what they mean. But they see the fun in the shock value of such words that upset or surprise people, especially parents. A four year old screaming “Shit!” aloud in a crowded room, you could hear a pin drop. It’s probably why I still remember all the words to Brian Hyland’s song Itsy Bitsy Teenie Weenie, released when I was two, and which I have sung, for effect, many times over my life, “She wore an itsy bitsy teenie weenie yellow polka dot bikini, that, she wore for the first time today ….”, because at one time, I thought it was swearing and somehow getting away with it.

Many children discover at this time that sometimes the adult is not all powerful as once believed. The child learns that they can do bad things and the world will not stop. Thus adults must intervene if there is any untoward behaviour that gets out of control, because children at this age want limits, they want to know the rules and boundaries, and can understand simple directions, while responding well to praise for staying within the limits of behaviour. For my siblings and me, this was sometimes dictated by the sharp slap of a wooden spoon on our behinds or palms of our hands. Very rarely did I get two for the same offence, but then the offences varied, depending on mood.

In my day us kids were definitely not in charge, like many seem today. But it kept us in shape emotionally and physically. We knew the boundaries, which gave us greater freedom. Very rare was the one who showed disrespect for their parents. Because it was called on immediately, parents didn’t let such disrespect just slide by, but confronted the behaviour. This is not to say we weren’t allowed to be just kids, because we very much were allowed to be kids, but when it came to our behaviour with others we were expected to be respectful about it.

Family mattered, especially sitting down at dinner. Without any distractions, breaking bread together, engaging with each other, learning to listen because then you will be listened to, discussions and interactions that became fundamental to our well being and learning. The kitchen table was where many of us learned to be human. While humility and empathy began to disappear when children were told that they are more than great and absolutely amazing, will one day have a great job, and that life is all about achievement, how big a car and house one has, and how cool they look. But when that child grows up within such a culture of bloated self-esteem and finally finds out what life is all about, which in most cases only leads to a deep resentment.

Physically a four year old is full of piss and vinegar, with energy to burn and in perpetual motion. Boy’s chests puffed out and girl’s hands on their hips. We are much more coordinated than just a year ago, we love to run, skip, and climb almost anything. At the same time we are usually still not ready to be trusted around younger siblings, because we may promise to be gentle, but may not be able to follow through. Socially, most of us at this age love to play with other children, which teaches us how to play cooperatively. We become much more willing to share and take turns, and enjoy doing big projects with a group. And we like to have friends, to meet new ones, and to be seen as a friend.

Emotionally, we can go from love to hate in a heartbeat, and will “love” or “hate” certain foods, things and people. Some individuals may be possessively in love with their mother, and may hate it when she changes anything about herself, whether a new hairstyle, clothes or even friends. Another extreme is that although we love to laugh, and could get down-right hysterical about it and perhaps even pee our pants, when angry, we often will still hit, kick, scream and spit. At the same time, others nearing five can become less stressed and have less need for outlets that release tension.

At four, some may like violent stories with lots of action and demand the gory details, especially related to death, blood, guts and gore. Even though we may not yet necessarily understand that death is permanent. Our imagination becomes ever more active, and we can have trouble differentiating real from pretend. Some will even have an imaginary friend. But it is important to one’s development that when we do make up a story at this age, we shouldn’t be labelled a liar, and shouldn’t be punished for telling untruths. Any story we tell, no matter if we swear on our heart and hope to die or spit into our palm and want to shake on the idea of truth, the story must pass muster first, by having wise parents who require real evidence before believing. Our fears at four years are usually fire, the sound of sirens and yelling, the dark, wild animals, something hiding behind the curtain, in the closet or under the bed, and our mother leaving, especially while we sleep. Basically the same fears four year old’s have had for thousands of years.

As one nears five years of age, one should be able to dress and undress by themselves, and to lace one’s own shoes. And able to wash and dry our face and hands, and brush our teeth regularly. We become fascinated with bodily functions, especially what our bodies produce. One result is a fascination with bathrooms, and we start wanting privacy when using one, and spend a great deal of time inside exploring. Drawbacks at this age are that we may forget to go to the bathroom when into serious play and may need to pee at inconvenient times, such as in the middle of dinner or a movie. We also begin to get frequent colds, and may have stomach aches in certain social situations as our social worlds expand.

Understanding very well the extremes there are in parenting, such as the egocentric, impulsive, ignorant and at times, cruel and abusive actions of adults, often based on how they themselves were raised, most children do seem to reach the previously mentioned golden age in their development at around five years old. Regretfully, this doesn’t happen everywhere, with some five year old children, all they’ve known is violence and hunger, and experienced things worse than death. But for the world’s fortunate, life seems pretty good for a five year old.

We tend to be more positive than negative and often use the words “great”, “sure”, “cool”, “fine”, “why not”, “awesome”, “oh alright” and “I just love that”. We are living in the here and now. Some of us may be less adventurous and quieter by nature, and less resistant, not having to prove that we are our own bosses all the time. We are proud of our abilities, and may love to read, learn new facts and practise writing. We often become determined to do things “just right” and may even have the ability to protect ourselves from over-stimulation. While the true artists will already have some experience in their passions, whether singing, dancing, building, creating, inventing, playing an instrument, sculpting, or painting pictures.

We may be more confident and secure, because we may be able to judge what we can and cannot do, and often may ask for permission to do even simple things. We start caring more about our own room, home, street, neighbourhood, and classroom, but will often impose human feelings to inanimate objects. And though we may learn a little bit more about the concept of death, we may still think it’s reversible and be very matter-of-fact, rational and unemotional, when discussing it.

Our parents are seen as the ultimate authorities, and we develop strong feelings for family, including pets. And though we may do better with siblings, once again, we may over-estimate our abilities to care for younger children. The mother is the center of our worlds, and we want to please her and be near her and hold her hand, while the father is the provider and protector who will hug us, tuck us in, teach us practical skills, and keep us safe. I remember, while walking hand in hand with my own son and feeling so proud and confident, then came the day he didn’t want to hold my hand anymore, especially if his friends were around. I miss that.

In a perfect world, which does not exist, parents should encourage their children to be brave, instill in them the courage to become competent and self-assured, even in the most difficult scenarios, with each parent bringing their own unique strengths to the table. Where a child is taught to be responsible for their actions and words, and that one should expect to be held accountable. On many levels, we had to pick up bits and pieces as we went along and eventually figure out things on our own. Which was fine because I seem to have passed along such traits to my son, who I hope passes them on to his child. But above all else, children need reassurance that they are loved.

At five years old most of us are trying to get along well with others, but we play better with two friends rather than with three. We enjoy playing “house”, by taking on the roles of our parents. And of course we still love to climb, swing, jump, and skip, yet oddly, violence and gore may be the main themes in the made up stories that we share. When I was five years old there was no kindergarten, so the timing of when to start grade one required a lot of thought and consideration, as not all children have the needed skills to take this important step, because of different degrees of maturity, including emotional, social, physical, as well as the often more emphasized intellectual abilities.

Jean Piaget called the ages two through seven, the pre-operational stage. Where at most levels, we are egocentric, and have difficulty thinking beyond our own viewpoints. Which makes sense considering the development of language, memory, imagination, and intelligence, are both egocentric and intuitive.

From five to ten years, it’s all about developing a greater attention span, needing less sleep, and gaining strength. This may allow us to expend more effort in acquiring skills, and needing accomplishment in our lives, regardless of ability. The goal should be to develop a feeling of competence, rather than inability. The success in whatever appropriate endeavour, leads to further industrious behaviour, while failure results in development of feelings of inferiority. Over the same time span we develop the concepts necessary for everyday living, a conscience, a sense of morality, a scale of values, along with developing attitudes toward social groups and institutions and achieving personal independence. Life becomes all about peer socialization, indeed, for tens of thousands of years one of the most painful blows is to be alienated from one’s peer group. But then without peer pressure no one would become socialized. And finally, we develop appropriate masculine or feminine roles, besides those already ingrained in our DNA as a species.

Piaget also found that we may become much less egocentric during these years, with more logical and methodical manipulation of symbols, and more aware of the outside world and events. It is the time we start working things out inside our heads. This is called operational thought, and it allows kids to solve problems without physically encountering things in the real world. At the least, all the above should be developed and taught, but sadly is not. Indeed life has different roads for different folks. But it’s not rocket science, children who grow up with criticism learn to condemn, if they grow up with hostility they learn to fight, and if they grow up in fear they learn to be apprehensive.

Much later the society we are born into will dictate whether we are liberal or conservative minded. Some will grow up to be fundamentally collectivists and socialists. Believing that society as a whole is far more important than the individual, and that the actions of individuals must be strictly monitored and governed to prevent negative effects on the group. They seek centralization for all things, and follow the tenet that humans are born as blank slates. That their entire personality is a product of their environment, and that “The needs of the many outweigh the needs of the few”. They embrace an all encompassing government, yet many deem themselves Atheists, which only leaves them “constantly feeling unfulfilled as their explanations of existence do not satisfy the innate human relationship to the metaphysical.” They also claim that gender is a social construct that must be dismantled, and that there is no such thing as evil people, only evil systems that spoil the minds of people.

On the other hand, some will grow up to be individualists, sovereignty activists and true conservatives. Believing that society should be restricted from dictating the life of the individual and that group participation should be voluntary. The group does not use a centralized model. Their credo, “Without the individual the group does not exist. The group is an abstraction created in the mind. When groups do form they should only exist to serve and protect the inherent rights of individuals, not be used as a mechanism of control by weak people who are afraid to function on their own…” Many of these people tend to have been raised religiously, often Protestant Christian, for their faith morally guides them, their families and their communities. The inherent belief is that everyone is unique and only accomplishment, hard work and merit will determine what is fair or not. They don’t believe that every aspect of life should be micro-managed, and that a person’s character is mostly inherent. And believe the vast majority of people’s gender is determined psychologically and biologically.

This separation of societal philosophies we mature into, only becomes confusing when the elite/globalist controlled pundits and media outlets get involved, and convolute and confuse. Such groups force us to decide which side we stand on or which herd we are a member of. When in fact we are both. Today the separation between liberal and conservative has ever widened with conservatives generally thinking things through and look at fact based evidence compared to the liberal side, which seems to rather “feel” issues far more than they critically examine them.

As we age, life becomes all about what happens to us, the choices we make, and the results or fallout of our decisions. But, we have freedom of choice in our response. Who we are today is the outcome of choices we made yesterday about things that happened to us, or that we have learned along the way. And though much of who we are is controlled by our genetic determinism, our psychic determinism forms by how one is raised, and where. We are conditioned to speak a certain language, eat a certain diet and follow traditions of the environment we are raised.

Did we either follow our own path by acknowledging our soul, and free will, or did we succumb to simple stimulus, with no self-determinism and simply allowed ourselves to be led by marketing practises and manufactured consent? Are we being purposely supplied a particular manufactured stimuli to achieve a desired response, like any other lab-rat? Consider, that when human populations, domesticated through regular feeding and socializing around a local watering hole grow, they are at first kept in large numbers and then divided into smaller groups according to breed and color for easy keeping. Our numbers controlled by regular culling of the unproductive or unruly, and allowing only castrated males to frolic with the females. The herd further domesticated with simple and repetitive training by use of whip, cattle prod, carrot on a stick, or a treat, then marked with a unique brand, number, tattoo, ear tag, nose ring or computer chip. While some in the herd are used to provide entertainment whether for show or sport, the rest provide food and work, and simply baa, moo or neigh, some louder than others. And of course, the herd would need to be kept heavily sedated on drugs, and kept clean with hormones and antibiotics.

My biggest fear is coming to terms with knowing in which one of these ways was I conceived or expected to participate in. Or have I simply been following inherited traits. But if I was produced through culture, what if the culture was a lie? Growing up with values, but whose values? And if they were based on lies, how did they somehow become true to me? Are we really just a product of our environment? I don’t know so lets find out.


GDP by Country (Including the individual United States)

Highest GDP’s in the world.

(US Dollars)

GDP (IMF ’19) GDP (UN ’16) GDP Per Capita 2019 Population
1 United States 21.34 trillion 18.62 trillion $64,865 329,064,917
2 China 14.22 trillion 11.22 trillion $9,915 1,433,783,686
3 Japan 5.18 trillion 4.94 trillion $40,802 126,860,301
4 Germany 3.96 trillion 3.48 trillion $47,462 83,517,045
5 India 2.97 trillion 2.26 trillion $2,175 1,366,417,754
6 United Kingdom 2.83 trillion 2.65 trillion $41,895 67,530,172
7 France 2.76 trillion 2.47 trillion $42,402 65,129,728
8 Italy 2.03 trillion 1.86 trillion $33,458 60,550,075
9 Brazil 1.96 trillion 1.80 trillion $9,288 211,049,527
10 Canada 1.74 trillion 1.53 trillion $46,487 37,411,047
11 South Korea 1.66 trillion 1.41 trillion $32,341 51,225,308
12 Russia 1.61 trillion 1.25 trillion $11,040 145,872,256
13 Spain 1.43 trillion 1.24 trillion $30,578 46,736,776
14 Australia 1.42 trillion 1.30 trillion $56,223 25,203,198
15 Mexico 1.24 trillion 1.08 trillion $9,731 127575529

Comparatively, if one took the US out of the equation, and each of their states were a separate entity like any other country, the top GDP’s would be China, Japan, Germany, and California (GDP $3 trillion/pop. 39.75 million). Texas at $1.8 trillion, would edge out Canada ($1.74 trillion) and New York State ($1.7 trillion), both of which have a higher GDP than Russia, for the number ten spot. Florida has the 18th highest GDP in the world. Altogether, in this scenario, 11 of the top 30 GDP’s of the world’s 240 countries would be the States of California, Texas, New York, Florida, Illinois, Pennsylvania, Ohio, New Jersey, Georgia, and Washington. The US state with the lowest GDP is Vermont, in 149th place.


Half Way There – A Vancouverite Baby Boomer’s Almanac

God grant me the serenity to accept the things I cannot change, the courage to change the things I can, and the wisdom to know the difference.

The Serenity Prayer – Reinhold Niebuhr

Chapter One

Since I’m perhaps nearing my end I thought I’d start at the beginning.

Some of the oldest human relics that have ever been found were fertility figurines carved from stones over fifty-thousand years ago. They depicted women with a figure of big bum, big belly and breasts. Perhaps not understanding yet that sex produces children, the men were no doubt in awe of what a woman could do that they could not. Women on the other hand were attracted to men who were confident, athletic, brave, a good provider, respected among the tribe, and handsome, with nice eyes. This was because women were selective as to which sperm they wanted, and because such men protected and provided for them. Thus, in nature and in human tribal cultures untouched by modern western ideology, males predominately do the wooing. There’s a perfectly logical reason for this, eggs are more valuable than the dime a dozen sperm. Most females are limited by how many eggs they have at birth, while males are only limited by the numbers of females they can have sex with. For example, for some women today, a pregnancy can simply be a too costly and time consuming responsibility to take on, especially if one is single, and if a decision is made to become pregnant, she at least should be selective as to whose sperm she wants, whether the survival of the species depends on it or not, unlike a Bonobo chimpanzee.

The Bonobo, kin to the other chimpanzees who lived on the other side of the river as it were, spend much of their time fondling, rubbing, and engaging in intercourse. Primatologist Frans de Waal described the difference between chimpanzees and bonobos as being, “Chimps use violence to get sex, while bonobos use sex to avoid violence.”

After studying them for years, Vanessa Woods describes the bonobo’s world as being where all your relatives “think sex is like a handshake”. And if left alone, they live high quality, nearly stress-free lives. Their world is one where everyone takes care of each other, especially the young, and where both males and females, share the babysitting duties, and don’t necessarily care who the father was. When having sex they cuddle, kiss, hold hands and gaze into one another’s eyes, perhaps even fluttering their eye lashes. While jealousy, is considered an ugly trait. Even before eating, instead of prayers, they all have a quickie before sitting down and empathically passing the food around smiling at each other. Then afterwards no doubt all take a nap. I would.

It’s perhaps not so surprising that for bonobos, chimps, humans and dolphins, all of whom might be the smartest of all mammals, promiscuity is the norm. Regardless, because whether by love, lust or instinct, when a male animal and a female animal have sex and do not use protection, there is a good chance a baby may be conceived.

In early 1958, somewhere in the Fraser Valley, British Columbia, my father’s performance reached its crescendo when the floodgates were thrown aside allowing nearly one hundred million sperm cells, the smallest cells in a human, to be ejected as semen, along with a part of his soul, and perhaps a quick pang of sadness that so often happens. Similar perhaps to how the vast majority of women have feelings of sadness or the “baby blues” after giving birth because maybe it’s that feeling that a human that grew inside her belly is now gone. In the there and then, the race was on, as the frantic sperm started swimming like crack addicted tadpoles, bobbing and weaving forward, with their long tails flowing behind. Others undoubtedly swam around like chickens with their heads cut off. Each one affected, or not, by how stressed out the father was, which could impact their future behaviour, just as a mother’s stress at fertilization can affect the egg.

Within five minutes, the hardier sperm made their way from my mother’s vagina, through to her cervix where, because it had been a couple of weeks since her last period, she happened to be ovulating. So her body had made the mucus in her cervix become more fluid and more elastic, allowing the sperm to pass through like going through a slippy-slide, and enter the uterus even more rapidly, as they wiggled their way forward in a mad frenzy bouncing off the walls and each other.

In the 17th century, Antonie van Leeuwenhoek, was the first to observe sperm in action using a microscope. He called them “animalcules” or little animals, because of his belief that each sperm contained a fully formed but very tiny human being.

Once past the uterus, the horde of sperm still left dwindled dramatically. Similar perhaps to animal kingdoms, and early human tribes, where the weak, lost and stupid are usually the first to go – the survival of the fittest for the survival of the species.

Of the millions, perhaps only a very few were left to swim into the funnel-shaped ends of two Fallopian tubes. Door number one was a dead end, while behind door number two an egg (ovum) my mother’s ovaries had released, lay in wait. The largest cell in a human body, the egg, can be fertilized for twelve to twenty-four hours after it is released. It then makes its way down the Fallopian tube where it waits for a sperm to come walking through the door. As per chance, one of my father’s sperm picked door number two and sperm and egg would meet.

Picking the right door was easy, but only because of sheer luck, while the hard part came when confronting the egg that happened to be there. Back in my father’s scrotum, rumours among the sperm had run rampant that the egg was a tough nut to crack. If unable to gain entry after throwing all one has at it, relentlessly squirming like mad, a sperm runs out of juice after five days and are eventually expelled, as is the egg if it finds no suitors or anyone capable of entering. If one or sometimes two or more sperm make entry into the egg, the combination of such cells is a process that’s known as fertilization or conception. The whole process is undoubtedly nature’s way of ensuring only the healthiest sperm fertilizes an egg, through a sort of equality of opportunity over equality of outcome situation, to provide the best chances of having a healthy baby.

Once inside, the sperm’s twenty-three chromosomes paired up with the egg’s twenty-three chromosomes, and ta-da a human cell called a zygote. Within this newly formed cell are genes that had been passed down over untold generations from both parents lineage. Twenty-two of these pairs, called autosomes, look the same in both males and females, while the twenty-third pair is the sex chromosomes. Since all eggs have an X chromosome, the sperm’s contribution was a Y chromosome, thus I became a boy. If my father had shot off an X chromosome, I would have been a girl. In very few cases, or about as common as someone having red hair, some are born intersex. Meaning someone born with any of several variations in sex characteristics, including chromosomes, gonads, sex hormones, or genitals. While the well used adage, “a woman born into a man’s body or a man born into a woman’s body” is false, for human sexuality is binary. Gender identity on the other hand are thoughts and feelings of our emotional system that do not match with one’s assigned sex, which are not hard-wired within us, they are developed.

Lining the Fallopian tube, tiny silk-like hairs, swaying back and forth like a bed of kelp in a current, move the fertilized zygote through the tube toward the uterus. A journey which took about three to five days, all the while the cells of the zygote began to divide repeatedly like an out of control virus. Upon reaching the uterus, the cells continued to divide, becoming a hollow ball of cells called a blastocyst. In two to three days the blastocyst implants itself into the lining of the uterus, usually near the top, side, front or back. The wall of the blastocyst is only one cell thick except in one area where it is three to four cells thick, and over the next few days the cells in the thicker part develops into an embryo, while the thinner outer cells burrow into the wall of the uterus and develop into the placenta. As the placenta develops, wire-like vessels, including two arteries and one vein, will branch out from its surface, much like the wires from a car battery, and entwine together to eventually form a 55 to 60 centimetre long umbilical cord which is plugged into us through our belly-button. The cord will supply us with everything we need, such as nutrient uptake, thermo-regulation, waste elimination, and gas exchange via the mother’s blood supply, to fight against internal infection, and to produce hormones which support pregnancy. Placentas are a defining characteristic of placental mammals, from mice to elephants, to whales and apes.

Most organs begin to form in the ever growing embryo, now the size of a pea, three weeks after fertilization/conception, which equals five weeks of pregnancy, because doctors date pregnancy from the first day of the woman’s last menstrual period, which is typically two weeks before conception. Sticking with “since conception” henceforth, the heart and major blood vessels had already begun developing, around the 16th day. And by the 21st day someone flips on a light switch and the heart starts beating and pumping fluid through blood vessels. The first red blood cells appear the next day, while blood vessels continue to develop in both the embryo and placenta.

By the fourth week the embryo elongates, the first suggestion off a human shape, while the lungs continue to mature, as they do right up to nearly the time of delivery. Along the dorsal side of the embryo the cells had already begun to form a neuroectoderm, basically a neural plate of cells which looks like a flap of skin which transforms into a neural groove or fold, then eventually into a neural tube. This is where the central nervous system and the spinal cord will reside, topped off with a chemical electrical brain. Other cells start to arrange themselves around where the spinal cord and developing brain will emerge, mainly the face, nose, ears and eyes. All important because they all are where the brain will receive its information to operate. And still other cells will form into the skeletal structure needed to protect such vital areas. By the end of the week the heart and other organs continue to form, and the structures necessary to the development of the eyes and ears develop, while small buds show where the arms and legs are going to be. The embryo begins to take on a C-shaped curvature, like a little dolphin without the beak or dorsal fin, but soon sharing similar bone structures in our hands and their flippers.

Once the neural tube is formed, it slowly fills with cerebrospinal fluid. Its walls contain neural stem cells, which drive brain growth as they divide multiple times. Over the many weeks, some of the cells will gradually stop dividing and differentiate into neurons and glial cells, which are the main cellular components of the central nervous system. Neurons are generated from neural stem cells and progenitor cells, through the process of neurogenesis. These neurons will never divide again for the lifetime of the organism, and migrate to different parts of the developing brain to self-organize into different brain structures. Once the neurons have reached their regional positions, they extend nerve fibres, tiny antennas as it were, which allow them to communicate with other neurons via synapses, which are small gaps separating the neurons, basically they’re neurotransmitters containing mitochondria and other cell organelles. The first sparks of life begin to flash in synaptic communication between each other, which eventually will lead to the establishment of functional neural circuits that mediate sensory and motor processing, and make up one’s future behaviour.

As it develops over the next few months, the brain also divides into three sections, the hind-brain, the mid-brain, and the fore-brain. These simple sacks would eventually enlarge and further divide into other future sections, such as the cerebral cortex, thalamus, cerebellum and medulla, according to what XX or XY chromosome one has. On average and not in all cases, other changes in the brain include that males typically have a larger amygdala which is the centre for aggression and physical action, while females will typically have a larger and faster maturing prefrontal cortex which is responsible for inhibiting aggression, and is closer linked to verbal functions. But although females are slower to act out in anger physically, their verbal response is often just as hard-hitting, deep cutting, and harder to stop. And while a male’s brain circuits use more testosterone and vasopressin, the female brain uses more estrogen and oxytocin, which affects each other’s behaviour in their future.

By six weeks after conception the embryo has grown to the size of a kidney bean. Depressions that will give rise to nostrils become visible, and the beginnings of the retinas form. Lower limb buds that will become legs appear, and the arm buds that sprouted last week now take on the shape of paddles. Fingers began to form, and small swellings outlined the future shell-shaped parts of the ears, and the eyes become ever more obvious. The upper lip and nose have formed. The trunk and neck begin to straighten. By the end of this week, the embryo is only about 11 to 14 millimetres long, about half the diameter of a quarter.

Seven weeks after conception, the arms grow enough to where elbows appear. Toes are visible and welts where eyelids will appear form. The head is large but doesn’t have much of a chin. By the eight week the head has become more round, and we can bend our elbows. Toes and fingers lose their webbing and become longer. The eyelids and external ears continue to develop. The umbilical cord is now clearly visible, while the embryo from head to tail is less than 18 milometers long, about the diameter of a penny.

At the end of the eighth week after conception, the embryo becomes a fetus. It’s at this point that the chance of a miscarriage or birth defect was at its highest. Eight to ten of the fetus’ main organs are already formed. The exceptions are the brain and spinal cord, which continue to form and develop throughout the pregnancy. Ankles, wrists, and fingers begin forming, bones appear, and the genitals and inner ear begin to develop. The heartbeat can be seen via ultrasound, and the fetus begins to make involuntary movements.

Nine weeks after conception our heads make up about half the length of the fetus, but the body will soon catch up. Our faces become broader, widely separating the eyes, our eyelashes are still fused to our heads, with ears set low. We slowly begin to take on the features of our parents, and their parents, and their parent’s parents and so on and so on, who knows how far back in time, their genes continuing to combine and to create, passing on traits, abilities, and perhaps even the memories of souls, going back thousands of years.

In our closed mouths, buds for future teeth appear. Red blood cells are beginning to form in the liver, and by the end of the week our external genitalia begin to go either one of two ways; a penis and a pair of testicles or a clitoris and labia majora to protect the vulva. The intestines begin to form in our abdomen, while our skin is almost transparent. The average fetus at this point is about 61 millimetres long or the length of the short side of an old Canadian dollar bill or the size of a small peach, and fills the entire uterus, leaving it to slowly be pushed outward as the fetus grows.

More than ninety per cent of abortions in Canada and the US are carried out on embryos at six to fourteen weeks, with six per cent between fourteen and twenty weeks, and two per cent at a later stage. Of the abortions carried out beyond twenty weeks, most are due to a direct threat to the mother’s life or the detection of a very serious birth defect. Even though way before this stage and no matter from rape, incest, syringe or test-tube, women today also have the options of the “morning-after” pill and other chemical means. The majority of abortions are carried out because of economic reasons, because often there is no husband or partner.

In Canada, before it became legal in 1969, abortion could be legally performed only to save the life of the woman, to do so for any other reason was illegal. Former Chief Coroner of Ontario, Morton Shulman, recalls that, “while the pregnant daughters of the rich were sent to reliable physicians who did abortions for cash, with some of them performing twenty to thirty abortions a week, everyone else’s options were either performing the abortion on themselves or be assisted by a nurse abortionist.” The preferred method over others too ghastly to mention, was pumping Lysol into the mother’s womb. The mortality rate was high and the infection rate over 50 per cent. A doctor in Chicago was said to have performed over 70,000 abortions over his 40 year career.

Today abortion in Canada is legal at all stages of pregnancy as long as a committee of doctor’s sign off that it was necessary for the physical or mental well-being of the mother. While some non-legal obstacles exist, Canada is one of only a few nations with no legal restrictions on abortion, with regulations and accessibility varying between provinces, much the same as in the US with their states. Today the majority of women who do have an abortion have at least two, with many having three over their lifetime. In many developed nations a woman, on average, will have just less than one abortion over their lifetime. But, overall, abortion rates are dropping. Notably, abortion rates are similar in countries where abortion is highly restricted and where it is broadly legal: The abortion rate is 37 per 1,000 women in countries where abortion is prohibited or permitted only to save the life of the woman, and 34 per 1,000 women in countries where abortion is not restricted. As such, legal restrictions do not eliminate the numbers of abortions.

In early 2019, New York State passed a law, joining four other states, where an abortion is allowed right up to the ninth month, and a doctor is no longer needed to perform the procedure, but instead can be performed by a nurse or clinic employee. Additional states are currently hoping to pass laws where an abortion may be performed, not only up to natural dilation, but further – even after the baby is born, where the woman and doctor, after first making the baby “comfortable” can then decide to abort. Performing what was once called infanticide. At the same time other states are trying to outlaw abortions entirely.

I personally have no problem with abortions that are medically and morally necessary, but I am against using such a medical procedure as birth control, for stem cell misuse or for whatever mood one happens to be in at that time. And the fact that up to the present day, fathers are not included in the decision making, but then sadly and more often than not, there is no father in the picture anymore. And of course the instilled and accepted belief that it’s none of a man’s business what a women wants to do with her body. So I shall now shut up, and if this is the case of “my body my choice”, and all things being equal, then it is also my mind my choice, my business my choice, and my money my choice.

Moving through our eleventh week, our eyebrows, eyelashes, fingernails, and the neck all form, while the skin has a wrinkled appearance. The arms and legs can bend, the kidneys start working and produce urine, and the fetus can swallow. Although electrical brain activity is first detected between the third and fifth week, it is considered primitive neural activity rather than the beginning of conscious thought. But the sparks really start going off at around 15 weeks, then begin to multiply ever more quickly around week 28, as it accumulates new cells throughout the pregnancy and continues, for the first year of life after birth.

By the halfway mark of a pregnancy, in the 18th week after conception (20th week of the pregnancy), a first-time mother may feel the first fluttering movements of kicking, squirming or turning, known as the “quickening”. This has got to be an amazing moment which a man could not understand where you feel a human growing inside you and it reacts to your touch. The fellow in the Aliens movie, who had that creature tear itself out of his chest, had to have felt something was growing inside him. Maybe he thought it was just a bad case of gas. But I digress. More interestingly, women who have been pregnant before, typically feel movements about two weeks earlier than women who are pregnant for the first time. Coincidentally perhaps, the same time the quickening is going on the fetus starts to hear sound vibrations. maybe we are already movin’ to the groovin’? Now eight to twelve centimetres long, an ultra-sound is able to reveal our sex, and take a picture of us so our parents can magnet it to their fridge.

One hundred and fifty days in we open our eyes for the first time. Eyes that people will later say look just like our mother’s or father’s or even grandparents. And though we become ever more active, chasing dragons no doubt, we also begin to sleep and waken on a more regular cycle. Lanugo, a fine hair, and a waxy coating called vernix, cover and protect our thin fetal skin.

At twenty-six weeks after conception, we have a 90 per cent chance of survival outside the uterus if provided with high-quality medical care, because though our lungs are completely formed, they don’t function yet. As such, these premature births are the leading cause of death for children under the age of five.

We are now able to hiccup, and are more sensitive to sound, and respond to noises and voices heard, which at this time, is mostly the sounds of our mother’s body. These include her beating heart, the air moving in and out of her lungs, her growling stomach, food being digested and expelled, and even the sound of blood moving through the umbilical cord. Recordings taken in the uterus reveal that noises from outside of the womb are muted by about half. Mostly because, there’s no open air in the uterus only amniotic fluid and it’s inside our mother’s body, making most noises muffled. The most significant sound we hear in the womb is our mother’s voice. Soon we will recognize it from other sounds, and in many cases when the father is speaking to the womb through the entire pregnancy; his voice will also be recognized. Recordings have also shown that when the mother or father is speaking, we are more alert and attentive; we cock an ear as it were.

Through the next few weeks we really start packing on the weight. Bones harden, except for the skull, which remains soft and flexible to make delivery easier. Whatever gender, our bones would grow similarly, except for sometimes longer lengths, bone densities, and the skull shape of a male and the pelvis of the female. If the average person ever found a human skeleton in the woods which had its pelvis and skull missing, they would be hard-pressed to distinguish whether the skeleton was male or female.

From about the 34th week after conception to birth in the 38th week, we continue to put on weight, and start preparing for what is to come, by ever so slowly turning into a head-down position. Our lungs are now fully mature and they prepare themselves for functioning on their own. During the later stages of the pregnancy our mothers gratefully give us our first buzz by infusing us with an increase in abundance of oxytocin, a hormone that brings feelings of contentment, reductions in anxiety, and feelings of calmness and security.

While my father was dutifully caring, providing for, and protecting my mother, she physically and mentally experienced all that is being pregnant. And astoundingly, do it three more times over the next four years. Take a break, and then in 1967 do it again, with the baby of the family arriving in 1973 to make it a six-pack.

In the first few months of pregnancy the hormonal changes, such as rising levels of estrogen and chorionic gonadotrophin brings on waves of nausea and vomiting. And despite its name, morning sickness can occur any time of day. The hormone progesterone increased sleepiness, and as her uterus grew and pressed on her bladder, trips to the bathroom were frequent. Her breasts more tender and swollen, her areolas, the skin around each nipple, darkened and enlarged. Her digestive system slowed down to increase the absorption of beneficial nutrients. But such reduced digestive system motility, caused heartburn, constipation, bloating and gas. Her heart worked harder by increasing its beat to pump more blood to the uterus which supplied it to the fetus, and gave her face a rosier complexion. Maybe this is where the craving for ice-cream came in. As well as the physical changes throughout the pregnancy, she would have experienced emotional highs and lows with mood swings running the gamut, from loving the world to wanting to kill somebody.

With her enlarged uterus pushing against her diaphragm, in the final trimester of pregnancy, she was possibly short of breath with less room for the lungs to expand. Her ankles, hands, feet and face may have swelled as she retained more fluids, while her blood circulation slowed. She may have also had more backaches and hip pain as these joints relax in preparation for delivery, and never ever able to get comfortable. Her face might have developed dark patches of skin, and stretch marks may appear on her belly, thighs, breasts and backside. She may also notice varicose veins on her legs. Her breasts may have experienced some leakage of colostrum, a yellow liquid, as they get ready for breastfeeding.

Nearing the big moment, we the fetus usually drop lower in our mother’s abdomen and become suspended upside down. False labor, known as Braxton-Hicks contractions, may have begun to occur as it got closer to our due date. During the final weeks of pregnancy it would have become harder to find a comfortable sleeping position, so mothers are usually extremely tired. As delivery approaches, some women love the whole experience of being pregnant and waddle around proudly, while others may feel like enough already, get on with this.

Then at a certain time, a very tiny unheard alarm bell goes off somewhere and the door is thrown aside and the dam bursts. The only womb we had ever known empties. Our mother begins to feel abdominal cramps or back pain that last around half a minute and occur every ten to thirty minutes. The cramps become stronger and closer together, while the mother’s cervix begins to rapidly dilate up to about five centimetres.

As our warm aquarium of pulsating organs and muffled noises empties itself, our soft skull is sucked by the flow down to a drain at the bottom, and the entrance to the birth canal. The sides of which slowly start to knead, squeeze and relax, pushing and pulling us through, like an anaconda swallowing a deer.

The contractions get strong enough where the mother has to bear down and “puussh” through them, in between either cursing their man, madly chewing ice cubes or chomping down on a stick. This stage could last anywhere from twenty minutes to two hours. And though most babies are born head first, about four per cent are born feet or butt first, and are known as breech births, or born face first facing up which is called posterior. In such cases, the obstetrician may need to recommend a Caesarean or C-section, or the use of forceps (for posterior births), as the best means of delivery. This is done by making an incision in the mother’s abdomen and uterus, so the baby can be taken directly out instead of travelling through the birth canal. A truly out of body experience. Caesarean sections are done most often when the mother has had a previous baby by Caesarean delivery or the baby’s health might suffer if born vaginally. The two out of three women who do undergo vaginal births instead of caesarean, of course, avoid having major surgery and its associated risks, such as severe bleeding, scarring, infections, reactions to anesthesia and more longer-lasting pain, and have a much longer hospital stay and recovery time.

The biggest disappointment in caesarean births is the millions of immune cells (types of white blood cells) in the mother which slowly make their way to the birth canal during the later stages of pregnancy. In some form of celebration of the birth, they line the route, as it were, and lie in wait while expanding their size. As the baby passes through they make contact and cling on, and slowly enter the skin, and make their way to the baby’s bone marrow, and join other immune cells already there. It is where cells of the immune system originate from, and some mature. The “muscles” of the newborn’s immune system then migrate to guard the peripheral tissues, and circulate in the blood and in a specialized system of vessels called the lymphatic system. Ever ready to attack any foreign bodies they can use their plasma membrane to engulf any bacteria or large particle, then ingest or degrade it. Caesarean births not only miss out on such a benefit, but destroy the hopes of millions of immune cells because the headliner didn’t show up.

As we get squeezed down the ever expanding birth canal each time our mother bears down and pushes, typically our head is facing either hip of our mother, but we slowly begin to rotate and face her bottom. We then intuitively hold our arms to our sides bow our head and rest our chin on our chest and humbly ready ourselves for our grand entrance into the world. Still hiding behind the curtain and waiting for the lights to come on. This position will allow the crown of our skull to go through the birth canal first, until that is when the back of our neck presses against our mother’s pubic bone. Here we genetically know to extend our neck, as if we are looking up at something and without even an excuse or a pardon me, slide by the bone by dropping one of our shoulders. By this time, the cervix has reached its full dilation of ten centimetres, the approximate diameter of a bagel, or a coffee can.

Once again we turn our head to restore its normal relationship with the shoulders, which are still at an angle, as if we are escaping from a straight jacket. Our shoulders repeat the corkscrew movements of our head, which can be seen in the final movements of the fetal head just before we emerge, by those attentively watching and ready to catch us. Undoubtedly the most painful part for the mother, who may experience an intense stretching and burning, is when our head pops out in the act of crowning. This final stage, where our head is out but our body isn’t, can take anywhere from 5 to 30 minutes. A lifetime for the mother perhaps, with the final birth of her baby the greatest moment in life, possibly erasing any pain just endured.

We are then thrust into the spotlight and have to breathe air for the first time, with an umbilical cord trailing behind us, still attached to the placenta, which hasn’t arrived yet as it usually emerges about 10 to 12 minutes later. Luckily, being human and somebody grabbed us as we came out and not just dropped to the ground then licked clean by the mother as other animals do, we instantly have to learn how to adjust to temperature changes, to suck and swallow, though pooh and pee already comes naturally. The next few days are all about shock and awe, and radical adjustment. With the only thing needed to be kept warm and fed. Henceforth, all things learned are based on needs, experiences, then later by trial and error. And contrary to the popular belief of many today, being born does not ensure morality, good intentions or credibility.

Most medical authorities today suggest the infant be placed skin-to-skin on the mother’s chest for an hour or two immediately after birth. Any initial observations of the baby can be done while the baby remains close to the mother. Babies born in hospitals used to be removed from their mothers’ shortly after birth and brought in only at feeding times. The idea was that newborns would be safer in the nursery and that the separation would offer the mother more time to rest. This is what my mother experienced. Studies about immediate nakedidity between mother and babe have shown that such timely touching promotes neuro-behaviors and results in deeper and more fulfilling bonds with satisfaction of basic biological needs, especially feeding. The World Health Organization states that “the process of childbirth is not finished until the baby has safely transferred from placental to mammary nutrition.”

It is said that even a brief separation before the baby has had its first feeding from his or her mother’s breast can disturb the bonding process. Most newborns may be interested in breastfeeding within one hour after birth or even immediately, and will need to feed every three to four hours, even though the maternal milk production doesn’t really begin to flow until two to three days after birth. In the interim, the mother produces colostrum, a type of milk with high concentrations of nutrients and antibodies. Over the first few days, we poop what all mammalian infants poop, a greenish-black, tarry, sticky substance resembling thick extremely compressed motor oil, and which even has a name, meconium. It is composed of everything the fetus, now infant, ingested during the time spent in the uterus, such as intestinal skin cells, amniotic fluid, bile, and water.

Our first health-care evaluation is the Apgar evaluation, usually carried out one minute after birth and then again, five minutes later. They check our heart rate, breathing, muscle tone, reflexes and skin color, and score each of them from zero to ten to get a baseline. At the five minute mark, the same evaluation is taken. In more than 98 per cent of births, the Apgar score reaches seven out of ten. The other cases either need further medical care or at the least close monitoring.

Over the next 24 hours, the trials and tribulations of further “newborn screening” begin. We get washed, our weight and length is measured, and we are administered eye drops. Back in my day silver nitrate was used routinely, but burned a baby’s eyes while trying to prevent infection. Now erythromycin is commonly used. An antibiotic used for the treatment of a number of bacterial infections, including respiratory tract infections, skin infections, Chlamydia infections, pelvic inflammatory disease, and syphilis. In fact, sexually transmitted diseases are the main causes of newborn eye infections.

Rumour has it that as newborns we have poor vision with eyes that can’t focus or look far. The difference between boy’s and girl’s eyes, as in other mammals, is that typically male retinas are thicker, and have more magnocellular cells, which are distributed across the entire retina and are responsible for tracking the movement of an object, whether prey or the throwing of a rock. While the female retina is thinner and has more parvocellular cells, which are concentrated around the center of the retina, and responsible for identifying objects and analyzing texture and color. It is said that this is why females take more interest in people’s faces, while males are attracted to anything that moves. This also shows up in recent studies where males typically have much quicker auditory and visual reaction times than females. Could this be why men play video games and women snapchat?

As already mentioned, many of the behavioural distinctions between male and female come from our hormonal differences and how parts of our brains are used differently during development. One interesting, quirky difference is when we move around in our environments. Females use the cerebral cortex, the part responsible for thinking, perceiving and understanding language, and can get around by using landmarks, while men use the hippocampus, the area of the brain that is pre-wired for spatial navigation, and think in terms of how many blocks or kilometres and how far from here to there.

Our brain consists of about 73 per cent water, with dense sponges of white and grey matter, both of which are major components of the central nervous system. White matter forms the deepest parts of our brains, and is entwined throughout the spinal cord. It is composed of bundles which connect various gray matter areas (nerve cell bodies) to each other. White matter affects our learning, and coordinates communication between different brain regions. It’s like a large relay switch, modulating and connecting all the brain’s different signals of nerve impulses between neurons, then distributing them accordingly. Grey matter on the other hand, is found throughout the brain, brain stem, cerebellum, and spinal cord. It consists of cell bodies such as glial cells, the babysitters of neurons who protect and feed them oxygen, and the already mentioned synapses which permit a neuron to pass an electrical or chemical signal to another neuron, and finally, capillaries to supply the blood to the brain. Grey matter includes regions of the brain involved in muscle control, and sensory perception, such as seeing and hearing, memory, emotions, speech, decision making, and self-control.

Upon maturity our brains will weigh on average 1.3 kilograms and contain about one hundred billion neurons. And though only around two per cent of our total body weight, the brain uses 20 per cent of our oxygen and calories, thus like any other organ, the brain is affected by our lifestyle, diet, and the amount that we exercise. Putting aside the old wives tale about us only using ten per cent of our brains, modern science and medical imaging show the majority of the brain is almost always active. Our brains have evolved to use its entirety, in order to use the least amount of energy while correlating and processing the most information possible.

The sensory and motor regions of the brain mature first, followed by other cortical regions. The frontal and parietal cortices mature around the age of twelve years, the temporal lobes around sixteen years, and the superior temporal cortex being the last to mature. Female’s brains reach maturity usually a year earlier than those of males the same age. But it doesn’t end there, the brain’s maturation continues, where males tend to exhibit grey matter of increased volume but lower density than that of females. As it is, the latest research shows that the brain doesn’t fully mature until it is around twenty-six years old, if one is lucky.

Both males and females will also develop two emotional systems, based on the chemistry going on in our bodies: the mirror neuron system (MNS) and the temporal-parietal junction system (TPJ). The MNS is responsible for emotional empathy for others, while the TPJ guides cognitive empathy and the ability to distance oneself from another person’s emotions by focusing analytically on solving a problem. Both sexes start their empathy process in the MNS, but the male brain quickly switches over to the TPJ. These emotional differences will unfortunately play out later when a woman tells her man about a problem she has and is in need of emotional support and comforting. If he doesn’t see a solution to her problem, he doesn’t see the need to talk about it any longer. But then, we are supposed to be logical and not emotional, yet we are, because we’re often chosen as leaders of communities, societies, and countries, including our own families, while being too emotional is often deemed as a weakness. No matter our emotions, we are each born to have the balance needed for the survival of our species. But not all humans are well balanced, hence, survival of the fittest.

About 1.7 per cent of people born will have emotional systems which will make them either gay men or lesbian women. This has been occurring over the history of our species. I grew up having a gay uncle who was one of my most important mentors through to my teens, and who taught me much about being a man.

If one were to add bisexuality and transgender, which are both not biological but psychological, the current LBGTQ community in some Western countries is about 4.5 per cent of the population. As to the transgender movement, there are arguments being made today that it is an attempt to make it a civil right to have a mental illness, much like there is discussion lately that perhaps pedophilia should be listed as a sexual preference.

Our basic emotions are actually not a thing at all, and there are only four of them, arousal, pleasant, unpleasant, and calm. And since we are electromagnetic and electrical organisms, these basic emotions operate on their own separate frequency. Though unable to travel through solid objects, such frequencies are felt when we interact with one another. They are the vibes we get from one another from the sparkling giddiness of romance to the undertone of unease and danger, “love is in the air” and “cutting the air in the room like a knife”. The frequencies are also based on our five physical sensors: of taste, sight, hearing, touch, and smell, which along with the senses of balance, pain, hunger, thirst, and temperature contributes to our experience of our surroundings, and only shows us a three-dimensional universe. Our behaviour on the other hand will come from inherited traits, while our perceptions of things, comes from information received, experiences, and our consciousness. When such fields are in balance we are healthy, when they are not, we experience disease – physically, mentally, emotionally, and psychologically. Insidiously modern technology, particularly 5G (fifth generation cellular network technology), can manipulate these frequencies, scrambling them to induce feelings of arousal, conviviality, meanness, friendliness, anger, and even experience extreme pain, without our awareness. The previous four generations of cellular transmitters used between one to five gigahertz (GHz), 5G on the other hand operates from 24 to 90 GHz and uses millimetre waves, not cellular. These waves have a shorter range than microwaves so their antennas will have to be everywhere. A typical urban street will have to have them atop every fourth or so light pole. The 5G waves also cannot travel through solid objects, such as trees, so in many urban areas they will have to be the first to go. To date, cases of both people and insects alike getting sick due to nearby 5G towers is already on the rise. But they do have quicker internet.

Further to the differential qualities of men and women, brain scans, controlled studies, basic biology, chemistry, evolutionary psychology, and anthropology, all demonstrate that men and women are physically and mentally different. We absorb, process, and deliver information differently. And though we are all one consciousness but having different experiences, we also evolved with different priorities, and are immersed in different combinations of hormones. This leads to a varied interpretation and perception of reality, which is the root of the problems between male and female, within our families, and in the lives of our children. To remedy it, all one has to do is embrace the differences empathically, where equality only exists in compromising. Accept the reality that often and in many ways, men and women have pre-determined biological and psychological roles. Our differences are not always mutually exclusive, but we must face the fact that in some evolutionary way we complement each other so very much, and must not allow such a symbiotic nature of man and woman to be destroyed.

Back to the poking and prodding of male and female babies, it is currently possible to collect two types of stem cells during childbirth: amniotic stem cells and umbilical cord blood stem cells. Amniotic stem cells can be taken when we are still in the womb, from the amniotic fluid which surrounds us, and can be obtained through routine prenatal testing without the need for abortion or fetal biopsy. Umbilical cord blood stem cells on the other hand, are collected from the blood of the placenta and the attached umbilical cord, but are also found in various maternal tissues and organs including blood, bone marrow, skin and liver.

The use of fetal cells has been highly controversial because firstly, on many levels it’s an ethical issue. The tissue is known to often be obtained from the fetus following induced abortion. And because the supposedly “best” stem cells are from a fetus’s or newborn’s spine, not from their blood, they are very valuable, thus are often misused for anti-aging purposes or private medical matters by those who can afford it. And though both embryonic and adult derived stem cells from ethical sources, are being studied as possible treatments of a number of conditions including hematopoietic and genetic disorders, in many countries it is still deemed unethical. Canada, the UK and Japan derive stem cells from bone marrow, while the US and their prominently evangelical led Food and Drug Agency (FDA) are against stem cell use and consider it an illegal drug, but certain states do allow adult stem cell use. And though several applications to begin human trials of embryonic stem cell-based therapies have been approved, there are many steps required for such approval. Yet in Panama, stem cell therapy has been done for 16 years and has had excellent results. But if embryonic stem cell harvesting continues it could still be many years before therapies based on embryonic stem cells are widely available.

In adults, stem cells are found throughout the body. They are the handy repairmen, running around fixing anything that needs it and each having the potential to develop into many different types of cells in the body. They are especially attracted to inflammation which they immediately attempt to lessen. They also modulate the immune system, and stimulate regeneration, thus most stem cell therapy today is used to battle auto-immune diseases, and inflammation of joints. Adult stem cells have also been found to be able to replace neurons damaged by spinal cord injury, stroke, Alzheimer’s, Parkinson’s disease or other neurological problems, possibly produce insulin in the treatment of diabetes. Imagine having the ability to replace or restore any tissue or organ in the human body.

As to how useful stem cells may be in the future, consider that by 65 years of age we’ve lost approximately 90 per cent of our adult stem cells. But is eternal life possible or desirable? Some say it is, especially those who can afford the “best” stem cell therapy available. Then consider that in January 2019, 97 year old Prince Philip, the husband of Queen Elizabeth II of England, and who had just had recent hip surgery, supposedly pulled out from a driveway in his Land Rover Freelander and was t-boned by a small KIA car. The collision was enough to send his vehicle rolling across the road, or as a bystander described, it “somersaulted across the road”. In the KIA, a woman broke her arm and the driver had cuts to her knees, while thankfully the ten-month old baby in the back seat was alright. Prince Philip’s vehicle ended up lying on its driver’s side, where a passerby, after first checking on the occupants of the KIA, pulled Prince Philip out of his vehicle, totally unscathed. He blew negative on the breathalyser and said the sun was in his eyes. Checked over and sent home. On a similar note, one of the many who have travelled to places such as Panama where stem cell therapy is allowed was a 92 year old who needed a wheelchair to get around, had problems with his prostrate, lungs, kidneys, hips, heart, had trouble talking, and orthopedic problems. He was injected with ethically obtained adult stem cells and over the next few months and following years he was soon walking, his ailments healing, pain dissipated, his speech and eyesight improved, and his cognition improved. He’s now 99 years old, and supposedly even has his libido back. In both cases they both may have looked a thousand years old, wrinkled and nearly dead, but inside they undoubtedly were not. Similarly, just watch Mick Jagger prowling about upon a stage wailing his heart out, singing songs he has been singing for over fifty years, and how is it, no disrespect, that Keith Richards is still alive.

Back to us wee ones in the neo-natal nursery, another procedure and another reason to cry, is because we are often given an injection of vitamin K. This started when forceps deliveries were common, to help prevent bleeding in the brain due to the extra trauma to the baby’s head from using basically pliers to pull us out. But, despite the fact that forceps deliveries have changed, and occur less frequently, vitamin K is still given to prevent bleeding problems. Some countries have newer policies of when to provide vitamin K as opposed to doing it routinely.

The onslaught continues, while I can’t imagine what was done in previous centuries and eons to keep us alive, especially when in the past the infant mortality rate was atrocious. Ever onward, a small blood sample is taken by poking us in the bottom of the foot to screen for some serious, but often very rare metabolic diseases, including Phenylketonuria (PKU) a genetic disorder. What exactly is being tested for varies by state or province. We are pricked within the first twenty-four hours and then often need to return in a week for an addition test.

Then there is the universal immunization against Hepatitis B, even if our mothers test negative for it. Hepatitis B is a viral infection that can lead to chronic liver infections, as well as such things as cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma. Some ask why babies are given vaccines for Hepatitis-B, when it is picked up through unprotected sex and needle use. Then by the time they are teens they no longer have protection when they do become sexually active. Upon birth a baby is given 250 macro-grams of the neuro-toxin aluminum. The highest daily adult dosage is 50 macro-grams. This vaccine is mandatory where available and is given either at birth or at the two month check up. In California, a child who is vaccinated for Hepatitis-B can go to school, but a child that does not cannot.

It is strongly advised that children get vaccinated starting at two months of age and that the recommended schedule be followed. The pharmaceutical companies that come up with these vaccines promise they protect children against diseases that can cause serious illness, long-term disability and death. All together from birth to six years old we receive fourteen vaccination shots. Playing the field so to speak, just in case and you never know, Chickenpox, Diphtheria, Haemophilus influenzae type b, Hepatitis B, Influenza, Measles, Meningococcal, Mumps, Pertussis (whooping cough), Pneumococcal, Polio, Rotavirus, Rubella and Tetanus. Today the big Pharma lobbyists are pushing their respective governments to call for mass medication “prevention” programs, and claim they will improve the health of citizens, while also pushing for heavy medication upon children and teens, while their brains are still developing. As of 2018, vaccine manufacturers, specifically Merck, share in the over $85 billion of the “outsourced healthcare logistics market”. This is expected to increase to $105 billion by 2021. Merck is also interestingly enough, a major backer of the transgender movement.

Not all vaccinations are bad, but they do disrupt and/or degrade our immune system. Though eating a healthy balanced diet builds a healthy immune system, few are able to accomplish this today. And in our toxic world one needs a fortified immune system. As it is, people with allergies, infections, cancers, asthma, suicide, anxiety, depression and autism are all on the rise, with vaccine auto-immunity causing chronic health problems. In a recent report of which 3,345 cases were studied, 715 were not vaccinated; there was only one case of autism. Another report showed that people who were on a vaccine-friendly plan (choosing certain vaccinations) only one out of 440 patients was autistic. Yet the American Center for Disease Control, states there is one case of autism for every 45 people not vaccinated. In the 1980s medical students were not even taught about autism. Personally, growing up I do not recall ever meeting or seeing an autistic person. In the 1990s it started to become an issue, mostly because vaccinated children are sicker than non-vaccinated children.

And finally most of us are given a hearing test using wee little headphones or microphones, to see how we react to sounds. But before being released out into the world, some of us boys were taken aside, and for either cultural, religious, or social reasons, had our foreskins cut off.

The practice of circumcision is thought to be at least fifteen thousand years old. Today circumcision is probably the most common surgical procedure on children worldwide, yet it is not a medically necessary procedure. It’s most common in the US, parts of Africa and the Middle East, while less common in Europe and other countries. The most common reasons for removing the foreskin off the head of penises are religious traditions and trends. The religious laws of both Judaism and Islam require that boys be circumcised. Jewish boys get to go through the experience when they are eight years old, for Muslim boys between seven and nine. Other reasons to circumcise include, the myth that it will reduce the likelihood of developing herpes or syphilis or other medical conditions or infections, the desire of some fathers to have their sons look like them, personal choice, and aesthetic preference. And in Canada, at least in BC, such a procedure is not free either. As for the later I know a fellow who had to have a circumcision for a medical issue, when he was twenty-seven. He said he cursed his parents every morning when he would awake with a morning need to go pee hard-on, which kept tearing the stitches. I’ve heard and read other stories where having a foreskin adds to the sexual experience for the man, yet not having one is more attractive to females.

The procedure is most often performed from twenty-four to seventy-two hours after birth. We boys are splayed out on our backs, with arms and legs secured, like being readied for dismemberment or beheading, by the English in the 13th century. An anesthetic is given via injection or cream, to numb the penis, the foreskin is opened, adhesions are removed, and the foreskin is separated from the glans (the bulb). After that, a circumcision device may be placed over the bulb and the foreskin is cut off. There are three different types of such devices commonly used and all look like devices invented and used during the European inquisitions around the same 13th and 14th centuries to torture people. They include the “Gomco clamp”, the “Plastibell device”, and the ever popular, “Mogen clamp”. Each device works by cutting off circulation to the foreskin to prevent bleeding when the doctor cuts the foreskin. The entire procedure takes about fifteen to thirty minutes. Afterwards, bewildered by the pain and trauma, our mothers are told to expect us to be “fussy” over the seven to ten days it takes to heal.

For females there is no reason whatsoever for any circumcision to be performed, though today in the Western world the cutting has been replaced with piercings, tattoos and such. Unless of course you happen to live east to west from Somalia to Senegal, and north to south from Egypt to Tanzania, in Africa, which covers twenty-seven countries, as well as Indonesia, Iraqi Kurdistan and Yemen, and many immigrant communities in North America, Europe and the Commonwealth, where female genital mutilation is prevalent and customary. Recent estimates show that about two hundred million women have undergone the procedures. Girls are most commonly cut shortly after birth to age fifteen, with most cut when they turn five.

The procedures are generally performed by a traditional circumciser or “cutter”, in the girls’ homes with or without anaesthesia. The cutter is usually in no way a medical professional, but often an older woman, town barber or butcher, or cleric who uses non-sterile devices, including knives, razors, scissors, glass, sharpened rocks and fingernails, which they often use multiple times without cleaning between jobs. While procedures differ according to the country or ethnic group, they include removal of the clitoral hood and clitoral glans; removal of the inner labia; removal of the inner and outer labia, and the closure of the vulva. In this last procedure, known as infibulation, a small hole is left for the passage of urine and menstrual fluid. Later the vagina is opened for intercourse and opened further if needed for childbirth.

Back once again to our births, and perhaps wanting to forget what was just read by slowly uncurling our toes and exhaling, twenty-four to forty-eight hours after a vaginal birth, with no complications from mother or baby, we get to go home. For a caesarean birth, if no complications, it’s a forty-eight to seventy-two hours wait until discharge. According to our biology, anatomy, and chromosomes we will be designated either a boy or a girl, and later according to psychological and chemical differences, a very few will be boys who feel like girls and girls who feel like boys. Only later will society dictate one’s gender according to a set of expectations, standards, and characteristics about how men and women are supposed to act.

I was born at Royal Columbian Hospital in New Westminster, and weighed in at seven pounds six ounces, to a twenty year old 11th generation Scottish American/Canadian mother and a twenty-two year old 2nd generation Belgian-Canadian father. Their lineages were simple hard working folk, farmers, ranchers, and pioneers. And often were restrained and respected leaders in their communities.

My father drove my mother, with me in her arms, home safely in his 52’ Chevy with no seat belts or due dated baby car seat, listening to either Conway Twitter or Elvis on the radio. My given name was Joseph, but for the next couple of decades would be Joey, then mature into just Joe. My parents would quickly have to learn how to hold me and support my neck with, I’m sure, mostly my Mom having to change all my diapers, bathe, dress, and swaddle, soothe, and goo-goo gaa-gaa to me. Then there is the feeding, and burping, which for some weeks, is at least every two to three hours, including over night, with graveyard shifts. The cleaning around our belly buttons after being unplugged, and for many males, caring for our healing circumcisions. Our temperatures are taken, and turkey basters filled with water are used to clear our nasal passages when needed. We survived diaper rash and having our faces washed. We cried and we laughed and began to learn things because every moment was new. It was in many ways perhaps the best and worst days of our lives. But thankfully, we’re unable to remember.

Chapter Two – Half Way There


The Innards and Machinations of Agenda 21

Part Two of Inside Agenda 21 and 30

A 35 page Dense Essay

“If you don’t have a plan, you become part of somebody else’s plan.” Terence McKenna

Much like when the old snake oil merchant used to ride into town. Agenda 21’s goals and targets were deemed critically important for both, the great improvement in our personal lives and for the world being transformed into a better place. And all to be accomplished by 2030 or it’s all over, all bets off the table. So they bark from atop their loudly lit wagon instilling fear into our hearts.

It is a conspiracy, not a theory, but fact. Agenda 21 is an inventory and control plan of all things; food, land, water, energy, minerals, plants, animals, construction, all means of production, information, and all people. It is a plan for the destruction of representative government, and for unelected regional boards to take its place. It is mostly driven because the current and past lifestyle consumption patterns of a once large affluent middle class (the baby boomers) are no longer sustainable. Consumption patterns that the globalists created, but now deemed a problem. A classic “problem reaction solution”, where a problem is purposely created, and when the public react and scream for something to be done, the solution becomes the perceived or otherwise problem. So because of our meat intake, consumption of frozen processed convenient food, use of fossil fuels, use of motor vehicles, air-conditioning, a huge inventory of small electrical appliances and suburban housing, but a few examples, the globalists will make it sustainable not by getting rid of such things, but by controlling such things. There are many ways they are going to go about this; one of the ways is to move everyone into surveillance managed and controlled cities and regional centers. But first, and because absolute power is being able to control what people think about what happens, the Agenda’s first tenet is all about people. The agenda is “determined to end poverty and hunger, in all their forms and dimensions, and to ensure that all human beings can fulfill their potential in dignity and equality and in a healthy environment”. As to how to go about this, to be determined by a select few.

The Agenda’s second tenet concerns the planet Earth, where they “are determined to protect the planet from degradation, including through sustainable consumption and production, sustainably managing its natural resources and taking urgent action on climate change, so that it can support the needs of the present and future generations”.

Moving on to prosperity, they “are determined to ensure that all human beings can enjoy prosperous and fulfilling lives and that economic, social and technological progress occurs in harmony with nature”. Tenet four is all about peace, “to ensure that all human beings can enjoy prosperous and fulfilling lives and that economic, social and technological progress occurs in harmony with nature”.

The final tenet lies with partnership, to ensure that the purpose of the new Agenda is realized. “To mobilize the means required to implement this Agenda through a revitalized Global Partnership for Sustainable Development, based on a spirit of strengthened global solidarity, focused in particular on the needs of the poorest and most vulnerable and with the participation of all countries, all stakeholders and all people”.

The drivers of these tenets are four main sections of the Agenda. (My comments within the parenthesis).

-Social and Economic Dimensions, meaning “combating poverty (combating the poor), especially in developing countries, changing (controlling) consumption patterns, promoting health (numbing pain), achieving a more sustainable (smaller) population, and sustainable settlement in decision making” (they will decide for us).

-Conservation and Management of Resources for Development, which covers “atmospheric protection (through geo-engineering projects), combating deforestation, protecting fragile environments (by forcefully removing people from them), conservation of biological diversity (control private property), control of pollution (only in Western nations) and the management of biotechnology, and radioactive wastes”.

-Strengthening the Role of Major Groups, (through diversity) including the roles of children and youth, women, NGOs, local authorities, business and industry, and workers; and strengthening the role of indigenous peoples, their communities, and farmers (by subsidizing them all).

-Means of Implementation, “science, technology transfer (control patents), education, international institutions and financial mechanisms”, which will all be covered below.

Much of the Agenda is being implemented at the local level. In 1990, the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI) or Local Governments for Sustainability was formed. It is an international organization that helps to implement Agenda 21 concepts across the world. Building a global network of cities, towns and regions committed to building a sustainable future.

Today, the ICLEI network includes more than 1,750 local and regional governments in more than 100 countries. The only requirements for ICLEI membership are a self-defined commitment to climate protection and the payment of annual membership dues based on population size. They also give out millions of dollars in grants, but you must first cede any decision making to them. Hundreds if not thousands of city and town councils abide by their directions.

While European countries, especially the Scandinavian countries have generally been the most obedient and accepting of Agenda 21, the US has nearly half of the ICLEI’s global membership of 1,200 cities, (528 cities/75 per cent of their cities), all promoting sustainable development at a local level. Australia is second with over 90 of its municipalities adopting the Agenda’s plan. The ICLEI representatives/handlers in these communities assist local governments to push for change along five interconnected “pathways” that cut across sectors and jurisdictional boundaries, and which enable “local and regional governments to think and design solutions in a holistic and integrated way, creating change across entire urban systems”. The pathways they push include, “low emission, nature-based, circular, resilient, and equitable and people-centered developments”.

While Agenda 21 has infiltrated at the local level, the 2030 Agenda is more a global plan. As mentioned earlier, the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development was adopted by 193 UN member states in September 2015. The remaining three of the world’s 196 countries, Kosovo, the Vatican and the State of Palestine, are not a part of the UN so were not allowed to vote. So basically it was all in, and here we go. Notably, looking around the world over the past four years, since its inception , I can’t be the only one who thinks somebody has cranked up the crazy meter. Especially after the shock created when just over a year after 2030 Agenda was signed, instead of the expected Hillary, President Trump was elected.

The globalists plan for transforming the world relies on 17 points. With the word “sustainability” to be repeated to death so that we can all believe. And not wanting to take up too much of your time, I’ll give an overview of each point, with examples, and hopefully you get the drift. It may perhaps answer some of the, often befuddling decisions being made in our towns, communities, cities and regions.

1. “End poverty everywhere.”

By way of welfare, food stamps, housing subsidies, universal basic income (UBI), Planned Parenthood, abortion, and other handouts. In fact, the overall poverty rate is actually dropping globally, mostly because of free-market capitalism, not socialism. Socialism is where everyone except the elite make $30,000 per year. Capitalism, and not corporatism, is where some can make $50,000 and some can make millions, if they worked hard enough for it. And the rest live on welfare, unemployment insurance, disability, or the soon to be universal basic income.

While capitalism at it’s base is where natural resources, energy and human labour go in one end and commodities and waste comes out the other, it is the opposite of how nature and ecosystems work. When resources are depleted the game is over. The planet is indifferent to our existence for it doesn’t need us to survive. But capitalism, not fascist corporatism-globalism, is still our best bet. It has been estimated that at the end of the 18th century, when industrialization began to rise and eventually bring forth labour laws that modernized and humanized the workplace and eradicated most child-killing diseases, about 90 per cent of the planet’s population at the time (800 million people) lived in poverty. The average life expectancy was 30 years. Today less than 10 per cent of the global population of 7.7 billion live in poverty, with the average life expectancy 70 years.

While the problem with socialism, especially Bolshevism, is it does not take into account human nature, nor the fact we are not equal. It operates by taxing the wealthy and making everyone poor, except of course for the elite at the top, who control all industry and commerce. Instead everyone is treated the same, no matter who you think you are. At the same time, being an individual has been programmed into us so much because it has paradoxically been used to only divide us. Eventually, if your not paid for being an individual, being one will be looked down upon.

In reality under present corrupt economic and government policy, more and more people are falling deeper into debt and extreme poverty. Because the present economy in most developed nations, only works for 30 per cent of the population, with tens of millions of people already mathematically eliminated. Statistical fraud by the government on poverty, cost of living and unemployment, cannot cover up the fact that the overwhelming majority of the population is on a fast track to impoverishment.

In the US there are only enough full-time jobs for 50 per cent of the working-age population, and half of the full-time jobs pay under $35,000 per year. “In current conditions, it is nearly impossible for perhaps 70 per cent of the working-age population are hard-pressed to earn enough income to afford the basic necessities without taking on ever-increasing levels of debt. And in many cases unable to ever pay back because there are not enough jobs that generate the necessary income to keep up with the cost of living”. Ergo, hamsters on a wheel in a cage.

The US government’s inane policies and actions in dealing with the growing epidemic of poverty couldn’t be more blatant. Cut billions of dollars from assistance programs and pour billions of dollars into the military, subsidizing corporations, and the prison industry. To also control the impoverished by militarizing the police. The private prison industry in the US is currently growing at an insane 1600 per cent rate. This is not a typo. Even though technology can now make it so we can be imprisoned, and monitored just as much, in our own homes. As it is, the US has the largest prison population in the world. Especially since in many inner-cities, poverty has become criminalized, with an assembly line of incarceration now in place. From birth, by a lack of family values, and indoctrinated through the public school system. Besides, the globalists feel that there’s no point in educating the poor because there is nothing for them to do. All told, in the US, 42 percent of children born to poor families will still be in poverty as adults, a higher percent than in any other advanced nation.

There is enough wealth in the world today to eliminate poverty. That there is poverty makes no economic sense whatsoever. It costs society more to have poverty than it costs to eliminate it. That is the insanity of the current system. Political candidates and parties spend billions of dollars to be elected to represent the poor. At the same time, the planet doesn’t have the resources for every human on it’s surface to become “middle class”.

Universal basic income conveniently, is where everyone, regardless of their earnings or employment, receive regular checks from their government instead of receiving any benefits. To be eligible, one must have citizenship, and vetted, as for one’s availability for the labour market and/or the willingness to perform community services. Those for it believe it will offset and counter the jobs lost due to automation and computerization by taxing private business. And will “free humanity from the burden of working hard”. Such a scheme could also replace the complex arrangement of government benefits, rebates and tax rebates. And supposedly everyone will have at least enough to eat, have available fresh water, able to clothe themselves, and able to rent a roof over their heads.

Currently, only about 9 per cent of jobs are at risk of disappearing because of automation, with unskilled workers the most vulnerable. Some estimates suggest 50 per cent of jobs will be automated in 10 years. A very recent study (Sept.2019) showed that most who are for UBI are 18 to 29 years old. The study also shows that 75 per cent in the US, 53 per cent in the UK and only 49 per cent in Canada would be willing to pay any extra taxes to fund such a project. The majority in the study, in all three of these countries, agreed that companies who switch to automation should have to pay more in taxes to do so. Which they gladly will pay of course, because of the money saved by going automated, while the government will add the incoming money to their coffers, perhaps even using it to subsidize fossil fuel companies, while people will still lose their jobs.

Many believe that UBI will reduce the incentive to work, or for one to live up to their potential. It would no doubt be inflationary, and that by attempting to move people out of poverty might simply raise the poverty line. It is a scheme, which will make the majority of the population permanent wards of the state. There is also concern that by reducing taxable income for the many will reduce a government’s ability to cover other expenses, like health care or a universal basic income. There is also worry that it will cause perpetual economic stagnation, higher interest rates, currency depreciation, and onerous tax hikes. And though some countries are already trying the idea, in April 2018, and only two years after Finland implemented such an experiment, they have decided to shut it down. Mostly because it became a question of where’s the money going to come from.

Yes, for some, being able to rent a roof over their head and able to lock the front door, have enough to eat, have medical insurance, afford internet access fees, hydro, and the opportunity to attend the occasional gatherings of friends and family would relieve much stress. And having the freedom to spend eight or more hours a day doing something you have a passion for and would like to share with others, would be wonderful. But which also means having a work ethic, and the dedication and discipline to do such a thing. And yes, with the option of still working in a job you really enjoy or climbing some corporate ladder, one can fill one’s boots, and make all the money you think you’ll need. Won’t necessarily bring happiness, but makes it easier to pretend you are, and at least will keep you busy.

In reality, things will stay much the same. The gifted, creative and driven will continue walking their roads, while the majority will take what is given, and spend more time online, and in front of an ever enlarging TV screen, and soon will be staring at the wall. Any money left over wasted buying a better phone, then spending the better part of the day staring at it. Indulging in as many distractions as one can. Filling up each moment of one’s day. Perhaps gaining ever more weight, needing more health care, and giving more money than they did before to the wealthiest people on the planet by buying their stuff and once again racking up debt. All to be told what to watch, what game to play, what to wear, what story to follow, what to eat and drink, and how to act and think.

There will still be serious mental and physical health issues, fewer people educated, addictions running rampant and increasing distractions. The problem with such a concept as UBI is the same problem with Gross Domestic Product (GDP), (the sum of the market values, or prices, of all final goods and services produced in an economy during a period of time). Work is not just a means of subsistence, it is a moral psychological necessity for individual and community well being. But universal basic income is not just another type of socialism either; instead it’s just another type of control to keep the status quo docile and tamed. Just like the soon to be, negative interest rate, and making physical currency illegal. It’s all created to benefit some and harm many others, but most importantly, to control the herd.

2.“End hunger by achieving food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture.”

Meaning, giving the poor, food that will bring them heart disease and cancer, thus simply getting rid of the hungry. Promote Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO), a laboratory process where genes from the DNA of one species are extracted and artificially forced into the genes of an unrelated plant or animal. The foreign genes may come from bacteria, viruses, insects, animals or even humans. Most engineering genetic pollination and cross species genetic experiments, are all carried out with no idea of long term consequences. But many tests where rats are fed strictly GMO food, by the 3rd generation they are all sterile, as will all who follow. The globalists are giddy about such an outcome.

The World Economic Forum, based in Cologny-Geneva, Switzerland, is an NGO, founded in 1971, with a membership of 1,000 multinationals corporations. Through a partnership between the Earth Bio-Genome Project and the Earth Bank of Codes are collaborating to sequence the DNA of all life on earth. It was estimated to take ten years and cost $4.7 billion.

In June 2018, one of the world’s most morally corrupt corporations, the chemical and medicinal suppliers, Bayer AG, purchased the other most morally corrupt corporation in the world, the agrichemical giant, Monsanto, for $66 billion, thereby controlling over one quarter of the global medicinal and agriculture industry, and are ever increasing the usage of ever more deadly herbicides and genetically modified food. A recent report (2019) found that roughly of all produce sold in the US has pesticide residue on it, even after it is washed. Especially most fruit, whether nectarines, apples, grapes, peaches, cherries and pears. The Center for Disease Control (CDC) figures at least 90 per cent of North Americans have detectable pesticide levels in their urine and blood.

Another scathing new report from Food & Water Watch, outlines the madness of Monsanto. Their seeds are genetically engineered to withstand the massive, growing amounts of herbicides and pesticides, and artificial growth hormones, created and used by themselves. Such genetically modified seeds are grown on over 282 million acres worldwide, including 40 per cent of US farmland. In the US alone Monsanto earns over $11 billion in net sales, while spending over $60 million over the past two years lobbying the US government. The report found that indeed, as we’ve known for decades now, “Monsanto has become synonymous with the corporatization and industrialization of our food supply.”

Automation and technological centralization will undoubtedly take over the food industry, while tillage (plowing) of land, will probably soon be not allowed, and portrayed as an “unsustainable” practise by humans. With sadness is the fact that we will then have destroyed future generation’s ability to grow and harvest food, as well as collecting seeds for future harvests, by erasing such knowledge from our social memory. As we have already done by removing our knowledge and ability to hunt and forage to provide the necessities needed to survive.

Just over one hundred years ago about 80 per cent of the people on the planet were still living rural, in counties, towns, and on farms. The rest lived in the big-cities. Farming was hard work, some risk, and for most it became a passion. Truly providing for family and community. The smell of hay, dirt and manure, and killing animals which were raised, to eat them and use their hides.

Today, recent calculations show that there is about 1.9 hectares of arable land per person to supply the food and resources and absorb that human’s waste over a year. In reality, the average human on the planet uses about 2.3 hectares worth. Comparatively, the average American needs about 9.7 hectares for their resources and waste, the average African, less than half a hectare. Canada, with more land to grow food than every other country in the world, except one (Russia), has to import more than 80 per cent of all the fruit, vegetables, and nuts, she consumes. In the 1970’s the province of British Columbia, grew 75 per cent of it’s own food, today (2019) and because of globalism, it barely grows 5 per cent.

Actual food has become nothing but a commodity and is not distributed on the basis of need but in accordance with market demand. In other words, the paying consumer rather than the hungry human is the target of corporate food production. And though humanity produces more food than at any other time in history; we waste 40 per cent of it. And in most cases the reason for it is because of our expectations and demand for high-quality food that must be pleasing to the eye. Similar to how humans interact with each other, North American supermarket chains reject over 30 per cent of all fruits and vegetables because they aren’t attractive enough.

Canadians alone waste over $31 billion dollars worth of food every year, 47 per cent of which gets wasted at home. At the same time over 13 per cent of Canadians (4 million people) do not have reliable access to adequate amounts of safe, good-quality, nutritious food. Along with extreme inequality and distribution, one of the main reasons being they are poor, and because the food that is good for you, as with all things good for us, is not cheap.

Meanwhile, and yet another paradox, nearly 800 million people in the world are starving. That’s about one in nine people on Earth. The vast majority of the world’s hungry people live in developing countries, where 12.9 per cent of the population is undernourished, yet at the same time there are over one billion people in the world who are obese, and over 1.6 billion people who are overweight.

Globally, only 10 companies control almost every large food and beverage brand. And speaks volumes on our consumption habits and health. They include;

Nestlé ($87 billion annual revenue), and among many other items, owns Gerber baby food, Perrier, DiGiorno, Hot Pockets, and candy brands including Butterfinger and KitKat. And seem to have a global monopoly on bottled water.

PepsiCo ($63 billion) which in addition to Pepsi and other sodas, also owns brands such as Quaker Oatmeal, Cheetos, and Tropicana.

Unilever ($59 billion) has a diverse list of brands including Axe body spray, Lipton tea, Magnum ice cream, and Hellmann’s mayonnaise.

Coca-Cola ($44 billion) is moving beyond soda, with beverage brands including Dasani, Fuze, and Honest Tea. And are also trying to gain a monopoly on bottled water.

Mars ($33 billion) is best known for its chocolate brands, such as M&M, but it also owns Uncle Ben’s rice, Starburst, and Orbit gum.

Mondelez ($30 billion), this snack-centric company’s brands include Oreo, Trident gum, and Sour Patch Kids.

Danone ($25 billion) is best known for yogurts like Activa, Yocrunch, and Oikos. They also sell medical nutrition products and bottled water.

General Mills ($17 billion) produce cereals like Cheerios and Chex, but also owns brands like Yoplait, Hamburger Helper, Haagen-Dazs, and Betty Crocker.

Associated British Foods ($16 billion). This British company owns brands such as Dorset Cereals and Twinings tea, as well as the retailer Primark.

And Kellogg’s ($13.5 billion) which owns Froot Loops, Frosted Flakes, and non cereal brands including Eggo, Pringles, and Cheez-It.

And while millions of small farmers are still producing the majority of the planets’ food, the transnational companies who favour global food chains rather than local, and their chemical-intensive industrial farming practices, are gaining ever more ground. To affirm, between 2003 and 2013, 33 per cent (4 million) of private farms in the European Union disappeared. Gobbled up by corporations. Today only three per cent of the chemical-intensive industrial farms control over 50 per cent of the European Union’s agricultural land. The same thing is happening in America where bankrupt farms are not purchased by other farmers but by corporations. Farmers all over the globe are having their livelihoods taken away from them, and are sadly taking their own lives. American farmers now have the highest suicide rate of any other profession in the US (84.5 per 100,000), more than four times the rate of the general population. And even though not one new food staple has been developed from a wild plant since prehistoric times, today biotech and agribusiness corporations, such as Monsanto, have taken out patents on crop seeds, genetically modified or not, and even some animals, which they claim to have “invented”.

The world’s largest crop today is not as in the past, a cereal, it is sugarcane – surprise. Corn is the second largest food crop, with rice number three. But rice is the most important grain, as it provides over one-fifth of the calories consumed by humans worldwide. As to calories, today about four billion people live on a plant-based diet, while about two billion live on a meat-based diet.

Though not a grain, but a legume, soybean is another important crop to humanity but is unfortunately being grown where rain forests once stood, with over 80 per cent of its production being used to feed livestock. But by far the world’s biggest feed-grain is corn. Yes, it and bubble gum being two of the few things able to pass through a digestive system unscathed.

The US is the leading producer and exporter of corn, accounting for four-fifths of the total world grain harvest. They use 56 per cent of their available water to grow such crops. Globally the US corn crop exceeds China’s rice and wheat harvests combined, with twice as much corn grown than rice. Thirty-seven per cent of all corn production is used for creating ethanol, with bio-fuel production having grown 300,000 per cent (again, not a typo) in the last ten years, converting ever more land from farming food to production of fuel. Approximately one bushel (approx. 30 L) of corn produces 10.5 liters of ethanol, nearly 8 kg of waste (which is used for livestock feed) and 8.1 kg of carbon dioxide. With over 10 per cent of corn production going to syrup, sweeteners, starch, beverage alcohol and cereals, while the rest continues to be used as simple filler for manufactured foods and for feeding livestock.

The predominate insecticide (neonicotinoids) used on many corn and soy crops, affects bees and other insects’ central nervous system, and is considered one of the main causes for the loss of more than 30 per cent of bees across North America. China and the Europe are also experiencing bee colonies dying off, as well as further loss from mites, viruses, climate conditions and habitat loss. What is now called colony collapse disorder might be the start to imminent extinction for the honey bee, which plays an important role in pollination. Its extinction alone would be disastrous for the food chain.

Today, animal pastureland which corrals and processes the world’s 20 billion chickens, 1.6 billion cows and bulls, and one billion pigs and sheep, now accounts for over 40 per cent of the planet’s usable surface. The bulk of which, is in China, US, India and Australia. Not counting the trillions of fish, crustaceans and molluscs harvested or caught, the total biomass of the world’s livestock is nearly twice that of humanity. Weighing twice as much as we do, taking twenty times as much land and crops, and using hundreds of times more water to grow.

To grow a half a kilogram of edible animal products on say one acre of land, you could instead grow twelve to twenty times the amount in kilograms of edible vegetables, fruit, and grain. Today, nearly 2,000 cattle, chickens, pigs and sheep are slaughtered every second for food, about 500 billion a year, and worth about $1 trillion a year. With humanity eating 25 per cent more meat than five years ago, it is estimated that the demand for meat will double over the next fifteen to twenty years, and that by 2050, as our population rises along with land costs, real meat will be a luxury item. While fake meat will not be, and “soylent green” not so far-fetched. Soon meat will be taxed as much as cigarettes, gas, and sugar.

The Environmental Working Group (EWG) recently analyzed data which the National Antimicrobial Resistant Monitoring System (2015) received after testing 47,000 pieces of meat sold in supermarkets, including beef, chicken, pork and turkey. And though the tests were conducted in the US, much of the same meat is sold throughout the world. Where animals enclosed within corporate factory farms, live in such stressful, crowded and unsanitary conditions they must be fed huge quantities of antibiotics to survive, and grow more quickly. The data shows antibiotic resistant bacteria in 79 per cent of turkey samples, 71 per cent of pork chops, 62 per cent of beef and 36 per cent of chicken parts. Suffice to say, children, pregnant women, older adults or the immune compromised, beware.

Today there has been extensive research on synthetic agriculture, where molecules replace dirt, animals, land, and hard work. But before something like this can go forward, certain fundamentals should be met, Such as affordability, nutrition, and taste. When this criterion is met we’ll all buy into it in the name of “sustainability”.

3. “Ensure healthy lives and promote the well being of all people at all ages” (pharmaceutically).

An industry that is not about curing anything, but instead, is all about making money to mitigate the pain and trying to stave off death. Globalism has created a health care system that has become simply disease treatment, operating with a lack of resources for the mentally ill, and a manufactured ignorance about addiction because people aren’t willing to go through the “hell and back” stage it takes to recover. Throw in rising costs of living, the lowering of our morals, the destruction of the family, modern homelessness, and our consumption habits.

In the seventies, the globalists got many liberal and democratic governments to start shutting down facilities for the mentally ill, because they thought it would save them money. Instead the costs to deal with the increasing homeless and mentally-ill population, including the bulk of time and services spent by the police, medical personal, the court system and the health ministries, are over ten-fold over when they were living in places to keep them safe. Locking them all up on some remote island would be as much or far more costly. But as time went on, modern homelessness became where we stopped seeing people and instead started to only see problems. The causes are many, but are most all symptoms of a much deeper crisis. The society we live in and the continuing process of dehumanizing much of the population. The globalist’s have also instilled mass victimization, obedience, and hinder any upward mobility based on merit alone. And when we stray we are locked up in prisons, or driven broke defending our innocence.

Tens of millions of people in the developed world who have been suffering mentally, could have perhaps been cured by now if it were not for the doctor and pharmaceutical salesmen induced prescription epidemic of drugs such as methylphenidates, a dopamine re-uptake inhibitor drug, which include the brand names, Ritalin, Concerta, Daytrana, Metadate and Methylin. Along with, anti-psychotic tranquilizing drugs, from Thorazine, Haldol, Prolixin, Clozapine, Abilify, Clozapine, Fanapt, Geodon, Invega, Risperdal, Saphris, Seroquel and Zyprexa. The most popular by far, are the anti-depressants, Prozac, Paxil, Zoloft, Celexa, and Lexapro. All simply distracting the pain instead of dealing with it. Whether depression or addiction from lack of spiritual care, trauma, or chemical imbalances, far too many people today are facing illness and grief by finding comfort and meaning through pills. Sadly the medicated are also less inclined to do something new, like to change and become a better person.

In the US, over 95 million people take prescription painkillers for chronic pain. But then for over fifty years now, “many people, usually middle-aged and elderly women, were prescribed opioid medications for the often most trivial conditions, personality inadequacies and social influences”. And then when sufficiently addicted, health insurance runs out and people have to get their supply elsewhere to feed the addiction. Getting big-Pharma to monopolize the opioid industry, and control the Afghan opium fields using the US military for nearly twenty years now, was brilliant. Especially now, when after people’s prescriptions runs out on their “pain relief”, they go the cheap route, heroin from the Afghan poppy fields.

The current cost for their prescription drug created opioid epidemic is more than $78 billion a year. The majority of this money is going to the makers of the prescription painkillers, by not fixing an injury, instead making it so we just don’t feel it, because we’re high. Other countries are also experiencing rising costs and deaths attributed to the opioid epidemic. But then, alcohol and tobacco are together, more than four times as costly to economies as the combined costs of opioids and cannabis. Americans are now dying more by overdoses than car accidents and guns. The highest drug-related death rates in the world today are in the US, Canada, and Mexico. In reality most people aren’t necessarily addicted to alcohol, porn, gambling or opioids and other drugs; they are addicted to escaping reality. And is why the supposedly War on Drugs, is actually a War on People.

Two recent studies showed that in Canada, and the US, over 60 per cent of the populations couldn’t cover a $500 emergency repair bill. Nor afford a single pill of a life-saving drug, such as for hepatitis, anti-infection, or the new multiple-sclerosis (MS) pill ($300,000 for a years prescription).

AARP (formerly the American Association of Retired Persons), a US-based non-profit interest group with more than 38 million members as of 2018, and whose stated mission is “to empower people to choose how they live as they age”, recently completed a study of 115 specialty drugs and found that the average cost of a year’s worth of prescriptions was over $50,000, three times more than the average Social Security benefit. Although it’s true that most people don’t pay the full retail cost of medicine, the portion paid by insurance companies is ultimately passed on to consumers through higher premiums. The companies claim they need the high prices to pay for better medicines. But for every $1 they spend on basic research, they invest $19 in promotion and marketing. They also pay competitors to keep generic drugs out of the market, and have successfully lobbied Congress to keep Medicare from bargaining for lower drug prices.

Another proponent of the Agenda is to call for mass medication “prevention” programs, and claim they will improve the health of citizens. To mandate over 100 vaccines to be administered to all babies, children and adults, with those not abiding will be taken somewhere and given the shot there, or physically restrained in their own home. And to push heavy medication upon children and teens while their brains are still developing. It is also strongly advised that children get vaccinated starting at two months of age and that the recommended schedule be strictly followed. The pharmaceutical companies that come up with these vaccines promise they protect children against diseases that can cause serious illness, long-term disability and death. As of today, from birth to six years old we receive fourteen vaccination shots.

As of 2018, vaccine manufacturers, specifically Merck, shared in the over $85 billion of the “outsourced healthcare logistics market”. This is expected to grow to $105 billion by 2021. U.P.S. will dispatch nurses, and their security, to vaccinate adults in their homes. Each vaccine will target a viral illness of some kind. Coincidentally Merck supposedly already has vaccines for shingles, Hepatitis-B and the flu. And just like any other business plan they want to increase access to its medicines and vaccines, by boosting adult vaccination rates. Meanwhile in 2018, the US government paid $100 million for vaccine injuries and death. Since 1989 they have paid out in excess of $4 billion.

Not all vaccinations are bad, but they do disrupt and/or degrade our immune system. Though eating healthy balanced food builds a healthy immune system, few accomplish this today. And in our toxic world one needs an immune system. As it is people with allergies, infections, cancers, asthma attacks, suicide, anxiousness, depression and autism are all on the rise, with vaccine auto-immunity, causing chronic health problems. Why are babies given vaccines for Hepatitis-B, when it is picked up through unprotected sex and needle use? Then by the time they are teens they no longer have protection when they do become sexually active. For this, upon birth a baby is given 250 macro-grams of the neuro-toxin aluminum. The highest daily adult dosage is 50 macro-grams. In many places, children who are not vaccinated for Hepatitis-B are not being allowed to even attend school.

In a recent report where 3,345 cases were looked at, 715 of which were not vaccinated; there was only one case of autism. Another report showed that people who were on a vaccine-friendly plan (choosing certain vaccinations), out of every 440 patients, one was autistic. But the gospel according to The Center of Disease Control, which everyone obediently abides by, states there is one case of autism every 45 people not vaccinated. Yet in the 1980’s, medical students were not even taught about autism. Personally, growing up in a big city I never saw it. In the 1990’s it starting becoming an issue. Mostly because vaccinated kids are sicker than non-vaccinated kids. Meanwhile, polio has been eradicated, babies don’t need to be vaccinated to prevent Hep-B, and as far as the measles, mumps, and rubella go, they are.

Besides germs, the leading health risks of our species today are high blood pressure, chronic illness and pain, alcohol, smoking, injuries, mental health conditions, and bone and joint disease. Mostly because seriously, we haven’t had to run around each day hunting and gathering for quite some time. We are mostly dying from the things that come into contact with our skin, lungs, and whatever we put into our mouths and brains. With most of us dying from heart disease, cancer, especially to the lungs and large intestine, respiratory diseases, dementia, unintended accidents caused by not being aware and in the moment, stroke, diabetes, flu and pneumonia, kidney disease and suicide, which sums up our species perfectly.

As to life and death, the latest estimates figure the planet’s human population will be about 9.5 billion by the year 2050, and perhaps 11 billion by 2100. Studies also suggest that while Africa’s population will grow, Asia’s population will peak in about 2050 at about 5 billion and then decline, while North America, Europe and Latin America’s population will stay below one billion each. Almost 45 per cent of the growth will be concentrated in countries that are the least able to feed themselves – Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. Currently two-thirds of the most malnourished people on Earth live in seven countries, and that over the next few generations there is going to be about one billion people born in these seven countries.

Today (Oct.2019) the world’s population is 7.7 billion people. This number is currently rising by over 130 million per year, about 10 million, per month. On the other hand nearly 60 million die every year. Over 48 per cent of them people over 70 years of age. And that 69 per cent of all deaths are from either our environment or what we ingest. Things like heart attacks and disease, cancers, respiratory and lower respiratory diseases, dementia, and digestive diseases. All the stuff corporations and our own consumption habits, have thrown at us. While the fears they instill in us, like drugs, alcohol, hepatitis, conflicts, terrorism, and natural disasters, are all less than one per cent of all deaths.

Any war certainly helps in more deaths and injury, which the US and the UK have gleefully provided. Ethnic cleansing also helps, and of course such events, as socialism in the 20th century, where Stalin’s Russia, Mao’s China and the killing fields of Cambodia, killed around 100 million people. Or Rwanda in 1994. Rwanda is the biggest Catholic country in Africa, and the world. Some of their priests, nuns and bishops, by radio, TV and sermons, incited violence which killed in just 100 days, about 800,000 people. Slaughtered by ethnic Hutu extremists, who were targeting members of the minority Tutsi community, as well as their political opponents, irrespective of their ethnic origin. Neighbours killed neighbours and some husbands even killed their Tutsi wives, saying they would be killed if they refused. At the time, ID cards had people’s ethnic group on them, so militias simply set up roadblocks where Tutsis were slaughtered, often with the weapons of choice, machetes. Thousands of Tutsi women were taken away and kept as sex slaves.

Also in Africa, and although the continent is home to about 15.2 per cent of the world’s population, more than two-thirds of the total infected worldwide with HIV/AIDS (35 million people as of 2017), were Africans, of whom 15 million have already died. The problem with Africa is that the best prevention is of course safer sexual behaviour, and emphasizes the need for fidelity, fewer sexual partners, and a later age of sexual debut. All of which goes against many aspects of many African cultures. And of course since many of the African cultures are predominately Catholic, condoms are deemed evil. Which certainly doesn’t help, and deeply disturbing.

Then there is tobacco, which globally is the cause of one in five deaths annually. Over 7 million deaths a year. On average, smokers die 10 years earlier than nonsmokers. In Canada, 17 to 18 per cent of all deaths are attributed to cigarettes. And yet, obviously putting any ethics aside, the Canadian government through it’s Canada Pension Plan (CPP), and through work and private pension funds and RRSP’s (registered retirement savings plans), over $1 billion is directly invested in big tobacco companies, including 35 per cent of vaping company Juul, and $118 million in Japan Tobacco.

4. “Ensure inclusive, equitable and quality education, and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all”

And yes of course there is indeed untold numbers of incredible teachers out there, but the typical unfocused mediocre underfunded but union driven public education system, is about producing obedient workers rather than independent thinkers. By way of the development of a dumbed-down education system operating under international “Common Core” educational standards. Such a system was established by the globalists in the early 1950’s and is set up to meet the needs of the average student despite any individual differences with their classmates, within an instructional construct. It’s curriculum, where students are expected to excel at everything in the same way and rate as their classmates. It is standardized against the average through test scores, which is odd because there is no average. And while the very few are still able to skip grades, everyone now graduates, deservedly or not. As a system that made every effort to produce equal outcomes for different categories of people, it has failed miserably. So today, the progressives and their globalists handlers are only left with plain coercion to force equal outcomes at all costs. This can be seen throughout society.

The money that could fund a better public education system is used elsewhere, to more important matters such as arms manufacturing or subsidizing their monopoly on oil. Challenging and disciplined academic education on the other hand is being left to private education, and those who can afford it. Because only through individualized curriculum can the greatest number of students will be able to learn anything. Yet colleges and universities, have made billions, sending millions into sometimes life long debt, with a degree that doesn’t mean anything in the real world, though at the least gives the person a sense of identity. With many of the same schools trying to eradicate objectivity and free from bias, individualism, a belief in meritocracy, a political system in which economic goods and/or political power are vested in individual people on the basis of talent, effort, and achievement, rather than wealth or social class, and finally having a protestant work ethic. All these values are now deemed the root cause of bigotry, and represent what is now called “white privilege”. Indeed, the core curriculum of most education systems today, whether in public or private, grade school, college or university, is politically influenced at the least, but mostly by blatant political propaganda. The only course that may still be an exception is mathematics.

Current education systems are partly based on the globalist’s belief in Malthusianism. Related to the idea that population growth is potentially exponential while the growth of the food supply is linear, and that the planet’s greatest enemy is human creativity. So allowing humanity from developing their minds, critically thinking, and experimental learning, in order to make more discoveries and inventions which could offset the current, and future world’s crises’, must not be allowed. Malthusians believe that science should only be used to understand and guide the welfare of mankind. And is why by 1971, instead of funding the curiosity and discovery in atomic, medical and space sciences, the globalists began funding practical engineering projects, such as the humanities, monetary economics and social sciences.

In the public education system, science, technology, engineering, and math (STEM) are disappearing. Mostly because these are hard things to do, they take work, discipline and focus. Many public school systems have become social clubs, where it’s all about participating and having fun, with as little stress as possible. For the vast majority, dancing, cooking, drama, school band, and sports have nothing to offer if one wants to apply for post-secondary programs, they are hobbies. Instead, teacher and former school board member Geoff Johnson, suggests maybe teaching science, civics, and history, which, after us baby boomers die off, will have already been completely rewritten anyways, with real history not to be spoken or else people might realize that they’d rather not repeat it. And to teach only an overview of math, especially algebra, which is all about thinking about numbers abstractly. Perhaps even courses on debating or public speaking, or economics, especially the dangers of illusory economics, and money management in a cashless society, debt and credit cards, what interest means, because it’s obvious many parents aren’t teaching such things anymore.

And yes a very few will have the dedication, work ethic and sacrifice what is required to be a world class athlete, artist, dancer, cook, lawyer or doctor, but the character of that person is already there or not. It doesn’t mean they are good people either, because success has never produced or developed character, it only expresses it. And that worthwhile achievement is its own reward.

The latest thing to drop out of the sky from those above, is the soon to arrive, Universal Child Day Care. They will then be able to start programming children before they even make it to kindergarten. Instead of just 13 years of kindergarten/elementary/high-school, they’ll now have one to two year old children for the next fifteen to sixteen years of their lives. Then when they are grown up and sufficiently indoctrinated in only one narrative, they will be no threat to the collective world order. The plan of course is to get people to chain themselves, by making them just smart enough to pay taxes, make them think voting actually means something, keep their head down, opinion to themselves, and that silence is golden. This is why the restructuring of the family unit has been going on for the past fifty years. Going after the family unit is the bedrock of the globalist’s plan, because family is the bedrock of civil life. For tens of thousands of years, it has been the smallest form of government. It is where children are taught how to become adults, and knowing both a mother’s love and a father’s, are taught about responsibility, respect, honesty, empathy for others, having a work ethic, love and forgiveness, and pride of one’s country or tribe. Thus family must be destroyed.

5.“Achieve gender equality”

By further dividing us as human beings. Criminalize Christianity, marginalize heterosexuals, and promote the very small minority of people, who are of the LBGTQ (lesbian, bisexual, gay, transgender and queer) communities.

The erosion of protestant Christianity, not the Roman Catholic Church version, is happening because everything is now corrupt. Whether the globalists or governments, its all about power and nothing to do with ethics anymore. For ethics does not exist in nature, it was mostly taught to us humans through such things as Christianity. So it must be gone. Writer Brandon Smith, says so well, “The difference between Christianity and capitalist corporatism, is the latter only uses the symbolic and avoids the meaning. This allows culture to define morality, instead of scripture. They have taken the symbols of Christianity, especially family values, and removed its substance.”

Meanwhile about 1.7 per cent of people born will have emotional systems which will make them either gay men or lesbian women. This has been occurring over the history of our species. If one were to add bisexuality and transgender, which are both not biological but psychological, the current LBGTQ community in some Western countries is about 4.5 per cent of the population. Besides LBGTQ’s there are also now over seventy other genders, with each having its own unique pronoun. Such singular gender neutral third person pronouns must now be used when someone’s gender is unknown or when the person is neither male nor female. So instead of he/him/his or she/her/hers, and even if the person may look like a woman or a man, the politically correct pronouns to use now are, they/them/theirs, and to further confuse, zie/hir/ey/em or eir, among many others. In some countries, including Canada, calling someone the improper pronoun is considered hate speech.

To further achieve gender equality the goal is to shame anyone who expresses any male characteristics, especially if they are white. Because only male energy has the strength to rise up against tyranny and oppression and fight for human rights. This must be curtailed. The suppression of male energy is instrumental in keeping the herd docile. Then slowly feminize society, create widespread acceptance of gentle disobedience, share everything, and weaken any ideas of communal property. Many progressives look down on women who dress sexually, but will clap and cheer when trans-men wear the same thing.

While the well used adage, “a woman born into a man’s body or a man born into a woman’s body” is false, for human sexuality is binary. Gender identity on the other hand are thoughts and feelings of our emotional system that do not match with one’s assigned sex, which are not hard-wired within us, they are developed.

Both males and females develop two emotional systems, based on the chemistry going on in our bodies: the mirror neuron system (MNS) and the temporal-parietal junction system (TPJ). The MNS is responsible for emotional empathy for others, while the TPJ guides cognitive empathy and the ability to distance oneself from another person’s emotions by focusing analytically on solving a problem. Both sexes start their empathy process in the MNS, but the male brain often quickly switches over to the TPJ.

Sex is a question of biologically determined male and female, while gender is socially determined masculinity and femininity. There are three categories of biological human sex: male, female, and intersex. The vast majority of humans are born with male or female reproductive systems, secondary sexual characteristics, and chromosomal structure, and there is a very small segment born with reproductive or sexual anatomy that doesn’t fit the definitions of female or male anomalies of sex chromosomes, gonads, and/or anatomic sex. Gender meanwhile is the state of being either masculine or feminine, and is typically used with reference to social and cultural differences rather than biological ones. Gender is fluid and based upon personal desire and sometimes surgery. Such determination of gender by the very few, now allows public financing for surgeries that destroys healthy tissue; and the use of potentially dangerous hormone/drug therapies, especially for children, while many a child’s gender is now determined by their parent, whether or not that child has a penis or a vagina.

Sadly, evidence suggests many of those who are having a hard time trying to figure out their gender, whether male or female, masculine or feminine, are also suffering from depression, with the suicide rate amongst themselves four times higher than the general population. All of which only further divides us as human beings.

As to the transgender movement, there are arguments being made today that it is an attempt to make it a civil right to have a mental illness, much like there is discussion lately that perhaps pedophilia should be listed as a sexual preference. And that perhaps it is acclimatizing the general public into familiarity for when we are interacting in our daily lives with AI machines. Who knows?

Yet, and also in reality, in most industrialized countries, rules, rights and laws are, and have been in place, where equality between the sexes should be no longer an issue. Everyone has the equal rights to make decisions on how they want to live their lives. Women rule over nations, and yield much influence and power working in government, and some become very successful in private business. As of 2019, the president, chairman and CEO of the largest arms manufacturers in the world, Lockheed Martin and General Dynamics, are women. Another one of the biggest, Northrop Grumman’s president/chairman is a women. The head of the CIA is a woman. As to the infamous “pay gap” between men and women. Bits of the data was selected and used, omitting, in nearly all cases, it was based on the fact that on average men work 42 hours per week, women on average work 32 hours per week. And on average men work riskier jobs, where the pay is higher, even for the women who also work such jobs.

Further to the differential qualities of men and women, brain scans, controlled studies, basic biology, chemistry, evolutionary psychology, and anthropology, all demonstrate that men and women are physically and mentally different. We absorb, process, and deliver information differently. And though we are all one consciousness but having different experiences, we also evolved with different priorities, and are immersed in different combinations of hormones. This leads to a varied interpretation and perception of reality, which is the root of the problems between male and female, within our families, and in the lives of our children. To remedy it, all one has to do is embrace the differences empathically, where equality only exists in compromising. Accept the reality that often and in many ways, men and women have pre-determined biological and psychological roles. Our differences are not always mutually exclusive, but we must face the fact that in some evolutionary way we complement each other so very much, and must not allow such a symbiotic nature of man and woman to be destroyed.

6. “Ensure availability and sustainability management of water and sanitation for all.”

Through privatization, allow a few corporations to become the “Water Division”. Free to seize and control the world’s water supplies and charge monopoly prices to build a new water delivery infrastructure that “ensures availability and sustainability”. Even if it means war with other countries to achieve. The monolithic corporation Nestle Foods, owns over 8,000 brands of water around the world. Such a new water delivery system has turned out to be the more than one million plastic water bottles humanity drinks each and every minute of each and every day. With less than 15 per cent of them actually recycled.

As it stands today, 70 per cent of the Earth’s surface is water, of this, only two per cent is fresh groundwater, 99 per cent of which is not available fresh drinking water, but instead water that is stored in lakes, rivers, swamps, glaciers and ice sheets. The Antarctic ice sheet itself holds about 60 per cent of the Earth’s fresh water supply.

The minimum amount of water a human needs to survive in a moderate climate with average activity level is about five liters per day. The minimum amount of water needed for drinking, cooking, bathing and sanitation combined, is about 50 liters per day, per person, and as a general rule, each person should have safe drinking water available less than fifteen minutes away. But in many parts of the world these minimums are still not being reached, and in fact are declining, with the supply of these basic needs being the most affected by the planet’s changing climate and pollution.

The United Nations Environment Program, reports that 450 million people in 29 countries currently suffer from water shortages, and by 2025 an estimated 2.8 billion people (20 per cent of world’s population) will be living in areas that will have increasingly scarce water supplies. After 2050 it is predicted that perhaps 40 per cent of the world’s population will be living in areas of severe water shortage. Other estimates suggest that anywhere from 768 million to 3.5 billion people currently have no access to fresh water due to diminishing groundwater supplies, 2.5 billion live without decent sanitation, and over 4 billion are without wastewater disposal. At the same time over 20 per cent of the world’s aquifers are already over-exploited, further degrading the wetlands which purify water supplies.

Americans and Canadians use 250 to 350 liters of water per day per person for drinking, cooking, showering, washing, cleaning, flushing toilets and watering lawns. In the Netherlands, they use just over 100 liters per day, while in Gambia, in Africa, they use only 4.5 liters per day. Overall, half the 7.6 billion people on the planet use about 94 liters of water per day for all their needs. And while about 85 per cent of the fresh water that is available on the planet is used by only 12 per cent of the population of the world, more than 12 million people die each year from lack of water.

In June 2018, in Cape Town, South Africa (nearly half a million people), water rationing was set at 50 liters per person per day. The minimum amount a person needs per day. An average shower (8 minutes) uses about 65 liters of water, in Cape Town people are down to 90 second showers, with many skipping days in between. A typical load of laundry uses 150 L, while a dishwasher uses 22 L. It is also now illegal to water the gardens, wash the car and to top up one’s pool. But they are adapting, by designing such things as systems which takes a home’s “gray water”, the water from a shower or dishwater, and using it to flush their toilets. At the same time, in California, it is now against the law to shower and do laundry on the same day.

Other ways to control water consumption include voice activated wireless faucets, which will dispense whatever metered amount of water you tell it to. It will also be able to listen in to whatever is being said in that room. And voice activated “intelligent” toilets, which are hooked up to Amazon’s Alexa. This allows one to sit on the toilet and ask for the sports scores, weather update, news, traffic reports or perhaps a song. With Alexa listening in, one can personalize their defecating or urinating. Alexa will know the difference in other users voices, so whether spouse, child or friend they too can personalize the experience. The potential is there for a private company or program, to monitor how often the toilet is used and even what gets flushed.

Global fresh water is dwindling quickly, not so much from drinking, cleaning and cooking, but from growing food and industry. We whine about what a liter of gasoline costs, yet will pay a bit more for the same amount of water, about three cents worth, in a plastic bottle. As for our drinking water, multiple studies are finding that over 90 per cent of it, from sampled bottled water worldwide, are full of plastic particles and chemicals, including heavy metals, phthalates, pesticides, PCB’s, and other chemicals. Also included are the innumerable amounts of microfibers which wash off our mostly polyester clothes. A recent study took tap water samples across five continents and found synthetic microfibers in every sample – 94 per cent in the US. Many of which are linked in both animal and human studies to cause cancer, premature puberty, reduced immunity, birth defects, endocrine disruption, insulin resistance, and other major diseases.

Adapting to present and future water needs will mean designing rainwater catchment and grey water systems, desalination technologies and if able, increased use of well water, but only if groundwater table is not already polluted.

Then there is our waste. Of all the landfills in the world, the majority are made up of industrial waste, including wood, while the rest of the garbage is mostly household and personal consumption trash. Billions of kilograms of disposable diapers, cell phones, sandwich bags, pens, plastic packaging, Bic lighters, TVs, fridges and stoves, clothing, shoes, electronic parts, razor blades, pill bottles, rubber tires, etc, etc, etc. Nearly a third of the landfills in the developed world are of packaging material. With every $100 we spend, about $10 goes for packaging, which then gets trashed. And though many of the manufacturers try to emphasize the importance of recycling what they use, with many in the West believing they are making a difference in the world by sorting their jars, paper and plastic, less than 2 per cent is actually recycled of the total waste stream.

Worldwide, 1.2 kg of urban waste is produced per person per day. Producing the least waste are places like Ghana, .09 kg, and Uruguay, .11 kg (about three ounces). Though Canada’s urban waste rate is about 1.8 kg per person per day, overall it produces more garbage per capita than nearly every other country on the planet, except for Australia and the US.

The US stands alone at the top of the trash pile. With only 5 per cent of the humans on the planet, they somehow gobble up more than 25 per cent of the planet’s resources, and produce over 40 per cent of the planet’s waste. Which itself spews more than an estimated 3.3 trillion kg of carbon dioxide emissions into the atmosphere every year. Over half of the 220 million tons of waste produced in the US each year ends up in one of over 4,000 landfills spread across the land, or barged to Asia, with over 10 million tons of the waste plastic. Of this, it is estimated that perhaps 5 per cent might get recycled. Americans also use over 2.5 million plastic bottles every hour of every day. And of the 400 million or so tons of hazardous waste produced each year globally, the US alone accounts for 250 million tons of it.

Further degradation of the atmosphere, oceans, waterways, ground water and soil comes from other modern waste, such as antibiotic, genetic engineering, military, nuclear, and nano-waste. We could also add in the pollutants of fake news and junk info that deny reality.

And because we can’t fit all our junk on this one planet, there are nearly a million pieces of debris orbiting the earth from the last 50 years of space exploration, satellite launching and manning the space station. About 35,000 of these pieces are larger than 10 cm.

7. “Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all.”

Ensuring such access, seems at odds with, as previously mentioned, the globalist environmental groups currently running campaigns to disrupt the flow of natural gas to certain countries, forcing these same countries to build more coal-fired plants, which emit twice as much carbon dioxide as natural gas plants. The globalists are also penalizing coal, natural gas, and oil companies through the cash grab called a Carbon Tax, and then they subsidize them to continue what they are doing. Just like they subsidize and push “green energy” companies, who are many times inept, and often go bankrupt in five years. Energy consumption quotas will be set on each living being and we will be punished and criminalized for “lifestyle decisions” Smart meters that notice when someone exceeds energy usage limits set by government. Total surveillance of individuals, in order to track and calculate energy consumption.

As to the globalist’s “Green New Deal”, it’s mostly all about our energy consumption. About 20 per cent of the global population, who happen to live in a developed, high-income country, consumes 86 per cent of the world’s goods. This doesn’t look good for the remaining 80 per cent of humanity; especially when such consumption was driven by corrupt corporations, who are now saying they’ll save us, and all we’ll have to do is give up our personal sovereignty. Such consumption is leaving a trail of waste, deforestation, energy disruptions, compromised fresh water sources, ocean acidification, and all sorts of other pollution. We should all realize such a threat, because the globalists do, and believe the remedy is to get rid of the source, we the people. And the waste and pollution we leave behind.

But some realities are not mentioned in the Green New Deal, such as none of the new renewable energy sources can easily be relied upon to produce enough energy in winter, especially in northern latitudes.

Hydroelectric is great, but is usually a spring dominated resource, and that most all the suitable locations around the globe are already jam-packed with dams, and heavily developed. And while winds tend to be variable year to year and month to month, wind energy is great in the winter months, but it is also dependent on the continuation of the present economy, to offset the high costs of the high-tech moving parts and technological maintenance to keep the blades turning. And the fact that the larger turbines need at least a 9 to 11 km per hour wind to get them moving. When winds reach 85 km per hour they must be shut down, because there is a limit to blade pitch adjustment, to safely deliver power to the grid.

Twenty-first century be damned. About three billion people still cook and heat their homes using wood-burning household fires and inefficient stoves. The typical cooking fire produces about 400 cigarettes’ worth of smoke an hour, and prolonged exposure is associated with respiratory infections, eye damage, heart and lung disease, and lung cancer. And besides, if the current global population had to do the same, whether burning wood or other parts of the biomass, the planet would soon enough be bald.

Solar panel installations meanwhile, don’t keep the lights on during a power outage or on a cloudy day, because if they don’t have battery backup, their supply of power goes to the grid, not directly to houses. Battery backup is an issue for all these renewable energies. A very costly enterprise, batteries are expensive, and tend to be used only for short time periods, on average, a three day storage level. While broken or discarded panels become toxic electronic waste. And along with damaged wind turbine blades, batteries and other pieces, much of it is unable to even be recycled; with any recycling so costly it will have to be subsidized.

To compensate for limited wind and solar power, especially over the winter months, and the still needed development in battery technology, there will still need to be underground storage for natural gas and connecting pipelines for use in the winter months, then not used for much of the year. With specialized maintenance and expertise in natural gas work expensive.

The thing is that whether, solar panels, wind turbines, batteries, and modern hydroelectric dams, all would not be possible without fossil fuels. Just like agriculture is also very dependent on fossil fuels. Currently over 80 per cent of global energy production comes from fossil fuels, seven per cent comes from (maxed out) hydroelectric power, two per cent from wind power, and one per cent from solar power. The Green New Deal’s credo is to ramp up wind and solar power from its current three per cent production level to over 90 per cent by the year 2030, and not use fossil fuels anymore.

Then there are facts. Since 1985, electricity’s share from all renewable energy sources, of total energy consumption, rises 0.37 per cent per year. Of the total energy consumption today, 43.4 per cent is electrical, from all sources. So continuing on with such a growth rate, it will take 153 years until the world economy can operate completely, using only electricity.

Today, around 25 per cent of world marketed energy consumption comes from renewable sources (biomass, geothermal, hydropower, solar, and wind). It was estimated that by 2050, about 50 per cent of the world’s energy will come from solar and wind. In the US today, only 10 per cent of energy comes from renewable sources (mostly hydroelectric energy). Projections suggested that this will increase to 17 per cent by 2040.

The plan is to eliminate electricity for extended periods of time to further “keep us in the dark”, and like in California recently, “to quell forest fires”. Because of the fear of a spark erupting from under-maintained infrastructure and power-lines, the excuse. Black outs and grey outs will become the norm. And to further control electricity with smart meters and the use as surveillance devices. Having no choice in not having one. Appliances will talk to the meter, we will be instructed to wash at night, it will know how many people are at home, and what devices we use and when. If using more power than a neighbour, they will want to know why and notify you. Individual rights, personal and private will be compromised. Then there are the health concerns from wireless, as smart meters pulse out their information every 15 minutes. Easily hacked, it will know when you are home or not. Refuse hooking up one will be criminalized.

People who are experts on such things suggest that if the power went out in most Western countries, and never turned back on, after thirty days half the population would be dead. Within a year 80 to 90 per cent would be dead. All infrastructure, from sewers, bridges, roads, buildings, welfare, health care, social programs to even our own physical and mental health would quickly crumble. A critical issue that we take for granted, three days without fresh water we die. But the number one killer will be water-borne diseases, then either freezing or starving to death, dying from an accident, stupidity and ignorance, or because one is fat and/or out of shape. The trick would be to somehow at least preserve the purpose of law, not justice per se but a mechanism to solve disputes. Such ways can be highly imperfect, but it’s better than the alternative.

8. Promote sustained, inclusive, sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all.

Regulate small business out of existence with government mandated minimum wages that will bankrupt huge sections of the economy. Currently, the jobs on the decline include mostly private industries in manufacturing, construction and natural resources. Jobs on the rise are within mostly ever expanding government controlled bureaucracies, such as education, health and social assistance. And though Canada, and the US, have the lowest unemployment rates in 40 years, the majority of job growth is in part-time employment, in many cases jobs where no experience is necessary. Which is a sore point for the concept of a guaranteed minimum wage, where small business’ especially, will have to pay a set minimum wage to someone no matter if that person brings anything of value or not, such as experience, showing up on time, having a good attitude, and willing to learn. And is why places like McDonald’s are switching to electronic “kiosks” instead of actual people. At the same time, relying on working at McDonald’s for “a living wage” is of course not the way to go if one wanted to raise a family.

The globalists are also forcing employers to meet hiring quotas of LGBTQ etc workers, just like the “affirmative action” plan for blacks. This where getting a job based on merit goes the way of the dodo bird. And of course, they are destroying free market economics by denying permits and licenses to companies who don’t comply. But support “chosen” private corporations with public funds for “sustainable development”.

They also got many believing that the wealthy and their corporations are job creators, so must not be taxed. They lie, the middle class and poor are the job-creators through their purchases of goods and services. If they don’t have enough purchasing power because they’re not paid enough, companies won’t create more jobs and economy won’t grow.

In 1965 a CEO of a company made twenty times more in income than a private-sector non-supervisory production worker. Today (2019) a CEO makes 300 per cent more. And in the same time frame most all the wealth created went right to the top. From 2007 to 2013, overall wealth increased over 26 per cent, while the average household lost 43 per cent of their wealth. In 2003 the inflation-adjusted net worth for the typical American household was nearly $88,000, just ten years later it was only $56,000. If this gap continues, it is estimated that over half of all US households will be bankrupt within the next decade. Since 2007/08 the US economy has lost 14 million jobs. During this time their population has grown by 17 million people.

Defining the world today very well, is the current global job market. The top employer on the planet is the US Department of Defence, with 3.2 million employees, 1.6 million of which are said to be active and reserve duty troops. Then China’s, People’s Liberation Army, with 2.3 million employed, all of whom are active duty troops. Next are Walmart, with 2.1 million employees and McDonalds, with 1.9 employees. Others in the top ten include the UK National Health Service, the China National Petroleum Corporation, the State Grid Corporation of China, India Railways, the Indian Armed Forces, and the Hon Han Precision Factory (Foxconn), all with more than 1.3 million employees each. Foxconn is the world’s largest contract electronics manufacturer and the fourth-largest information technology company by revenue. It is also the assembler of Apple’s I-Phone, one of the most addicting drugs in the world..

The US prison industrial complex is the country’s third largest employer. And because of over-regulation and the criminalization of debt, a market was created by the simple act of keeping a person locked up in a cell, often for minor offences that carry stiff penalties, which often can’t be paid, or unwarranted sentences, and in many cases zero tolerance. Often such prison’s employees are high-school educated men and women with no other options in the small town they reside in. With the actual prison often the biggest employer in the county. And that the majority of those doing time are black, because the majority of them have grown up without a father, so the local gang leader often stepped into that role.

As to the economy, the globalists, through their central banks, plan on funding their Agendas by using such concepts as Modern Monetary Theory (MMT). Neither modern nor a theory, MMT is the printing of money to create unlimited amounts of real wealth, with rates of exchanges between money and goods and services to be set by a central body, bypassing market demand. But there are limits to the amount of real resources that you can extract through seigniorage, the difference between the value of money and the cost to produce and distribute it.

The globalists believe that this means they can never go broke, ignoring the fates of the Roman Empire, Weimar Germany, Hungary, Yugoslavia, and more recently Zimbabwe and Venezuela, among others. Their downfalls were caused by hyperinflation. Also, as the former Soviet Union, Cuba, and North Korea proved, any inefficient use of resources leads only to economic impoverishment. Unable to feed their people and nearly impossible to gain any traction for development.

While Keynesian’s believe in increased government spending during recessionary times, but calls for government restraint in a rapidly growing economy. Which prevents the increase in demand that spurs inflation, and forces the government to cut deficits and save for the next down cycle in the economy. The globalists don’t worry about debt, they believe only government spending creates goods and services, and that taxation drains any excess liquidity and controls inflation. The International Money Fund and World Bank meanwhile pride themselves in their “austerity programs”, which have impoverished millions, and even bringing down developed nations. Such austerity measures hide behind the slogan “social equity”.

Under MMT there is also the jobs guarantee, where anybody who wants a job would be guaranteed to have one, at a living wage, by the government. MMT is the sovereign-friendly justification for deficit spending without end. It allows globalist controlled governments to bribe the populace to keep voting for them, and to fund one or another of their incessant wars from an inexhaustible supply of credit or funding.

Meanwhile the stock market is a blatantly riggedwealth extraction operation”. Other rigging operations include high frequency trading, dark pools, Quantitative Easing (QE) and the Zero Interest Rate Policy (ZIRP), which gives interest free money to a select handful of “primary dealers”, post hoc rationalization of political expediency, and power-expanding action.

The globalist’s Federal Reserve’s Quantitative Easing (QE) program, under the guise of stimulating job growth, recently used QE to create US$4 trillion out of thin air. Most of the $4 trillion created went to the richest .01 per cent of the population who already had $21 trillion in unused wealth. In reality, QE is a massive welfare program for the mega-wealthy. With that $4 trillion, the Federal Reserve could have instead given every non-millionaire US household $40,000, or they could have given around 114 million Americans $35,000 each. The remaining two hundred million people would be out of luck.

If QE went to the American people, poverty would undoubtedly be eliminated, with every person over the age of 18 be given a guaranteed living income. Instead, in many developed nations the majority of the populations are living in a neo-feudal society, where instead of the indentured servant we are now indebted wage slaves. The globalist’s centrally planned economic policy and government legislation are designed to keep the population economically insecure, subservient and enslaved in debt. Using their ownership of mainstream media companies to keep us ignorant and unaware.

All the while, liberal democracy, protectionism with free trade, and authoritarianism are starting to mean the same thing, while most other pressing issues of today are ignored by way of distraction. Much like the reality that many industrialized countries today are “hovering between status quo and authoritarianism, and are no longer distinguishable from their apparent enemies”.

Some even believe that the increase in the value of newly produced goods and services, and the ideology of capitalism, have created an environment that is responsible for improvements in a person’s well being. This is what has been instilled into our brains. But since the 1970’s, the pursuit of happiness has simply morphed into the “pursuit of affluence”.

Many factors create changes to one’s quality of life, including economic equality. And all is not equal. An economic system whether capitalism or communism, has nothing to do with the quality of our lives. Consider that the majority of lottery winners are broke within a few years. And further in debt than they were before they had won. But then with money, it depends on where you live, what money means to you, and how you were taught to manage it. Unfortunately, the harsh truth is that, one of the most important drivers of one’s living standards, opportunities, education and the ability to create wealth, are determined at birth, and to what family one is born into.

9. “Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation.”

Instead of building new infrastructure, we are mostly repairing old infrastructure that’s been neglected for fifty years. With most such infrastructure projects over budget to build, then an endless stream of cost over-runs to be paid for faulty construction, design and materials, break-downs, and ever ongoing maintenance. Previously mentioned, The globalists use the World Bank and the IMF to put countries into extreme debt, by spending money to hire corrupt corporations to build large scale infrastructure projects that ensnares developing countries into further debt.

Further to infrastructure, I have always found it odd that China has built more than 30,000 kilometers of high-speed rail over the last decade. That Japan’s bullet trains can reach nearly 320 kilometers per hour and date to the 1960s, and have moved more than 9 billion people without a single passenger casualty. And that France began service of their high-speed train in 1981 and the rest of Europe quickly followed. Yet in the US there is no true high-speed train service, aside from sections of Amtrak’s Acela line in the Northeast Corridor, where it reaches 240 kilometers per hour for only 55 kilometers of its 735 kilometer span. Its average speed between New York and Boston is about 104 kph. There is a high-speed rail system under construction in California, but whether it will ever get completed as intended is uncertain. The second largest country in the world, Canada, is the only G7 country that does not have high-speed rail.

As for fostering innovation (see education) the globalists will soon control all patents, and will punish the rich, entrepreneurs and innovators, and confiscate nearly all the gains of those who choose to work hard and excel, then redistribute to the masses of non-working and unemployed.

10. “Reduce inequality within and among countries.”

When I coached midget (15 to 17 years old) hockey, I saw the time when I was no longer allowed to give out an MVP award, or most dedicated player. Instead everyone had to get a medal, to protect their self esteem. No more patting players on the butt or touching them. In the dressing room there had to be two adults, never just one. The players confused because they were being told it’s not about winning anymore. And if it wasn’t, why do we still keep score and why bother with competition. Maybe that’s the globalist’s point.

The globalist’s ideal is “equality of outcome” over “equality of opportunity”. The latter is where we all begin life like we are all standing on a start line. Ahead of us is our lives and what we want to do with them. And how we want to live them. Then a starter’s pistol goes off. Some never make it to a standing position, some may lie down, and some may sit. The rest run forward, and some walk. Some get pushed aside, some are attacked, and some even die. Some tire out, get sick or break down. Some slowly walk forward constantly looking over their shoulder, some have stopped and turned around staring back from hence they came. Many fall, some get right back up. For many, their individual lives within their environment prevents them from getting ahead, some don’t care, and simply hold out their hand. And some strive, survive, keep their morals, empathy, and integrity intact, are disciplined, and work hard, and who are most often those who achieve what it is that strive to be. Their success is their reward, and should be rightfully earned, though sometimes it is not.

Equality of outcome on the other hand, is where we begin life standing on the same starting line, a bell gets rung and everything mentioned above happens to the same number of people. The race to achievement, worth and personal development is still on, whether the achievement means, fame, fortune, or self-awareness. The same articles of human conduct apply, but this time when everyone nears their end, everyone gets the same reward. No matter what they did to get there, deserved or not.

As for reducing inequality among countries, this means no borders, so that trade can move cheaply, and large groups of unskilled workers can be moved around to where needed. It would be open season for the growth of trafficking of all things, whether children or drugs.

And though it may be politically correct to say that “diversity is strength”, a recent study out of Denmark, meta-analyzed 1,001 estimates from 87 other studies and found that in actual fact, there is a “significant negative relationship between ethnic diversity and social trust.” Even when controlling for deprivation. Basically, it found, what has perhaps always been the case throughout human history, that mass immigration by those unwilling to assimilate into a new culture erodes community trust and harms society.

11.Make cities and their suburbs inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable.”

Criminalize living in most rural areas by instituting “protected areas” where no people will be allowed to go. Force all people into mega-cities where they can be kept under 24/7 surveillance, and easier to manipulate and control. Any growth outside such a region, not allowed. A private farmer would be unable to get goods to market because he couldn’t afford the costs, surcharges, regulation bureaucracy, and taxes to do so. The farmer’s energy will be well monitored and severely restricted, with the share of most all services, including school services and medical clinics eventually cut. Only option will be to move into high density development regions.

City centers will be populated by a vast government employed populace, whether banking, surveillance, intelligence or management. Any land outside such civic or regional centers will be owned by the government. Surrounding such centers will be the vast majority, living in crates piled on top of each other, compressed into towers, lining transportation routes into the city center. With most everyone massively government dependant. Streets lined with smart lampposts, each able to send its signals by wireless. Topped off with cameras, listening devices and censors for the collection of air quality, traffic, and weather data, and of course for monitoring, we the public. Our lives determined by algorithms, with a person’s bio-metrics, home, health, and habits, all monitored and regulated. Facial recognition programs track us based on what we buy, where we go, what we say, text, tweet, e-mail and what we do in public. It was estimated that currently, about half the population of both Canada and the US have their image “on file”. Then there’s the surveillance complex and their monolithic data collecting agencies. A hundreds of billions of dollars industry, where everyone in the populace here and abroad, are deemed suspect, and monitored, regulated, tracked and spied on. Such data agencies have compiled lists of those deemed threats to “national security”, so that in times of national emergency or under martial law, such individuals, whether they are or not, will be rounded up and incarcerated. Can’t imagine how many are on such lists today, but in 2008, there were already more than 8 million Americans on the lists.

Ban all gun ownership by private citizens. Only ones to have them obedient enforcers ruling over an unarmed, enslaved class of impoverished workers, with or without a universal basic income, consisting of a dumbed down, never questioning population, all following only one narrative. Making the cities safe by taking away the population’s freedom.

Get rid of cars and create walk-able cities in designated regions. Penalize car owners and eventually ban vehicle ownership. Any cars will be self-driven and strictly monopolized. Force everyone onto public transit where facial recognition cameras can monitor you better, and report the movement of any person in society. Put bike lanes in everywhere whether to be used or not, and paint crosswalks in rainbow colors. As for small electric cars, they are currently only available to those who can afford them. If everyone had one we’d see our electrical energy usage spike each night while everyone charged their car. Much like if we all installed yet another air conditioner. But if they ever were able to replace fossil fuel cars all together, then there would no longer be a gas tax, which pays to take care of roads and its infrastructure. As it is, cars will soon have smart odometers, and we will be taxed by mileage, to achieve “sustainability”.

12. “Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns.”

Levy punitive taxes on consumption of fossil fuels and electricity, causing standards of living to drop to Third world levels. Control the narrative, running campaigns on TV, movies and social media to shame people who use gasoline, water or electricity, creating a social construct of ninnies, social justice warriors and tattlers, people who rat out their neighbours in exchange for food credit rewards, a pat on the back, and even a hug that they no doubt never got.

Globally, as already mentioned, about 20 per cent of humanity who happen to live in a developed, high-income country consumes 86 per cent of the world’s goods. At the same time, over 30 per cent of the world’s population who live in South Asia and sub-Saharan Africa consume only 3.2 per cent of the world’s total. The poorest countries in the world account for only 1.3 per cent of all spending. The richest 20 per cent of the world consume 45 per cent of all meat and fish of the planet’s supply, the bottom 20 per cent consume 5 per cent. The top 20 per cent, also use up over 58 per cent of the total energy produced, the poorest use less than 4 per cent. They consume more than 84 per cent of all paper, the bottom a mere 1.1 per cent. They also own over 87 per cent of the world’s vehicle fleet, while the bottom 20 per cent own less than 1 per cent.

The US alone uses up a third of the world’s paper, a quarter of its oil, over a quarter of the coal, and nearly 30 per cent of the aluminum. America’s per capita use of energy, metals, minerals, forest products, fish, grains, meat and yes, even fresh water, rises to a monolith compared to people living in the developing world. In fact, one American consumes as much energy as seven hundred Africans. They have attained this not by being smart but by stomping around the planet destabilizing the ability of independent states to exist and protect their own resources from being plundered, by military means, often by the art of coup, and replacing elected leadership with obedient tyrants.

Fueling global consumption, the world’s 3,000 biggest corporations cause about half of all environmental damage, and about one-third of their profits. Any other profits go to a few CEO’s and speculators, even though current external costs now total $7.3 trillion a year. To counterbalance this discrepancy, the global fossil fuel industry is conveniently subsidized by respective governments to the tune of $5.6 trillion a year, using tax payer dollars.

13. “Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts.”

But first we must recognize who is affecting the climate the most. And take the word urgent out of the above sentence. It is true that 10 per cent of the world’s population who are responsible for the vast majority of greenhouse gas emissions live in North America, because of their consumption habits, not their numbers. While the two biggest economies in the world China and the US are producing the most greenhouse gases, especially carbon dioxide. It’s interesting that according to most of the studies, surveys, and polls that have been taken around the world over the years, the consumers of these two countries are also found to be the least concerned about carbon emissions. The silent majority remain silent, cloaked in cognitive dissonance. But then, the biggest impacts upon this planet are not because of greenhouse gases. If it was, we could combat climate change fairly quickly.

You want to better the planet and avoid future climate disruption, and much civil unrest, start with the Orwellian-named, US Department of Defence. Per capita it is the largest emitter of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere today, by far. It is also the largest institutional consumer of fossil fuels (mostly petroleum) in the world, more than any other country. Its air force alone consumes over 60 per cent of it, about 11 trillion liters. An F16 jet-fighter (nearly $18 million to build) consumes over 11,000 liters of jet-fuel an hour. An M1 Abrams battle tank, burns over 220 liters an hour, getting about 250 meters per liter. And of course they are also the world’s greatest terrorist state and threat to world peace, with 10 aircraft-carrier battle groups, and over 900 U.S. military bases, installations and facilities around the globe, which are nearly all toxic, radioactive, polluting, and immoral cesspools. In fact many of their bases consistently rank among some of the most polluted places in the world. The US produces more hazardous waste than the five largest chemical companies combined. Whether depleted uranium, oil, jet fuel, pesticides, defoliants or lead. They are currently polluting more than 140 countries. On a side note, the US Navy is planning (Nov/2019) to release 20,000 tons of “environmental stressors”, including heavy metals and explosives, at sea, off their Pacific Northwest coastline.

The globalists are trying to speed up the process of culling the global population down to a level where further geo-engineering and the greater use of renewable energies will allow CO2 levels to drop, allowing the Earth’s atmosphere return to natural rhythms. With their agenda including further enhancing any effects of climate change attributed to CO2 emissions, through geo-engineering projects such as HAARP (High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program). Started up in 1993, HAARP is an ionospheric research program jointly funded by the U.S. Air Force, the U.S. Navy, the University of Alaska Fairbanks, and the Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency. It is being used for either electromagnetic warfare capabilities or weather modification. Especially using sky’s seeded with conductive aerosols, such as aluminum, barium, and strontium, by way of “chem-trails” which manipulates the jet stream. If HAARP is also electromagnetic capable, it could create such things as wildfires, hurricanes, drought, flooding and perhaps even earthquakes. Perhaps a way to get people off the land, whether homesteader, farmer, rancher or villager, by corporations who will pay out the insurance money, then buy the land for a far better price. With the people then having to move to a city or its suburb.

Credited non biased researchers have recently concluded that the adaption to unavoidable consequences of climate disruption, and to prevent the crises from worsening in the coming decades, over $2 trillion should be invested over the next ten years, which would create early-warning systems, climate-resilient infrastructure, improved agriculture crop production, global mangrove/wetlands protection, and investing in making available and limited water resources more resilient. The only problem in the equation the globalists see is that the population must be lowered, which would lower the stress on the planet’s available resources and environment.

It’s interesting that a few trillion dollars would be enough, along with further adaptation and innovation, to get climate disruption at the least, from worsening, yet the globalist backed progressive democratic socialists in the US, if elected, want to somehow come up with over $20 trillion over the same next ten years, so that every American has health care.

14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas, lakes, rivers and marine resources for “sustainable development”.

Ban most all ocean fishing, causing runaway food price inflation. Criminalize the operation of private fishing vessels, and place all ocean fishing operations under the control of government. Only allow certain corporations to carry out ocean fishing operations, under government contract, with product sold to an elite market. Such decisions will be based on how much a corporation donates to lawmaker’s campaigns. All other fish to be farmed in stagnate and nasty conditions, infused in a soup of hormones, fish-feed, waste, anti-bacteria, and chemicals.

Along with more than one-third of the world’s total grain output, one-third of the world’s fish catch is also fed to livestock. Of the world’s fish catch, 90 per cent of the largest fish in the oceans, including tuna, cod, shark, marlin, swordfish, and halibut are already gone, just in the last 50 years.

Consider salmon stocks continuing to drastically drop. Climate change is a very small contributing factor but is used so we don’t have to point the finger so much at ourselves. The problems include degradation of their habitat, hatchery fish have complicated genes, too high fish harvest limits for way too long, dams with no upstream or downstream passage, pollution, ocean plastics, warming oceans, and dead zones of ocean acidification.

According to a recent study, if things carry on as they are, by 2025 the oceans are expected to contain about one ton of plastic for every three tons of fish. By 2050 there will be more plastic in the oceans than fish. Chew on that for awhile.

It is estimated that about 150 million tons of plastic debris currently floats around the seven seas. Much of it takes hundreds of years to break down back to its base, tiny plastic nodules. These beady little pellets are less than one micron in diameter, about the diameter of a bacterium. Comparatively, spider web silk is about three to eight microns, a single human hair averages between ten and two hundred microns. These oil-based plastic nodules, as well as the previously mentioned micro-fibers, are used in everything from toothpaste to cosmetics, shampoo, soap, and aspirin. Such nodules and fibers are also what such things as socks, shoes, bed-sheets, acrylic, polyester, latex, cotton or wool blends, are made up of. And are all things which we wash on a regular basis.

While the larger pieces of plastic kill thousands of the largest animals, like the sea lion, seals, turtles and birds. The micro-plastics nodules, can absorb certain pollutants, and are easily ingested by many water species, including fish and shellfish. Millions of sea creatures are affected by consuming plastic. With many, eventually ending up on our dinner plate, and what we don’t eat gets thrown out in a plastic bag, another lion king circle of life sort of thing.

Recently, a young blue whale washed up on a Spanish beach. An autopsy deemed it died from peritonitis, basically an infection of the inner lining of the stomach, as it was unable to digest or excrete the over 29 kilograms of plastic found within its digestive system.

From 1950 to 1999, plastic production rose 20,000 per cent. In the first 10 years of the 21st century, more plastic was produced than in all of the last century. This includes the over 70 billion plastic bottles and one trillion plastic bags that are produced each year globally. Currently about 300 million tons of plastic is produced yearly. About half of which is for single use packaging.

When such plastic, chemical sludge and other debris end up in the oceans, currently at the rate of one dump truck dumping its load every minute, it creates such things as trash vortexes in the oceans. Plastic debris comes mostly from Asia and Africa, while the Western countries’ obedient citizens at least attempt to recycle their jars, cans, plastic and paper, nearly shamed into doing so.

15. “Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of land ecosystems, and to sustainably manage forests. To combat desertification, halt and reverse land degradation. Halt biodiversity loss.”

Meanwhile, since 2016 over 50 per cent of total global forest loss happened in only three countries, Brazil, Canada, and Russia. Romania lost all its intact forests. Madagascar has lost over 90 per cent, Paraguay 79 per cent. Current estimates suggest Paraguay, Laos, Cambodia and Equatorial Guinea will lose all their forests within the next twenty years. Even the rich, vast northern forests of Canada, has lost or altered over half of its forest cover. British Columbia doesn’t even do anything with the forests they are cutting down; they simply export the tree intact, de-limbed, but bark still on her, to Asia.

Overall and everywhere, logging is the principal devourer of forests, with cattle ranching and commercial agriculture a close second. Fires linked to human action accounted for 21 per cent of the loss, with mineral exploitation taking its fair share. West Africa’s coastal rain forests have nearly all but disappeared since 1900. Because of air currents, if all the African rain forests were to vanish, rainfall in the Gulf of Mexico, the Ukraine, and Southern Europe, would drop drastically.

In Southeast Asia, Indonesia alone deforests one million hectares a year. Brazil has lost about 95 per cent of its coastal forest, and much of its 60 per cent share of the Amazon basin, with their government declaring their deforestation addiction a national emergency. The biggest chunk of rain forest remaining is still the Amazon basin. Now only covering about four million sq km, it represents over half of the planet’s remaining rain forests. It is the largest and most diverse rain forest on the planet. Besides many other living species, it has been estimated that the Amazon forest still has 390 billion individual trees, of 16,000 different species. Twenty per cent of the Amazon forest has already been clear cut, another twenty per cent is close to being gone. Of the remaining forests, over 90 per cent are now being affected by forest degradation. It is estimated that if conditions persist, by 2030, there will only be about 20 per cent of the Amazon forests remaining, with half of it in a degraded condition. In fact, one tenth of all global carbon emissions today are coming from the clearing of land and accompanying fires in the Amazon forest.

For the quickly disappearing Amazon basin, its future climate is already here. As it loses its tree cover rainfall in parts of the US Midwest, Northwest, and in most of their Southern states, will drop significantly, and already is. By 2050 it is estimated that all tropical forests will be gone from the Earth. Such land degradation, besides causing more flooding and water run-off, is also the root cause of most socioeconomic problems in many of the developing countries. But the madness of deforestation for profit continues unabated.

To “combat” this the globalists plan, as already mentioned, is to force people to move into human settlement zones, urban/mega-cities. There we will be put into 28 square meter (3 by 9 meter) urban modular housing units, predominately stacked on top of each other. Mass resettlement as people are forced to vacate where they live, and abolition of all private property . Create vast wilderness spaces, for future use. Criminalize private land ownership. Tightly control all agriculture and agricultural tracts, including ranches, by policies dictated by Monsanto/Bayer and government regulators. Regulate every input that a farmer uses. Nationalize farms.

Ban wood stoves, rainwater collection and home gardening. Criminalize self-reliance, and force total dependence on government. Can’t have people living off the grid and living in “protective forests”. Allow no private ownership, no private land, and stop allowing people from doing what they want to the land/property they do own. Using “Sensitive lands” laws, your private property overlay and public property can be taken away at any time. Whether a copse of Garry Oak trees, or a stream running through or under your property, or your back yard is an animal crossing, lands will be seized without compensation and dedicated forever to protection. Often, without you even knowing.

All zoning laws and bio-diversity areas will be mapped out. Here in British Columbia, there are many whose main residence is either in another province or country, who also own a home or condo here. The majority, especially those with single dwelling homes, spend months here. That’s why they bought here. They shop, furnish their home, garden, get their car fixed, go to Home Depot every weekend, dine, contribute to the community and carry on as if they live here, which they do. They know and are friends with their neighbours. But now, such owners have to pay a two per cent speculation tax, if they do not live in their home at least six months out of the year. If it’s less time one is now required to rent the place out. Even though many of these foreign and domestic owned homes/condos are on the higher end of the scale for renter availability. The working poor, unemployed, homeless, student or single mom with children certainly won’t be able to afford the rent. Especially when you’d have to move out for some months while the owners live there. And who’s furniture and artwork on the walls is it. So what sort of diversity are we talking about here exactly.

And finally how can there be private ownership of property or a home, when for often the vaguest of reasons, government agents dressed for war in black, can break down your front door, shoot your, of course, growling dog, destroy your furnishings, and terrorize your family. And if you can be fined for growing vegetables on your front yard, praying with friends in your living room, installing solar panels, or not, raising chickens in your back yard and having your kids run a lemonade stand out front you are obviously not secure in your home or owner of your property.

16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, private access to justice for all and build effective, accountable, and inclusive institutions at all levels”. The scariest line in the Agenda.

Once again, everyone herded into mega-cities. Where theoretically, if any dissidence occurs we could all be sprayed down if needed.

One of the other many ways is granting legal immunity to illegal aliens and “protected minority groups”. As well as medical care and whatever else they need, and eventually their vote. This will free some of them to maybe engage in illegal and even immoral activity, because they are now entitled as a “protected class” in society. And because of “diversity”, they no longer have to assimilate into the general population. Just look at what is happening to Sweden and the UK. As to the “inclusive institutions”, this means that corporations who hire illegal aliens, the LGBTQ etc, community, and other protected classes, over merit, will be given favourable tax structures and government grants. And though many are walking around saying “Hello. I am special”, policy decisions will favor the “common good” (the herd) over individuals. With the ends justifying the means. The moral principle of the ends can never justify the means will become a myth.

As for law, which often has nothing to do with justice, use revenue, tax and other federal agencies to selectively punish unfavourable groups with punitive audits, and regulatory harassment. All the while ignoring the criminal activities of those corporations favoured by the government. Because the elites have no problem that everyone be allowed to be treated the same before the law and enjoy the same rights as other citizens, except of course for the elite. In reality there is a two-tiered law system. But really no one is more in favour of equal rights and abolition of social privileges than the elite, since they have no need for social privilege since they control the real power, money. Further, they’d rather remove due process, especially since the majority of those being incarcerated are unable to have proper representation as it is, nor can afford to submit any sort of defence. Get it into the mainstream media and one can be convicted not by a jury but a biased public opinion. Then the government will destroy you because you are no match for the funds they can spend. Without even being proven guilty by a court of law, you can be destroyed financially, lose your family, friends, all your possessions and livelihood. With many then putting a gun in their mouths and pulling the trigger.

Over-regulate everything. In many western countries, especially the US and Canada, the typical person goes through each day breaking at least three laws, that we aren’t even aware of. And we are beyond simply thinking someone is doing wrong that law enforcement can give a good enough excuse for a warrant to bug someones phone. “It’s no longer based on the traditional practice of targeted taps based on some individual suspicion of wrongdoing. It covers phone calls, emails, texts, search history, what you buy, who your friends are, where you go, who you love.”

17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development.

By way of enacting global trade mandates that over-ride individual national, state or province, and local laws. Grant unrestricted powers to corporations such as Monsanto, Dow Chemical, RJ Reynolds, Coca Cola, and Merck. Enact laws where a town or province can be sued if they “effect the profit making ability of such entities”. Pass global trade agreements that bypass a nation’s lawmakers and override intellectual property laws, to make the world’s most powerful corporations maintain total monopolies over drugs, seeds, fresh water, chemicals and technology. Nullify national laws and demand total global obedience to trade agreements authored by an unelected world body and rubber stamped by the US. Implement policies meant to incentivize a reduced population, through vaccinations, health care, and reproductive services, like pharmaceuticals, and abortion, genetically modified food, fluoride, and radiation manufactured diseases.

A major piece of the plan also includes the insidiously modern technology, called 5G (fifth generation cellular network technology). All things will become a part of the web, including ourselves. To explain, humans possess only four basic emotions, arousal, pleasant, unpleasant, and calm. And since we are electromagnetic and electrical organisms, with even our cells and cell structures communicating electrically, these basic emotions operate on their own separate frequency. Though unable to travel through solid objects, such frequencies are felt when we interact with one another. They are the vibes we get from one another, whether it’s romance in the air, or the undertone of unease and danger, “cutting the air in the room with a knife”. The frequencies are also based on our five physical sensors: of taste, sight, hearing, touch, and smell, which along with the senses of balance, pain, hunger, thirst, and temperature contributes to our experience of our surroundings, but which only shows us a three-dimensional universe. Our behaviour on the other hand will come from inherited traits, while our perceptions of things, comes from information received, experiences, and our consciousness. When such fields are in balance we are healthy, when they are not, we experience disease – physically, mentally, emotionally, and psychologically. 5G technologies can manipulate these frequencies, and destabilize their distributions, to induce feelings of arousal, conviviality, meanness, friendliness, anger, and even experience extreme pain, without our awareness. Indeed, 5G technology initially was developed to be used as crowd control weapons, where when used can either make a crowd feel like their skin is on fire, or everyone is crying and in need of a hug. The technology is also what’s behind the body scanners at airports, introduced two years ago, and the now rising cases of cancers among those employees who spend their shift operating such machines.

The previous four generations of cellular transmitters used between one to five gigahertz (GHz), 5G on the other hand operates from 24 to 90 GHz and uses millimeter waves, not cellular. These waves have a shorter range than microwaves so their antennas will have to be everywhere. A typical urban street will have to have them atop every fourth or so light pole. The 5G waves also cannot travel through solid objects, such as trees, so in many urban areas they will have to be the first to go.

And though scientific studies are not yet written, because of it being so new and overall effects are still unknown, according to reports already coming out, there are cases of both people and insects alike getting sick due to nearby 5G towers is already on the rise. But more importantly we will have quicker internet.

Even scarier is the recent reports where scientists, and because we are electrical beings like every other living thing, now have the ability to predict our choices before we are consciously aware of them, and can translate our thoughts into speech. One all encompassing net/grid/matrix, is the goal. With the end game, to connect the human brain to artificial intelligence (AI) and through such a matrix, control our emotional perceptions by the information coming from AI.

Control the digital grid is all important. In India where 60 per cent of the population lives under the poverty line, over a billion people are bio-metrically profiled. Data includes fingerprints, iris scans, and facial recognition programs. In Russia all digital data, phone, email, Facebook, and Twitter is now recorded. Online, any blogger who has over 3,000 followers is put on file with the government, and is not allowed to remain anonymous. In China, they have the ultimate control system where each person has a social credit score attached to them until they die. Few people can afford to be “blacklisted” while every action they make is tracked and rated for acceptance or consequence. No one dares to do anything outside of collective norms for fear they would be interpreted as socially negative. This is also happening in most of the Western world. One must always be politically correct, all follow the same narrative, and not to upset others or the government.

The control of the narrative is all important. The globalists and their presstitutes at the Washington Post, New York Times, CNN, BBC, CBC, NPR, and all the rest in the US, UK, EU, Canada, Australia and New Zealand, learned their craft from Nazi Propaganda Minister Joseph Goebbels. “If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it. The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie. It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the State.”

Most importantly the globalists are relying on manufacturing consent through the media. Starting with the ownership of the media by corporations, where it’s all about profit and the push for profit by whatever it takes. Whether getting advertising money by selling advertisers customers, or creating customers to become consumers and not citizens, and who are able to be swoon one way or another, with no basis if it is true or not. Doing this by using the our emotions to get us to purchase what we are programmed to believe that we need. The media elite provide the complicity.

In conclusion, the globalist’s agenda is for sustainability, stability, and security, of themselves. In reality there is presently more than enough wealth and capabilities to solve both societal and climate problems. We live in the most wealthy and technologically advanced society in the history of civilization. People should not have to struggle and be buried in debt to get basic necessities and live a healthy life. But the globalist elite want the goal to be centralization. To use “saving the environment”, which they are destroying (disaster capitalism), to justify the industrialization and end of democracy.

The dilemma the globalists have is either somehow lower the population or simply program us, and get us all crammed into huge regional capitals. I think they’ve been doing both. Control of the land, natural resources, and entire populations. To control air through carbon emission regulations, the ground by sustainable development and the sea through environmental regulations. A comprehensive plan of action to be taken globally, nationally and locally, by organizations of the UN system, governments, and major groups in every area which humans impact the environment. State management of all Eco-systems, all land, forests, mountains, rivers, lakes and oceans, agriculture, bio-technology, food and fresh water, ensuring equity equals slavery. This is mostly happening at the local level, so question town representatives, and explain the facts of what they are blindly teaching. And hope they see the light.

Of the 7.7 billion residents on the planet 5 billion of us have a mobile device, half (over 2.5 billion) are smartphones. Meanwhile, The Internet of Things (from traffic lights to fridges phones and tablets) is expected to grow to around 20.4 billion devices by 2020, and use of cloud services will grow as well. Of these billions, about 73 per cent of people who misplace their phone experience a mild to severe state of panic until it’s found. But then the average adult today spends 2 to 4 hours a day on their phone, swiping and touching it, sometimes even feeling our phones vibrating in our pockets when they aren’t even there. Our phones are a surveillance and tracking device that governments and corporations can exploit anytime they wish. Even creating our relationships, including building up illusions of friendship and intimacy. Making us all dopamine addicts.

Dopamine is a chemical produced by our brains that plays a huge role in motivating our behaviour. It gets released when we take a bite of delicious food, when we have sex, after we exercise, and, importantly, when we have successful social interactions. “I feel tremendous guilt,” admitted Chamath Palihapitiya, former Vice President of User Growth at Facebook, to an audience of Stanford students. He was responding to a question about his involvement in exploiting consumer behaviour. “The short-term, dopamine-driven feedback loops that we have created are destroying how society works,” he explained. He highlighted that smartphones and social media platforms like Facebook, Snapchat, and Instagram leverage the very same neural circuitry used by slot machines and cocaine to keep us using their products as much as possible.

As for technology saving us, maybe. But the advancements in the world of machines do not necessarily mean advancements in the world of people. Dependence upon digital devices, makes our lives more convenient and comfortable, but in reality only enslaves us. So entranced with a screen and the dopamine rushes it gives. Some will say that our society has simply become more convenient and more comfortable with the digital age, which they feel is a positive. Others are afraid of the social changes that come with the globalization that the digital age brings. Others believe that centralization and dependency are “natural” extensions of man’s evolution and inevitable. and so we should embrace it. While the Futurists, a subculture of drum-beaters believe that all old ideas and ways of living are obsolete and must be thrown out to make way for all new ideas and ways of living. That all new ideas are an automatic improvement, with each new generation superior and more wise to the one before it, because each new generation will have access to ever more information. Reality is there are very few new ideas in the world, only old ideas rehashed and recycled and repainted to look different.

The influx of many technologies today is not necessarily the problem; it is how these technologies are being applied in our society. Having unlimited information at our fingertips is not the same thing as wisdom. Besides the aforementioned loss of our knowledge to grow, forage and hunt food. Many no longer know how to fix anything that is broken. Whether their car or knowing how to use a hammer and screwdriver. Completely dependent on automation. With far too many people living completely on the grid, with many born into it. People, that if you could reach down into their world of comfortable slavery and grab them by the scruff of their neck and drop them into the middle of a forest. With food, water and possible shelter everywhere around them, they would still die.

One must remember that the globalist elite are a separate culture from the rest of humanity, with its own tribal customs, mythologies and beliefs. They are a secretive occult group of narcissistic sociopaths, whose main motivation is to condition or tear down normal, moral and free society until it becomes a place in which they can openly be themselves without fear of judgment or consequences. They want to change the world into a habitat that will accept them.

According to criminology not all criminals are full blown narcissistic sociopaths, but most full blown narcissistic sociopaths are criminals. How successful they are usually depends on their ability to blend in and mimic or manipulate normal people. Their defining character features include “a complete lack of conscience and empathy, the ability to rationalize any and all destructive behaviour, a desperate need to be adored or admired by everyone around them, a feeling of being “more special” than most people, a feeling of superiority, delusions of grandeur or an inherent right to manage the lives of others, an obsessive need to control and manipulate, impulsive desires and deviant sexual inclinations, and they will only associate with people they feel are like them and are “equally superior”.

Their primary drive is to fulfill their fantasies of superiority and godhood. The more deviant the action, and the more successful they are at getting away with it, the more dopamine they generate and the more satisfied they feel. This leads to an endless cycle, seeking out more and more exploitation of others which becomes less and less satisfying, which leads to even greater deviance.

These traits are inborn, not a product of environment. In some cases environment can play a role in activating these traits, but if a person is not born with them, they generally do not adopt them later in life because of a traumatic environment. Narcissistic sociopaths defy all forms of treatment and cannot be reformed. They have no concrete personality beyond these traits, therefore, if you remove the traits, they are left with nothing else.

Using the basic requisites of socialism’s core ideology of confiscation and redistribution of private property, combined with enforced collectivism and a strong central planning apparatus that erases individual liberty, the economy and society would be entirely transformed. Car and air travel would be banned, except for the elite of course, and law enforcement. All jobs created would be unionized, and every family given a guaranteed income and paid retirement, even those unwilling to work. Such ideas though could never be attained because many citizens don’t want to be unionized, they don’t want to have to rebuild a perfectly good home, give up their car or to never fly again. And especially don’t want to fund the living expenses and retirement of other people who are “unwilling to work”. Under the globalist’s regime the vast majority who do have a job, will be working for the government. So the only way left for the globalists is to continue creating the effects of inequality, poverty and the overall deterioration of society, which will only lead to widespread chaos and violence.

From Antifa to democratic socialists, the goal of the globalists is to use such extreme leftist groups to prod conservative movements, which are the primary threat to globalism. To make people feel unsafe yet provide no dialogue. Instead will forcibly make you believe in their ideology through violent protests and harassment where you dine and live. You will not have freedom of speech and must be anti-constitutional. Mussolini would be proud of them. They are currently trying to manipulate conservatives into voluntarily abandoning their principles of constitutional liberty and limited government. By making certain conservatives into tyrants. In order to dismantle democratic institutions as fast as possible and install a complete centralized command economy run by unelected tsars, which is neither participatory nor democratic.

But a new paradigm is organically evolving: new economic systems, sustainable communities, solar energy, organic farming, liquid democracy, worker co-ops and new media. For all the problems we are confronted by, there are existing viable solutions. There is much to feel positive about. There is currently many decentralized global uprisings, undermining systems of centralized and consolidated power around the globe. A new world is being born. It remains to be seen what will unfold, but if the world’s largest silent majority continue to stare into their phone, TV screens and tablets every moment of our waking lives the vision can be seen watching films such as Blade Runner (both of them), The Matrix, Clockwork Orange, the Purge films, Minority Report, Fahrenheit 451, the Running Man, and Soylent Green, among so many others. So many books as well, by the great visionaries Orwell, Huxley, and Atwood, et al.

Since the elite now know so much about us because they have created us, they are able to manipulate our psyches better than we even understand ourselves. But we do still have a choice. Indeed life is decisions, then how we live based on those decisions. And though there are many people who are growing acutely aware that much of what we say and do is becoming officially retrievable and could be used against us someday, somehow. Whether engaged in a phone discussion, email correspondence, online searches, banter at a party or even a quiet conversation at home, people are losing a sense of activity that is truly private. All that is left to do is to be relentlessly honest as possible with ourselves, friends, family, co-workers and social media followers. Be truthful when we see or hear an untruth. Because truth will set us free, and is actually the one thing the globalists cannot manipulate whether its about them, the world or us. But only if we stay open to each other. While silence is continuing complicity.


Debt to GDP Ratio by Country 2019

For the economists in the crowd…

What countries have the largest debt in the world? Here is a list of the top ten countries with the most national debts, according to its GDP, and those with the least.

  1. Japan (¥1,028 trillion ($9.087 trillion US))
  2. Greece (€332.6 billion ($379 billion US))
  3. Portugal (€232 billion ($264 billion US))
  4. Italy (€2.17 trillion ($2.48 trillion US))
  5. Bhutan ($2.33 billion (US))
  6. Cyprus (€18.95 billion ($21.64 billion US))
  7. Belgium (€399.5 billion ($456.18 billion US))
  8. United States of America ($19.23 trillion (US))
  9. Spain (€1.09 trillion ($1.24 US))
  10. Singapore ($350 billion ($254 billion US))

Japan, with its population of 127 million people, has the highest national debt in the world by a huge amount, at 234.18% of its GDP. Japan’s equity and real estate bubbles burst starting in the fall of 1989. Equity values plunged 60% from late 1989 to August 1992, while land values dropped throughout the 1990s, falling an incredible 70% by 2001. By 2008 the government had already had to bail out banks and insurance companies, and had provided them with low-interest credit. Banking institutions were soon consolidated and nationalized, with other fiscal stimulus initiatives used to help reboot the struggling economy. Unfortunately, these actions caused Japan’s debt level to skyrocket.

With a population of 329 million people, the US national debt is currently 109.45% of its GDP.

Canada’s national debt is currently at 83.81% of its GDP. It’s national debt currently sits at about $1.2 trillion CAD ($925 billion US). Canada experienced a gradual decrease in debt after the 1990s all the way until 2010 when the debt began increasing again.

Germany’s debt ratio is currently at 59.81% of its GDP, with it’s total debt approximately 2.291 trillion € ($2.527 trillion US). Germany is Europe’s largest economy.

China’s national debt is currently 54.44% of its GDP, a significant increase from 2014 when the national debt was at 41.54% of China’s GDP. It’s current national debt is over ¥38 trillion (over $5 trillion US). An International Monetary Fund report from 2015 stated that China’s debt is relatively low, and many economists have dismissed worries over the size of the debt both in its overall size and relative to China’s GDP. China currently has the world’s largest economy and the largest population of 1.4 billion people.

Russia’s debt ratio is one of the lowest in the world at 19.48% of its GDP, the ninth least indebted country in the world. It’s debt is currently at a total of over 14 billion руб ($216 billion US), with most of Russia’s external debt private.

Other countries whose debt is lower than 20% of its GDP include the United Arab Emirates, Solomon Islands, Democratic Republic of Congo, and Botswana. Countries with debt below 10% of its GDP are Estonia (6.12%), Afghanistan (6.32%), and Brunei (2.46%).


IMF data from the April 2018 “IMF World Economic Outlook” database.


Inside Agendas 21 and 2030

Part One

A 17 Page Dense Essay

Some things about skeptics, which in ancient Greece were called skeptikos, defined as someone who doubted even the possibility of real knowledge. While the Latin word scepticus, meant being thoughtful, inquiring and reflective. Its most up to date definition is someone who questions validity or authenticity of something purporting to be factual. Whether values, plans, mainstream media news, the goals of those in power, statements, or the character of others.

Oddly, in science a healthy skepticism is a professional necessity, in religion, having belief without evidence is regarded as a virtue. Or as George Carlin once said, “Tell people, there’s an invisible man in the sky who created the universe, and the vast majority will believe you. Tell them the paint is wet, and they have to touch it to be sure.

Just because someone tells us something, or we see something online or on TV, until otherwise proven by facts, actions, and/or behaviour, we should take it with a grain of salt. Much like when we were young children walking around asking, why, how come, why not, and what do you mean? To do otherwise would seem something was wrong with us. But then we also continue to give people the benefit of the doubt, which is also pretty crazy. Considering this is where the predators, exploiters, and abusers hide behind. Hence, over 95 per cent of child and spousal mental, physical and sexual abuse is done by a known family member.

One should consider things, examine them, and not take them for granted, don’t ya think? Research and listen to all sides of any debate or information received, no matter how painful it may be. Through understanding where all sides are coming from, is where the nuggets of truth stand out when comparing them, and which may be missed by the many who know of only one side. Because either side whether liberal or conservative are sometimes right and sometimes not.

Being skeptical is similar to critical thinking in that it does not mean criticizing everything and everybody in sight. Critical thinking is when we use all our intellectual skills by means of observation, learning, experience, reasoning and communication, to form a reliable guide to belief. Sadly we have replaced such problem-solving ability with self-righteousness.

George Orwell wrote, “The further a society drifts from the truth, the more it will hate those that speak it”, so true. Today anyone who criticizes say, the government of Israel’s Zionist policies against the Palestinians are deemed anti-Semitic, even though one doesn’t need to be Jewish to be a Zionist, indeed in the US and UK there are many Christian-Zionists. Because Judaism is a religion, Zionism is a political ideology. Or he, who questions government explanations for events and actions, is labelled a conspiracy nut or dissident. To criticize and question the propaganda that portrays Russia as the bad man in the world, one is deemed a Putin puppet. Say mainstream media is in the smear business, they will smear you. Question immigration policy one is a racist, open a door for a lady while smiling, a sexist. Recently a white guy got his knickers in a twist because I wouldn’t apologize for being white, just like a black guy wouldn’t apologize for being black or an Asian guy wouldn’t apologize for being Asian.

Those who are skeptical simply want the truth. As someone once said “Being intelligent…….not because you question everything, but because you question everything you think you know.” People are skeptical and so we should be. There are also people who simply don’t like to be lied to or made fun of, or feel they are, which often only brings paranoia and distrust. Others don’t want to be considered “the other” by their tribe, so will believe what they are told and ignore the discrepancies in the actions and behaviour of others in their own tribe. And of course there are also people who are skeptic of skeptics.

Much of what is written here does not necessarily mean it is what I truly believe, for I remain skeptical, but it is what I have found to be confirmed, known, and discussed whether by theory or fact, and from multiple sources, and simply makes sense. So until further information presents itself, maybe it’s closer to the truth. For there are many things we have been told that do not make sense, and so very much we do not nor will ever know.

For many people all we know of history is our own, and with history being re-written all the time to line up with today’s narrative, what we think went down and what actually did, lies in a fog that covers us all as a cloak and unfortunately, will soon be forgotten. Such deception is what we need to free ourselves from. The following is what I think about the global initiatives, Agenda 21 and 30, and why I think they are insidious. I don’t think I’m sharing anything new, other than following dots along threads, falling down rabbit holes, researching, and hopefully looking at things under a different light. Personally I’d be unable to make such things up.

Dogmatism and skepticism are both, in a sense, absolute philosophies; one is certain of knowing, the other of not knowing. What philosophy should dissipate is certainty, whether of knowledge or ignorance.” – Bertrand Russell

Not to be read by the faint of heart, easily triggered, close minded or unhinged, and anyone who doesn’t want to know about anything that may disrupt their daily routine and programming. But then maybe it should.

The Back Story

Signed in 1992 by 177 countries, Agenda 21 is a legally non-binding statement of intent, and not a treaty, of the United Nations with regard to sustainable development. A product of the Earth (Rio) Summit (UN Conference on Environment and Development) held in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, that year. It is based on the economy, environment and social equity, and targets five main goals, People, the Planet, Prosperity, Peace and Partnership. In the US their Senate did not hold a formal debate or vote on it when President George H. W. Bush signed it, but did have support from Representatives Nancy Pelosi, Eliot Engel and William Broomfield. It also enacted the polluter pays principle, to make a party responsible for producing pollution responsible for paying for the damage done to the natural environment or simply a Carbon Tax. Which doesn’t stop anyone from polluting; it just means they have to pay a little extra for it.

Speaking at the Rio summit, 12 year old Severn Cullis-Suzuki, daughter of Canadian environmentalist David Suzuki, spoke about how she was “afraid to breath the air” or go out in the sun, and warned of mass extinctions of plants and animals. She pleaded that rich nations should stop spending money on wars and instead, “Let go of some of our wealth”. She felt, “At school, even in kindergarten, you teach us how to behave in the world. You teach us not to fight with others, to work things out, to respect others, to clean up our mess, not to hurt other creatures, to share, not be greedy. Then why do you go out and do the things you tell us not to do? Do not forget why you are attending these conferences, who you are doing this for. We are your own children. You are deciding what kind of a world we are growing up in.”

They did decide, by continuing on status quo for nearly 30 years, implementing their Agenda 21 along the way. Ms Suzuki’s language was similar to angry 16-year-old girl Greta Thunberg, who tried shaming world leaders in a tearful tirade at the UN, in September/2019, because she has been brainwashed to believe the world will cease to exist in ten years. It’s an odd way to go about dealing with a problem. Something like climate change, where only a part of the problem is from human activity, one would think cooperation would be the way to go, instead of berating and screaming. Thunberg especially went after Germany, France, Brazil, Argentina and Turkey. She even filed a legal formal complaint against them for their carbon emissions, yet didn’t have anything to say about the largest polluters in the world, the US and China. Conveniently her speech overshadowed the fact that at the same UN conference, over 50 countries strongly denounced and spoke out against Israel’s apartheid of Palestine.

In 1996 Bill Clinton put forth America’s own version of the plan through the “Presidential Council on Sustainable Development”, which published the book “Sustainable America – A New Consensus”, and which outlines plans for its indoctrination, propaganda, and to neutralize opposition. The focal points of Agenda 21 in the US became the Division Chief for Sustainable Development and Multilateral Affairs, Office of Environmental Policy, Bureau of Oceans and International Environmental and Scientific Affairs, and the US Department of State. In other countries, such as the UK, Canada, France, and Australia, Agenda 21 is overseen by similar and corresponding agencies. In effect it is a control of resources and populations plan, with a side of eugenics, and an attempt to put the “collective” agenda over individual rights. And very few have heard about it.

Nor of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development, which was adopted by 193 UN member states in September 2015 at a UN summit. The 2030 Agenda is universal, applying to all countries and requiring them for the next 15 years, “to accelerate climate change and environmental protection, reduce unemployment, strengthen gender equality, and promote peaceful societies if the world is to eradicate poverty and shift into a more sustainable development”. They recognize that a range of social needs, including education, health, and social protection, can be addressed by building economic growth.

The 2030 Agenda targets the same five main goals of Agenda 21, but that extra effort was to be given to 17 new Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) to the original document. Right out of Huxley’s Brave New World, the goals now include,

  • No Poverty
  • Zero Hunger
  • Good Health and Well-being
  • Quality Education
  • Gender Equality
  • Clean Water and Sanitation
  • Affordable and Clean Energy
  • Decent Work and Economic Growth
  • Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
  • Reduced Inequality
  • Sustainable Cities and Communities
  • Responsible Consumption and Production
  • Climate Action
  • Life Below Water
  • Life on Land
  • Peace and Justice
  • Strong Institutions and Partnerships

And that all these goals are achieved before 2030, only ten years away, or the world ends. Their motto is, “If we realize our ambitions across the full extent of the Agenda, the lives of all will be profoundly improved and our world will be transformed for the better.” Sounds lovely in a controlling sort of way, with the actual agenda and the gritty details on how they want to reach such goals, we will be discussing later, below.

Agenda 21 was set up to be executed at local, national, and global levels. By going through the UN, the people behind the agenda are doing an end run around national governments and working directly with local governments and multilateral organizations. It is a calculated attempt to end sovereignty of both soul and country, by a central un-elected authority controlling everything, and reshaping consumption patterns as to what we buy, eat, use, and how and where we are to live. They use the control of Marxist/totalitarian concepts, but without the revolution part, thus it has been instead spoon-fed to us for over fifty years.

Those behind such a project are the same geopolitical plutocratic elite who are controlling much of the narrative today. For the sake of a number of variations, we’ll call such plutocratic elite and their corporations, globalists. And if we are being honest here, after seeing and listening to Mark Zuckerberg, should we actually believe he is running one of the largest companies in the world? At the top are families who do not align themselves with any country or government. They do not care for the humanity they are trying to reform, nor the environment, with generational paedophilia running deep in their veins. Such globalists hold massive control over just about everything, with their central banks literally running much of the world. Families such as the Payseur, Nobel, Astor, DuPont, Reynolds, Rockefeller, and Rothschild, control the banks and corporations at the top, who then control governments by giving politicians absurd amounts of money towards their campaigns, and purchasing their bias and leniency through a process we call gerrymandering and lobbying. It continues for generations as the corporations offer lots of possible lucrative job and business opportunities for not only politicians after they leave office, but their spouses, even their grown kids.

They all live within bubbles, where they and their family only hang out with others in the same bubble. Most all, feel above the rest of us regular folk, and don’t trust us to make our own decisions, because they fabricated who we are and know us very well, so feel they must decide for us. And though they are evil in their intentions, like many terrorists they are not madmen. They are very well organized, extremely dedicated, disciplined, and usually “retaliation proof”.

The globalists came to ruling the world when they took control of the oil industry at the end of the 19th century. Before that time they were railroad barons, financiers, ship builders, arms manufacturers, and industrialists. They expanded their central banking system globally, from the original 12 banks that made up the Bank of England (House of Rothschild), which was managed at the time by the corporation, The City of London, which contrary to popular belief is not a part of England, just as Washington DC is not a part of the US. The City of London came into fruition after The English Civil War in the 17th century, while Washington DC was incorporated in 1871, and would later allow the globalists to open their private, central bank, the Federal Reserve in 1913, to eventually make and keep the US dollar the global default currency of exchange. This would prove handy because by 1945 their endeavours during their British Empire had come to a close, so they simply shifted focus onto their new empire. And their new empire, though currently being attacked, has been very successful. In 2000 the only State central banks not owned by them, included China, Russia, Afghanistan, Iraq, Iran, Libya, Sudan, North Korea, and Cuba. Today the holdouts are only China, Russia, Iran, North Korea, and Cuba.

A few years after the Federal Reserve came into being; in 1921 the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) was founded by British Oxford Rhodes scholars and Fabians. It is a US nonprofit, 4900 member organization, publisher, and think tank specializing in US foreign policy and international affairs. Headquartered in New York City, they have an additional office in Washington DC. Its membership has included senior politicians, more than a dozen secretaries of state, CIA directors, bankers, lawyers, professors, and senior media figures. Today the CFR promotes globalization, free trade, reducing financial regulations on transnational corporations, and economic consolidation into regional blocs such as NAFTA and the European Union, and develops policy recommendations that reflect these goals. They are the most influential foreign-policy think tank in the US, dictating much of US policy whether foreign or domestic. In the mid-nineties, they and the neoconservative think tank, Project for the New American Century (PNAC), whose members included Dick Cheney, Donald Rumsfeld, Paul Wolfowitz, Robert Kagan, Richard Perle, Elliott Abrams, and John Bolton, came up with a plan for the US’s future role in the world. The report called for a “new Pearl Harbor” type event, which would give the US a rationale to enter the Middle East militarily and change the entire political landscape. A few years later, 9/11 accomplished this goal. The globalists have known for over a century that they only need to get away with one major false flag event every couple of decades to push the populace into a war or a cultural crisis which can be exploited. The problem for the US is after 9/11 they insanely began walking the road the previous Soviet Union had walked. Where after a decade-long bungled war in Afghanistan the Soviet Union went bankrupt and their communist manifesto dissolved.

The globalist’s network of central banks today include the American bank Goldman Sachs, which was founded in 1869, and JPMorgan Chase & Co. which is the largest bank in the US, and the world’s sixth largest bank by total assets (US $2.6 trillion). Before 2000 it was the Bank of the Manhattan Company, founded in 1799, and had gained incredible power and wealth after literally making a killing over the American Civil War, and from the loans given to rebuild. Six years after the Civil War, Washington DC became the corporation it is. Other central banks include Barclays PLC (founded in 1690) in the City of London, the German, Deutsche Bank AG (1870); the French, Société Générale S.A. or SocGen (1864); the Swedish, Swedbank AB (1820), and the Swiss investment bank UBS Group AG (1862), one of the “biggest, most powerful financial institutions in the world”. Interestingly most of these banks were founded within and around the same decade of the Civil War, for the globalists had to be able to manage and distribute the incredible amounts of money they had made off both sides during the war.

By the end of the 1940’s the globalists had the International Monetary Fund (IMF), which was to be the keeper of the rules and the main instrument of public international management, and the World Bank Group (WBG). The WBG is a group of five international organizations that make leveraged loans to developing countries. Both began lending money out hand over fist, even to countries that had no chance in hell of ever paying the loan back.

After making hundreds of billions of dollars from both World Wars, with US arms manufacturers making over $330 billion US dollars on World War II alone, they thought, why stop there, let’s make it foreign policy. Meanwhile, the Soviet Union would begin to build their own nuclear weapons and erect the Iron Curtain, behind which lay the great central and eastern European cities of Warsaw, Berlin, Prague, Vienna, Budapest, Belgrade, Bucharest and Sofia, enclosing them off for forty-six years, until the already mentioned Soviet demise in 1991.

From the money made from arms, food, and supply sales, and the resulting loans to rebuild, the globalists would create the industrial military complex. Their tentacles would eventually come to control public education systems, food distribution networks, big-Pharma corporations, agriculture, chemical industries, Western mainstream media, Hollywood, most Western intelligence organizations, and NATO, who’s sole job is to control global energy systems, pipelines and sea lanes.

After WW II they would also create a huge middle-class, good jobs, and ever new things to purchase, whether one needed it or not. Eventually they would attempt to control the narrative, carry out social engineering projects, and other experimentation at will. They were close to achieving such goals, but by the mid-sixties, millions of rebelling and questioning young people were becoming aware for the need to change the Western world system that their parents and grandparents had passed down to them. And which had ironically given them the privilege to question their upbringing and culture. They began to question the scam being created, the belief that profit-driven corporations would protect the larger public interest in a sustainable environment. They began to question the establishment which they called the “man”, and the morality of the Vietnam War. Anti-war and anti-establishment protests, along with ongoing racial wars, erupted around the world. National guardsmen were shooting civilians and ignorant whites were killing proud black people, while free-love bloomed. Cultures began to change with the whiff of chaos and rebellion in the air, which was right up the globalist’s alley, for they knew that conflicts often bring change, and that controlled conflicts bring controlled change.

These searching young people represented the leading edge of the post WW II baby boom (born between 1945 and 1964) that were coming of age (18 to 20 years old) in the mid sixties, and who began questioning what was going on in society. The words to Bob Dylan’s “Blowin’ in the Wind”, which he wrote in 1962, sung by the Mamas and Papas, then by himself on his Freewheelin’ album in 1963, encapsulates what was about to happen perfectly. And which continues to happen. Give it a listen.

By the early 70’s the questioning came to a halt, with the elimination of the anti-war movement (right up to the present day), the assassinations of political and cultural leaders, a debt-fuelled version of consumer capitalism being pumped into our minds and culture, the creation of a welfare state, increased propaganda against the values and morals of family, empathy, ethics, community, and Christianity (with the Roman Catholic version and their priests, further staining such belief). The wars became the ones against either a leader of a country, who’s resources were needed and replaced with someone who would do as NATO told them to do, or well advertised wars against poverty and drugs, which brought further poverty and ever more drugs into western communities. After 1991, the communist was replaced with the terrorist.

By President Ronald Reagan’s exit from office, such neo-conservative, revisionist Zionists had infiltrated the US State Department and the Pentagon, taken control of foreign policy, and both the democrat and republican parties, and began to take over the republic. In their own bubble the neo-conservative Koch brothers have been doing the same thing.

Ironically, in the protracted war that became their downfall, the Soviet’s opponents in Afghanistan, were trained and armed by the US and UK, and would later become the opponents in the US/UK wars on terror. At the same time, after taking out Libya, the terrorists there would become ISIS, armed by the US/UK and inserted into Iraq and Syria. Where the US/UK then proceeded to pretend they bombed the living daylights out of them. While in actual fact the Iraqi and Syrian armies did all the heavy lifting and took the vast majority of casualties. Similar to the defeat of Nazi Germany, where nearly three-quarters of the over 5 million German fighters who died in the war, died fighting against the Soviets.

Today this rebellious group of the baby boomers are all over 70 years of age, and with many of the rest of us boomers who followed them, think we have changed our attitudes or behaviour since that time, but in many ways we have not. Writer Sebastian Gorka, affectionately and sardonically calls boomers, the fruit of the 60’s. We bought into, what James Kunstler describes as “a generation of nothing matters and anything goes” and “if it feels good, do it”. Ironically, today they’ve even got us apologizing for everything we had ever done while growing up, and for what our fathers and grandfathers had ever done.

The movements for peace, civil rights, the women’s movement, environmental concerns, and equal rights were cast aside, and pessimism and cultural irrationalism began to replace them. Nothing was long term anymore, many of the New Deal infrastructure projects like building highways and bridges, upgrading pipes, carrying out projects like the St Lawrence Seaway, building levees and dykes, and even the US Space Program, were either shelved or cancelled. It became all about short-term gains and pleasures, with future goods the sum of such pleasures. Corporations inflated their profits, thinking only of the next quarter, their goals all short term. But in doing so, they seem to have ignored the longer term realities of diminishing consumer purchasing power and sales. The power of money no longer served the real productive wealth of society. It became all about controlling it, and it flowed to the top. Ever since the early seventies, and after getting rid of the gold standard, the Globalist’s Federal Reserve opened the doors on US markets to the world, and though it made wealthy families insanely wealthy, to-date it has cost the US a current trade deficit of over US$12 trillion, a loss of over 70,000 factories, over 6 million jobs and a national debt of $22 trillion. The current US president may be trying to rectify this problem.

Following the first wave of boomers was the larger bulge of the boom, which peaked in 1959, of which I was included the year before. Many of our parents had been too young to have fought in WW II and most of them were already buying into the consumer capitalism model. By the time the rest of us baby boomers had come of age in the late 70’s and early 80’s most of us were already following the neo-liberal agenda like sheeple into the 1990s, and right up to the present day.

Voter participation declined, elections became a choice of personalities rather than a choice between alternatives, families began to break apart, and materialism, self-love, apathy, corruption and ego became all the rage. They played us like a flute, through our vanity and vices. They got us believing in self-indulgent market forces which in reality are removing any long term gain for future generations. So distracted we never stopped to think about our children’s or grand-children’s future.

Somehow all believing in unlimited growth upon a finite planet, we cruised through life avoiding the worst threats of nuclear annihilation, bombs being dropped on us, invasion, and economic depression, even as people in other countries suffered the consequences of superpower proxy wars, regime changes, and economic and environmental catastrophes. Many saw it coming, but as a majority said nothing, and we became the largest silent majority ever created in history. Along with the largest debt bubble ever created because we had to keep up to the Jones’s. We didn’t save for the future, we were indifferent to it, but our sheer numbers was soon deciding and influencing government policy, which since the early 90’s has been all based on age-based criteria of our own choosing and/or which we allowed to be implemented. Such a vast silent majority of the boomers, (70 per cent) is made up of mostly mainstream whites, because one cannot include minorities, which were being subjected to ill-treatment, racism and bigotry, or the immigrants who entered the Western world at the time, and who were raised differently, had a work ethic, assimilated into their communities, and were grateful.

We baby boomers (the youngest now 55 years old) biggest problem is that undoubtedly, after more than a half a century the majority of us, especially in Western countries, still hold our “ideals” as truths, but whose ideals. Whenever I see a new sports car with the top down on a sunny day, it’s always driven by a gray beard, not a man of action, rebellious or young. But then maybe that’s the point. We still dream for the white picket fenced, wraparound porch bungalow with a garden out back. Vacations to vineyards in Southern France and trips on cruise ships. Listening to the same music for fifty years, dance the same way, and still restoring, then just parking in a garage, our old, first cars. Snips, boob jobs, Botox, and lifts keep many pretty, but only from afar and not from inside. We creak at the knees, get used to our new hips, and are still hung up about something that happened thirty, forty years ago. We’re still popping pills, drinking like fish, and dressing like we’re twenty-one. And often, still acting like it. Our coping mechanism became cognitive dissonance, where we believe in things to be true when deep down we know they are untrue, and often wrong.

Ergo, many of the children of the boomers (Gen X) became the parents of today’s millennial’s. Like many of their parents, more often than not they had tossed aside the title of parent and became their child’s buddy instead. Thus, many millennial’s, born around the dawn of the 21st century, are a generation who have no understanding of cause and effect, effort and reward. Possessing no concept of humility yet expecting indulgence, they only allow happy thoughts and safe spaces of entitlement. This has been taught to them by both their parents and the government controlled neo-liberal dystopia called the public education system, from day-care as a baby to college. Authenticity, community and family all thrown aside in the pursuit of consumerism and fleeting fame, and that anyone can instantly become a pampered star, well friended or liked online, by simply generating controversy, and by being completely unashamed. While those millennials who happen to have been born white males, are often lumped in with all of us other white men, and blamed for all the world’s historical and contemporary evils.

Far too many of us boomers have also been afraid to rock the boat in any significant way by keeping it status quo for over forty years now. We all have a routine that simply must not be interrupted, with our neighbours now turning into tattle tales. Corporations have taken over democracy, with every natural resource and citizen a commodity, simply objects of trade and consumption and exploited to collapse. Populations lulled, misinformed and manipulated into surrendering their freedom and participation in government, through excess consumerism, sensationalism, and “manufactured consent”. It’s no wonder Alzheimer’s, the most common cause of dementia by damaging nerve connections in the brain, is also one of the fastest rising diseases. Our electro-chemical computer brain is short-circuiting. Or as someone once said, “We are running 21st century software on hardware last upgraded 50,000 years ago”.

We are also deathly afraid of losing our internet and phone, even though the globalists control most all global internet media, through companies like Google, Amazon, YouTube and Facebook, who is attempting to replace the American National Security Agency (NSA), which is responsible for global monitoring, collection, and processing of information and data for foreign and domestic intelligence and counterintelligence purposes of foreign governments and populations, including their own. And as of late are even attempting to create a “global” currency. Mainstream media in general is nothing but a corporate owned and corporate-advertiser funded mouth piece that is so well versed, has made us believe in the illusion that we have a choice in what is told to us.

As to controlling the narrative in the Western world, other than local stories and events, and parts of the internet, today, all news stories broadcast by mainstream news networks and most all newspapers, comes from only three international news organizations. They include the New York-based Associated Press (AP), founded in 1846. With only 4,000 employees, their stories reach over half the global population. The French, Agence France-Presse (AFP) founded in 1835, today it has over 4,000 employees in 201 locations in 151 countries. And the London-based Reuters (1851), part of a Canadian multinational media conglomerate owned by Thomson Reuters. As of 2019, current chairman David Thomson is listed as the wealthiest person in Canada, with an estimated net worth of $37.7 billion, and in the top thirty of richest people in the world. From these three entities come all our news stories, which are then simply copied and translated, with the same “key” words accented, and often presented with the same bias.

Crucial to the globalist’s control of the narrative was “Operation Mockingbird”. Started up in the early 1950’s, they used the US’s Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) to carry out psychological operations in the form of journalism to influence and direct mass opinion, as well as elite perspectives. They began bankrolling more than twenty-five foreign and domestic, press and news media wire services, magazines, publishing and newspapers, influencing media executives and reporters, and even inserting their own agents as reporters. Their reach extended into the New York Times, Washington Post, Disney, CBS, ABC news, Time magazine, Newsweek, and the National Enquirer, among many others. Today one can add CNN and MSNBC. They also bankrolled radio and TV broadcasting of Voice of America, Radio Free Europe, in Eastern Europe, Radio Liberty, and National Public Radio (NPR).

The operation is carried out by cooperating or unwitting reporters, who are given CIA written reports which are then repeated or cited, by the recipient reporters and would then, in turn, be cited throughout the media wire services and spread outwards. The mantra remaining the same, for it is a fact that people are more likely to believe that something is true after hearing it used many times. Nazi Germany, the Soviets, and China had all perfected such a phenomenon, where people will mistake repeated assertions for truth. Such a tactic is still very much in use today. It is what advertising and propaganda are based on.

As David Rockefeller of The Trilateral Commission, admitted in 1991, “We are grateful to The Washington Post, The New York Times, Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subject to the bright lights of publicity during those years. But, the work is now much more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The supra-national sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto determination practised in past centuries.”

Also over the past forty years, especially after the fall of the Soviet Union, the globalists have also controlled most all Western countries’ status quo leadership circles, and the bias of the unelected government officials under them, who are called the deep state. And whether it’s a government or a corporate bureaucracy, both seem to show that perhaps Laurence J. Peter’s 1968, the “Peter Principle” has peaked. The Peter Principle is the logical idea that competent employees in a hierarchy will be promoted, but at a certain point will be promoted into positions for which they are incompetent. And that they will remain in those positions because they do not demonstrate any further competence that would move them up to the next level. Peter wrote, “Look around you where you work, and pick out the people who have reached their level of incompetence. You will see that in every hierarchy the cream rises until it sours. According to the Peter Principle, every position in a given hierarchy will eventually be filled by employees who are incompetent to fulfill the job duties of their respective positions. With everyone, going through the motions and keeping their eye on the prize, the pension lottery, even if it takes the best years of their lives to get there.

After the Israeli/Saudi operation 9/11, it only got worse. From Western Europe, through Belgium, France and Germany, the Scandinavian countries, the UK, Canada, New Zealand, and Australia among others, the globalist’s tentacles have reached far, some deeper than others. But the number is dwindling, with some of their vassals beginning to devour themselves. Especially places like the UK, Canada, Australia, and the US where the political beliefs of family and community of the silent-majority were predominately center-right or center-left with not much difference between them, but which is now being exterminated, as we stand in silence of our own demise.

The US on the other hand, was run by globalists up until three years ago, but since the 2016 election, this dynamic is changing, and has become a war between the globalist supported progressive socialist left, and the Trump administration. Because the status quo neo-liberal bipartisan neo-conservative Bush-Clinton-Obama crime families, are being dismissed, their cover blown.

It looks like the current US president’s agenda is stalling such globalization by trying to re-set supply chains, battling central banking and intelligence agencies, and weeding out corrupted unelected officials. The globalists who had been gleefully running things are losing their minds. Some fear and desperation has maybe taken hold with the current worldwide push on deglobalization, which would obviously disrupt their plans and agendas. Deglobalization will affect those nations who rely on exports the most, make the stock market volatile, harm, and in some cases destroy the Globalist’s central banks’ investments.

The globalists are also incensed that the US economy today is in reality holding steady, but their big banks on Wall Street are anxiously pacing back and forth, because their investments overseas are being exposed. They are also angry that the stock market is head-shakingly thriving. And angry that the current administration is in a war with China, trying to get the trade deficit under control, and in a war against the globalist’s private bank, the Federal Reserve, which is trying to do more harm than advertised by making decisions, hoping that by grounding the US economy the current president will not be re-elected. Their ultimate plan is to actually destroy the US’s hegemony, based on “ordo ab chao” (order out of the chaos). For chaos is actually what they want, and today, after forty years of trying, they’re nearly there, just as they were in the sixties and early seventies. Chaos will allow them to implement even more tyrannical control. The last straw will be when the US Constitution gets torn in half. And if they are unable to control the narrative and “dissidence” gets too out of control they’ll simply shut the internet down. Imagine that for a moment. It’d be like billions of heroin junkies, not getting their next fix and having no idea what to do.

While nations like Russia, Iran, and India, among a growing list of others, are not looking to be the next empire, but instead want their own sovereignty, living in a multi-polar world not a uni-polar one. They’d like to be left alone from the globalist’s and the neo-con/Zionists’ disruptive foreign policies, neo-liberal ideologies, intelligence and military industries, and their blind zeal for Armageddon. And would rather get on with such things as getting onboard China’s “Belt and Road Initiative”, where sovereign nations can trade freely with each other across Africa, Asia and Europe.

Martin Jacques, a senior fellow at Cambridge University, describes the Belt and Road Initiative (New Silk Roads) as offering “an alternative to the existing international order. The present international order was designed by and still essentially privileges the rich world, which represents only 15 per cent of the world’s population. BRI, on the other hand, is addressing at least two-thirds of the world’s population. This is extraordinarily important for this moment in history.” He goes on to say that the BRI “has the potential to offer another kind of world, another set of values, another set of imperatives, another way of organizing, another set of institutions, and another set of relationships.”

The Belt and Road is now configured as a vast, unique, Eurasia-wide infrastructure and trade development project extending all the way to Africa and Latin America. Currently more than 130 countries are engaged in linked projects, and partnering with 29 international organizations from the World Bank to the APEC, the Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation.

China meanwhile is no doubt one of the only countries truly interested in imperialism, but has taken the long road approach, as is their nature. Today their influence is everywhere, and we chose to ignore it for the past thirty years, because it was cheap to do so.

And though the US gets ever more antagonistic, Russia and China don’t actually project much power outside their own borders, though within, they are very much in control and very well defended. Russia does attempt to project power, but if you notice it’s only over the Russian territories it lost as punishment for losing the Cold War. While China is starting to project more military power, they have already shown what they can do with economic power and influence.

Today the globalists are also in a fight because once again, people are simply not buying their bullshit any more. It’s “Blowin in the Wind” all over again. Whether an economic system which only benefits those at the top, progressive socialist propaganda and policies, a surveillance state, never ending wars, or a perhaps false fear, of climate change and over-population.

Just maybe, before history’s largest silent majority say goodbye, we can put on our big-boy and big-girl pants and pull our heads out of our butts. It’s not all about us individually, it never was, and we should have already learned that. Especially when, it is becoming ever more obvious that those at the top, being typical psychopaths, are allowing their arrogance to eventually be their downfall. They are currently exposing themselves because they don’t care anymore what we think or that we know. If status quo remains, the next generation will be divided, obedient and docile to an extreme, and of course heavily medicated. At which time can be easily culled from the herd when needed.

But the globalists are still very much a force to be reckoned with, their representatives include George Soros and his foundation, the Open Society, the Bilderberg Group, the Royal Family, the Roman Catholic Church, the CIA affiliated National Endowment for Democracy (NED), the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) and people like Al Gore, Bill Gates, Bono, the Davos crowd that attend the World Economic Forum seminars every year, and mainstream media and Hollywood.This also includes the gala three day meetings a few times a year in some luxury avenue, where the stars of Hollywood and mainstream media (the influencers), hobnob with a gaggle of egotistic billionaires (the controllers), having polite talks about climate change and how to keep the masses entertained and distracted. To get to the grand affair many come in their super yachts, some flying in first class but most in their own or charted private aircraft. Then fly, sail and/or be driven home to their mansions and palaces and get their teeth re-whitened and faces lifted.

The globalists are estimated to still control well over 40 per cent of the entire global economy through 147 very tightly knit mega-corporations, which are managed by only four firms, The Vanguard Group, McGraw-Hill, CME Group, and Barclays. Together, they dominate the world of indexing, meaning they hold much power over the world’s money. The Vanguard Group,an American investment management company, is the largest provider of mutual funds in the world, managing over US$3 trillion. They were the biggest shareholder in Monsanto, before it was recently sold for US$63 billion to one of the world’s largest pharmaceutical and genetically-modified-food companies, Bayer AG. Vanguard is also the biggest shareholder in Halliburton, as Dick Cheney is one of the bigger shareholders in Vanguard. They are also the second biggest shareholder in Facebook, the third biggest in Whole Foods, the second biggest in Hain Celestial Foods, and the biggest shareholder in the largest defence corporation in the world, Lockheed Martin.

In a large nut shell, the globalist’s agendas are behind zoning, land and water use control, wealth redistribution, one currency, cap and trade, smart grid of AI and 5G, smart meters, carbon taxes, high gasoline prices, global citizens, global public education system, common core nationalized education standards, bio-fuels, Marxist ideology advancing across the world, food control, gun control, health control, unchecked immigration and open borders so as to strip countries of their identity, and color-coded uprisings and other coups against the few countries left in the world who do not abide by the globalist’s central bank system.

In many ways it can be said the globalists are fascists disguised as Marxist socialists. For though Russian communist Vladimir Lenin (1870-1924), called fascism “capitalism in decay”, the founder of fascism, Italian Benito Mussolini (1883-1945) described it where, “Fascism should more appropriately be called Corporatism because it is a merger of state and corporate power.” In actual fact fascism is a form of radical authoritarian nationalism, and maliciously anti-liberal, anti-communist and anti-conservative. To confuse things even further or perhaps just Orwellian logic, the progressive left’s violent black attired, hooded and masked, social justice terrorists, call themselves Antifa (anti-fascists).

While this state of affairs has been playing out over the last few years, the globalists have accelerated pushing the basis for Agenda 21, as well as their 2030 Agenda, by using the fears of climate change and over population, whether they are real or not. This is what they tell us, and many believe. As such we are becoming demoralized and disengaged, with more and more people feeling confused, insecure, divided and feeling helpless in their acceptance of victimhood. We are even passing this on to our children. There are perhaps tens of millions of pre-teens who now believe the world is going to end in ten years. Hello anxiety and panic attacks. How dare we do such a thing to our children? While the silent majority are unwilling to speak out or take risks of any kind for fear of losing their job, knowing there is perhaps no other job to go to, and of losing family, house and home. Or the worst, shun from their tribe.

With a soon to be human population of eight billion, for life to go on for those at the top, a plan had to be implemented to control such expanding growth and most importantly, to control such numbers. They boldly and insanely, seem to hold the fictional book 1984, written by George Orwell in 1949, as a template of how a totalitarian complex can control and manage the world and every person’s identity.Where, “War is peace. Freedom is slavery. Ignorance is strength.”

Since the early 1970’s globalist/totalitarian states have risen slowly and quietly, with most tyrants, but a puppet to the globalists. It begins with a controlled economic decline, which sometimes takes generations. Then through economic systems such as inflation, low wages, and an inadequate job market, make people rely on government. Get them tuning out, turning on, or simply overwhelmed and distracted with their daily existence. Then get the people to trade freedom for the illusion of safety. American statesman, diplomat, author, scientist, and inventor, Ben Franklin (1706-1790), thought that “Those who trade liberty for a little bit of security deserve neither”. Which I totally agree with, since it leads to the end of personal sovereignty.

Gradually the populace will become desperate and lack a greater purpose or mission in life, and eventually come to the realization they have neither productive capacity nor self-empowerment, and lose all sense of independence and look for others instead of themselves to solve their problems. This is when many deem themselves a victim. Next up, control subversiveness, where no one dares to do anything outside of collective norms for fear they would be interpreted as socially negative, and finally and just as importantly, de-weaponize and feminize the populace. A world where one must always be politically correct, all follow the same narrative, and not to upset others or the government.

After years of research of all sides, and looking out my window everyday living on a boat, and not being a scientist or educated, my personal theory on climate change is that the atmosphere is a chemistry experiment, adding and subtracting molecules, as are the oceans and the land, and that a disruption to normal climate cycles has already happened, and there is not anything humanity can do about it, except to not make it worse. This was already known in the 1970’s but like everything else that was rubbed out at that time it was squelched until later when it would be needed as an excuse. Much like the excuse the US used for dropping two atomic bombs, and fire-bombing all of Japan’s major cities, killing nearly one million people in one week, and which they would have kept doing, to save the lives of American troops who would eventually have had to storm empty beaches.

Weather will become extreme, and like we have been doing for thousands of years we will have to adapt, and will have time to adapt. Any impacts we have made on the atmosphere and the environment can be off-set with continued climate action which will allow the planet’s weather to get back to its normal cyclical rhythm. The tipping point may have passed, but won’t really affect us for another few decades, when it may get severe, but eventually would change, as it always has. Remember no matter what we do to the surface of this planet, and whether we are here or not, it will continue to unfeelingly spin for many more billions of years, going through ice ages, volcanic eruptions, and earthquakes, which all will cause climate disruption. I figure the most critical issues to a disrupted climate would be either too much water or not enough, and the resilience of ecosystems. I also think that climate disruption is the least of our worries, but of course only if it does not interfere with our need for fresh drinking water and food because regardless of anything else, without such basic needs our species will die. Though many today will feel as though they have died if the internet ever shuts down or they can’t turn their phone on.

The globalists and their central banks that are running their “grand green design”, called the Green New Deal in the US, believe that green “low energy flux density” sources of energy would constrict global population and that is exactly what they want.British scientist and pioneer of the sustainable development movement, and who co-founded the Club of Rome in 1968,Alexander King, wrote in 1990, “In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill…. All these dangers are caused by human intervention, and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome. The real enemy then, is humanity itself.”

In order to keep the house of cards standing, it has been postulated that such people-hating globalist’s plans hinge on sacrificing the working poor, the impoverished, seniors on fixed incomes, people with disabilities and the tens of millions of people living between starvation and death. Afterwards, the percentage of people left will continue status quo, then a few years down the road, with ever more dwindling resources, another cull would then be needed. It is why most democratic and liberal cities ignore gang violence, oppose school choice, promote abortion, support socialism, and neglect poor inner city neighbourhoods because they know those “folks” are simply victimizing each other, and doing their job for them.

This is why global warming is still a debate, for it will conveniently affect those who will-not or cannot adapt to a changing environment. The first to go will be the poorest and most vulnerable, including their livelihoods, homes, and children. Indeed, some of the most wealthy and powerful on the planet have their sanctuaries already built all around the globe, and ready to move into at a moment’s notice. Sanctuaries, whether desolate, underground or not, surrounded by a well defendable wall. Yet they don’t want walls separating nations. Regardless, they have quietly prepared for when the storm of chaos they created finally hits the fan. They will then make even more money and gain even more power through “disaster capitalism”. They made the cake so I guess they get to eat it too. Heck, they’ve already licked off all the icing.

Climate change aside, for there has always been, and though we have altered even that, we have time to change our ways and consumption habits ingrained in us by the establishment. And once again, as we have always done throughout human history, we will have to adapt. As to the effects of our consumption, we’ve left a trail of deforestation, compromised fresh water sources, degradation of top soil and ecosystems, “dead zone” ocean acidification, disrupted climate conditions, and pollution of our rivers, lakes, seas, the air we breathe, and our minds. We have also degraded our moral values, and any critical or rational thinking. This is all on us, so we must start talking to each other. We are all equal, except for our individual ideas.

We’ve spent the last fifty years believing in an economic system that was corrupt and rigged from the start, and which only benefited the already rich. It’s all too much. Because we also have to live our daily lives, simply trying to make ends meet, care for our family and friends, interact with perhaps the one hundred people we see regularly in our lives and who make up our tribe. Have a job and a purpose to get up in the morning, to love and be loved, and have the courage to keep putting one step in front of the other.

But don’t worry the globalists have a plan. But we must remember such a plan doesn’t have to be this way. Only we can derail it. But sadly and wishing I didn’t have to say it, after saying nothing for over forty-five years already we probably won’t this time either. And though there is still hope, the numbers who are addicted to Aldous Huxley’s “soma” dictate something all together different. All the while we take another bite from the apple, the other hand anxiously clutching a smart phone.

It’s like we’ve become packs of dogs where after a talking head stands up, points somewhere and yells “squirrel” at the top of their lungs, we all go off running, barking our heads off. But we are supposedly smarter than dogs, so we’ll go off running whenever a MSM talking head comes up with any number of words to replace the word squirrel, whether Russia!, Racist!, Ukraine! or Impeach! Then like a pack of dogs chasing a car and catching up to it, we don’t know what to do about it when we get there.

As of late, the countries that are still adhering to Agenda 21 and 30 are all ever more rapidly pumping out disinformation to get their plans in place, even using children as their “spokespersons”. Countries are now declaring “national climate emergencies”, which is odd because climate change is global not national. The fear of rising sea levels is used for creating plans to sterilize waterfront from development, building levees and dykes, and buying out, then destroying homes in vulnerable areas. Then control access and use of the shoreline. In reality, sea levels will become a major problem in about fifty to eighty years, but then, even a rise of only half a foot will impact many places and people around the world. They will continue to rise if the melting of snow pack and glaciers on land continues, not from the melting of sea ice at the poles. Don’t believe me? Take a glass of water with an ice cube in it and fill to just before it would overflow, then just wait for the ice cube to melt.

Once again we have the time to adapt to rising sea levels, if we so choose. At the same time globalist environmental groups such as the WWF are running campaigns to disrupt the flow of natural gas to countries like South Africa, India, the Philippines, South Korea, Japan and China, so these same countries are instead building a combined 1,800 new coal-fired plants, which emit twice as much carbon dioxide as natural gas plants. As it is, urbanization and deforestation effects climate disruption as much or more than fossil-fuel emissions. Consider the push for bio-fuels, which means more rain forests are deforested, and then huge palm oil plantations are planted in their stead to supply the needed ingredients for bio-fuel. Leaders in municipalities in many countries are even pushing to sue fossil-fuel companies for causing climate change, yet 70 per cent of their emissions come from their own populations.

One must also consider the early 20th century proponents of the use of eugenics to control the population, because in the globalist’s mind’s eye things like CO2 emissions or consumption of resources is not the problem, people are.

In the 1920s, various theories of eugenics were so popular among intellectuals in the US that 75 per cent of colleges offered courses on eugenics. When researching the medical experiments, including sterilization programs, which went on around this time on unsuspecting people in Latin America, the Philippines, and the US itself, I had to swallow the bile that rose in my throat.

In 1916, Margaret Sanger (1879-1966) opened the first birth control clinic in the US (Brooklyn); in 1942 it would become Planned Parenthood. Sanger believed that birth control and sterilization should be voluntary, and not based on race, and that all women should have the right to choose when to be pregnant. Out of the other side of her mouth she agreed with much of what the proponents of eugenics believed, to “assist the race toward the elimination of the unfit”, and advocated “the voluntary hospitalization or sterilization of people with untreatable, disabling, hereditary conditions, and limits on the immigration of the diseased”.

Until 1973, Planned Parenthood provided services such as birth control, clinical breast examinations, cervical cancer screening, pregnancy testing and pregnancy options counselling, testing and treatment for sexually transmitted infections, sex education and vasectomies. But after the landmark abortion rights case Roe v Wade that year, they also began acting as an abortion provider. Since 1973, in the US there have been more than 56 million abortions performed (17 million black), half were performed by Planned Parenthood. This number does not include abortions carried out in California (about 13 per cent of the US population) or New Hampshire, since they have both failed to report the numbers since 1998.

In their 2014 Annual Report, Planned Parenthood, with over 600 clinics in the US (80 per cent of which are in poor and predominately black communities), reported seeing over 2.5 million patients in over 4 million clinical visits, and performing a total of nearly 9.5 million discrete services for them, including 324,000 abortions, with 900 black babies aborted every day. Planned Parenthood is also global, with more than 149 member associations working in more than 189 countries. Its combined annual revenue is US$1.3 billion, including approximately $530 million in government funding.

Four years after Planned Parenthood’s inception, Eugenics Society president and UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization) founder Julian Huxley, agreed with many others, including Margaret Sanger, that much of the population were “undesirables and weeds”. He wrote in 1946, “Political unification in some sort of world government will be required… Even though… any radical eugenic policy will be for many years politically and psychologically impossible, it will be important for UNESCO to see that the eugenic problem is examined with the greatest care, and that the public mind is informed of the issues at stake so that much that now is unthinkable may at least become thinkable.” But Hitler had given eugenics and propaganda, a bad name over the previous years so they had to be re-branded. And they were. They were now called “sustainability” and “public relations”.

In 1968, and in order to keep the ball rolling, the Club of Rome was formed by two misanthropes named Aurelio Peccei, and the previously mentioned Sir Alexander King. Its members would include current and former heads of state, the Royal Family, UN bureaucrats, high-level politicians and government officials, diplomats, scientists, economists, and business leaders from around the globe. They promise they share a common concern for the future of humanity and strive to make a difference. And all agree that society’s best form of governance is a scientific dictatorship.

Bertrand Russell (1872 -1970), a British philosopher, mathematician, historian, writer, social critic, political activist, and Nobel laureate also argued for a “scientific society”, where he thought war would be abolished, population growth would be limited, and prosperity would be shared. He felt the establishment of a “single supreme world government” would be able to enforce peace.

In Quebec in 1971, the Club of Rome got Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau to allocate tax payer money to begin a two year project to write a book called The Limits to Growth, which became the blueprint of this new anti-humanist form of the eugenics movement by fooling us in believing they are simply consciously reforming the system, and which would eventually birth today’s Green New Deal agenda. Interestingly, while the progressive neo-socialists are demanding Medicare for all, free college, and universal basic income, it is actually encouraged and orchestrated by the hundreds of billions of dollars the globalists have made from the banking, healthcare, national defence and higher education cartels.

Along with Trudeau, a group of the already mentioned Oxford trained Rhodes Scholars on the Council on Foreign Relations, and privy councillors centered on Alexander King, Maurice Strong, Maurice Lamontagne (founder of Environment Canada), Michael Pitfield (Privy Council Clerk and founder of Canada’s CSIS) and Governor General Roland Michener, among others, also all agreed to the study.

In 1972, The Limits to Growth (LTG) was published by the Volkswagen Foundation, (nothing to do with the car company), a large German private non-profit organization for the promotional of research and education in the sciences, social sciences, and humanities. Seventeen researchers ran three simulations of exponential economic and population growth with a finite supply of resources, to gain insights into the limits of our world system and the constraints it puts on human numbers and activity. All three scenarios were based on five variables: world population, industrialization, pollution, food production and resources depletion. They did not include any data, projections or theories about climate change. The three scenarios given were, keeping the status quo, with “no changes to historical growth trends, the limits to growth on earth would become evident by 2072, leading to sudden and uncontrollable decline in both population and industrial capacity”. The second was if growth trends existing in 1972 could be altered so that sustainable ecological and economic stability could be achieved. The third was that they could be changed. They admit “that their projections for the values of the variables in each scenario were predictions “only in the most limited sense of the word,” and were only indications of the system’s behavioural tendencies.” Two of the scenarios saw “overshoot and collapse” of the global system by the mid to latter part of the 21st century, while a third scenario resulted in a “stabilized world”.

Critics argued that the report claimed to accept that the then-known resources of minerals and energy could, and would, grow in the future, and consumption growth rates could also decline. Others agreed that growth could not continue indefinitely, but that a natural end to growth was preferable to intervention. They also wrote that technology could solve all the problems the report brings up, but only if growth continued apace. They warned that by “stopping growth too soon, the world would be “consigning billions to permanent poverty”.

On the other side of the coin in 2010, a report by the Danes, Nørgård, Peet and Ragnarsdóttir, called the book a “pioneering report”, and said that it “has withstood the test of time and, indeed, has only become more relevant.” And, “With few exceptions, economics as a discipline has been dominated by a perception of living in an unlimited world, where resource and pollution problems in one area were solved by moving resources or people to other parts. The very hint of any global limitation as suggested in the report was met with disbelief and rejection by businesses and most economists. However, this conclusion was mostly based on false premises”.

A year after The Limits to Growth was published, the Trilateral Commission was founded by David Rockefeller. It is a non-governmental, non-partisan discussion group of nearly 400 mostly private industrialists and bankers to “foster closer cooperation among North America, Western Europe, and Japan”. Other founding members included Alan Greenspan and Paul Volcker, both later heads of the globalist’s Federal Reserve System, and Zbigniew Brzezinski, US National Security Advisor to President Jimmy Carter from 1977 to 1981, and a Rockefeller advisor. At one of their first meetings, in 1976 in Kyoto, Japan, they discussed a process for the “controlled disintegrations of society”.

In 2012, Noam Chomsky described the Trilateral Commission as essentially, “liberal internationalists from Europe, Japan and the United States, and the liberal wing of the intellectual elite”, and that the Commission, “was concerned with trying to induce what they called ‘more moderation in democracy’ – turn people back to passivity and obedience so they don’t put so many constraints on state power and so on. In particular they were worried about young people. They were concerned about the institutions responsible for the indoctrination of the young (that’s their phrase), meaning schools, universities, church and so on – they’re not doing their job, [the young are] not being sufficiently indoctrinated. They’re too free to pursue their own initiatives and concerns and you’ve got to control them better.”

And so they have, in many Western nations, including Canada, the UK, Australia, New Zealand, Sweden, Poland, Germany, France, and especially in the US, the globalists control the kindergarten to university education system, the psychological establishment, their Medical Associations, mainstream news, the entertainment establishments, the law system, silicon valley, other corporations, and a very deep state of unelected government officials. Though this does not include the military per se, the military’s general officer corps has been corrupted for decades.

Such control is needed to create a true social state. Further control is carried out by controlling healthcare, because once this is done you control the people, then increase the poverty level, because poor people are easier to control and will not fight back if you are providing everything for them to live, and more often than not will only harm themselves. Increase the debt to an unsustainable level which allows one to raise taxes, which produces more poverty. Remove people’s ability to defend themselves from the government and the bad guys. Enact gun laws that only affect those who get a license, get an extensive back ground check, and take a course and practise, so that the only ones left with guns will be the bad guys and the police. Because the bad guys don’t buy guns in gun stores; they don’t even bother with a licence, they buy them out of the trunk of a car. And who predominately reside in communities where people are not allowed to protect themselves. Home invasions would sky-rocket.

The end game is to take control of every aspect of our lives (food, housing and income) through welfare programs and surveillance systems, asset forfeiture, eminent domain and over criminalization. Cancel presumption of innocence and due process. Take control of what people read, watch and listen to. Remove the belief in Christianity and family values from the government and schools. And finally divide the people into as many ways possible, whether race, sex, nationality, religion, culture, gender, left, right, center, sports team affiliation, what side of the street you live on, tatted or not, wealthy, poor, liberal, or conservative. This will cause more despondency, anger, jealously, violence, victimhood, and bigotry so that one day “the vast majority of people will have no idea what’s going on and they won’t care”. By then we probably won’t even be talking to each other anymore anyways.

“Circus dogs jump when the trainer cracks his whip, but the really well-trained dog is the one that turns his somersault when there is no whip” George Orwell

Part Two

The Innards and Machinations of Agenda 21

…….Coming soon.


Mesopotamia – Sunshine Supermen

Chapter III – Mesopotamia

Mesopotamia has been home to some of the oldest major civilizations, including the Sumerians, Akkadians, Babylonians, Assyrians, and Persians. Grouped together they are known as the Chaldean. It began with the rise of the first cities in southern Mesopotamia around 7,300 years ago and ended with the Persian conquest around 2,500 years ago. The achievements of these early astronomers, especially the Persians, and later Islamic, which I will include in this chapter, though not being significant until the seventh century A.D., were extremely significant to astronomy.

Tablet Of Shamash / historyly.com

By about 2,500 years ago, the Sumerian civilization was firmly established in Mesopotamia, during the archaeological period of Uruk. These early Sumerians saw the night sky as a blackboard on which the gods left cryptic messages. Their priests began to seriously and systematically observe the stars and planet’s movements, with a form of writing, known as cuneiform, also emerging around this time. The Sumerians would only practise a basic form of astronomy, but they had an important influence on the sophisticated astronomy of the later Babylonians, when astral theologies would give planetary gods an important role in mythology and religion.

Celestial phenomena, known as portents, have become linked to earthly events for millennia. Centuries of Babylonian observations of celestial phenomena are recorded in the series of cuneiform tablets known as the Enu‑ma Anu Enlil, a collection of nearly seven thousand portents dating back to about 3,500 years ago. The oldest significant astronomical text is carved into Tablet 63, the Venus tablet of Ammi‑saduqa, which lists the first and last visible risings of Venus over a period of about 21 years and show the first evidence of recognition that astronomical phenomena are periodic, and of the application of mathematics to these predictions.  All the portents were considered affairs of the state, since the priests believed that the gods used the sky to communicate great matters.

As such, the study of astronomy in most all ancient cultures became associated with omens, and within these Babylonian tablets the many omens were divided into four categories. Each named for the four gods (planets) under whose area they fell.

The Sin (the Moon) covered eclipses, conjunctions with fixed stars, and first crescents, its symbol represents the lunar first quarter, or the “sickle moon”, with its shape also representing the Moon itself, and, of Islam.

The Shamash (the Sun), were the observations of two suns solar halos, and perihelia (the point in the orbit of a planet or comet at which it is nearest to the Sun).

Ishtar (Venus) listed the stations, risings, and first and last visibilities (what planets we can see with the naked eye). The time a planet becomes visible in the dawn sky (rising shortly before the Sun), to the time it disappears into the dark sky is called an apparition.

Adad (the Weather god), recorded a variety of meteorological phenomena, such as thunder, lightning, earth tremors and cloud formations. These tablets also contain catalogues of stars and constellations as well as schemes for predicting heliacal risings and the settings of the planets, which occurs annually when they briefly become visible above the eastern horizon at dawn just before sunrise, after a period of less than a year when it had not been visible.

The Ammi‑saduqa also tell the lengths of daylight measured by a water clock, a gnomon, and shadows, as well as the application of mathematics to the variation in the length of daylight over a solar year. Also listed was a complete list of the helical risings and settings of the planet Venus. Star charts taken from this time are inscribed in clay tablets and show three concentric circles, each one divided up by 12 radii, with each of these 36 equally sized divisions containing the names of the constellations. It seems even the Sumerians knew the precession (a change in the orientation of the rotational axis of a rotating body), of the equinoxes (constellations), which is incredible.

To know about the precession of the equinoxes, where each constellation takes a turn at rising behind the rising Sun, (the observable phenomena of the rotation of the heavens), one would have to observe and take measurements, for thousands of years. Consider, the precession of the equinoxes spans a period of approximately, 25,920 years, over which time the constellations appear to slowly rotate around the Earth, (the observable phenomena of the rotation of the heavens), so how long could the Sumerians, and those before them, had studied and observed such events, one needs to ask. If indeed this was the case these ancient astronomers had already figured out one of the theories that Einstein would mathematically prove six thousand years later. That space does indeed perform the central function of time.

The precession of the equinoxes is where every 25,900 years the Earth’s axis of rotation changes. This slow change in the angle of the axis makes it appear that the positions of stars change over time, for example, the North Star today is Polaris, five thousand years ago it was Thuban, two thousand years from now it will be Alrai. The angle change causes the constellations of the zodiac to change relative to the spring equinox (April 21). In this precession the constellations appear to move backwards as time moves forwards, moving to the next constellation every 2,150 years.

Presently the Sun on April 21 rises in the constellation of Pisces. A few hundred years from now it will rise in the constellation of Aquarius, which is to say that every 25,900 years, each constellation will have had its turn rising in the east on April 21

Soon astrology, the idea that the position of the stars and planets could influence the fate of individual humans, by the differences in energy from the universe, began with the organization of the original 18 groups of stars into 12 constellations, where each became associated with a specific deity, for instance Orion was a shepherd with his sheep and his shepherds staff. The origins of much of astrological doctrine and method are found among the ancient Babylonians and their system of celestial omens that began to be compiled around this time. This system of celestial omens later spread either directly or indirectly from the Sumerians then, through the Babylonians and Assyrians to other areas such as India, Middle East, and Greece where it merged with pre‑existing indigenous forms of astrology. Babylonian astrology came to Greece around 2,400 years ago, and then around 2,100 years ago, after the Alexandrian conquests, this Babylonian astrology was mixed with the Egyptian tradition of deity astrology to create a diagram of the heavens showing the positions of the planets. This new form of astrology appears to have originated in Alexandrian Egypt, and then quickly spread back across the ancient world into Europe, the Middle East and India, where it still very much exists today.

As to astronomy, because a chapter further along discusses astrology, by 2,800 years ago, observations had become so organized that most all planetary movements were understood and observed. There are dozens of cuneiform Mesopotamia texts with real observations of eclipses, mainly from the Babylonian Era, that show they had the ability to predict eclipses of the sun and moon. Which gave no doubt that Babylonia was using highly-developed geometry as the basis for astronomical measurements. For example they arranged stars in “strings” that lie along declination circles and thus were able to measure ascensions (risings) or time intervals. They also used the star’s zenith, the highest point it reaches.

As to astronomy, because a chapter further along discusses astrology, by 2,800 years ago, observations had become so organized that most all planetary movements were understood and observed. There are dozens of cuneiform Mesopotamia texts with real observations of eclipses, mainly from the Babylonian Era, that show they had the ability to predict eclipses of the sun and moon. Which gave no doubt that Babylonia was using highly-developed geometry as the basis for astronomical measurements. For example they arranged stars in “strings” that lie along declination circles and thus were able to measure ascensions (risings) or time intervals. They also used the star’s zenith, the highest point it reaches.

In mathematics they came up with the idea of dividing up circles into 360 degrees, splitting up an hour into 60 minutes, and the same with a minute to 60 seconds, by using a sexagesimal system (based on the number 60 and relating to or reckoning by sixtieths). This simplified the task of recording very large and very small numbers. Under the realm of the Babylonian king, Nabonassar, around 2,700 years ago, there was a surge in quality and frequency in recorded observations, including the discovery of a repeating 18‑year cycle of lunar eclipses for example, which they called a saros.

One of many clay tablets unearthed from the Assyrian king Assurbanipal’s era (about 2,600 yrs ago), contained the vast number: 195,955,200,000,000. It is called the Nineveh number and is 60 times 70 to the power of seven. Working it out in seconds, it is a bit more than six million years. The time it takes for the earth to complete its precessional cycle (the regular motion of a spinning object) is just less than 26,000 years. Dividing this number into the Nineveh number, works out to be exactly 240 precessional cycles. Calculating the cycles of the planets and their satellites in seconds, each divides into the Nineveh number exactly. This is amazing mathematics at any time, let alone more than two and a half thousand years ago.

By 2,700 years ago Babylonian astronomy began to conform to present reckonings. A new calendar was then introduced that had 354 days, regulated into 12 months, alternating between 29 and 30 days. The New Year started with the appearance of the first new moon following the spring equinox. But this arrangement lagged behind the solar calendar by about 11 days so it was always falling out of time with the seasons. They solved the problem by noting that 235 lunar months made up exactly 19 solar years, so they decreed that seven extra lunar months would be inter-calculated every 19 lunar years to close the gap. This became known as the Nabunasir Calender.

Around this time the Babylonian astronomers also began to develop a new empirical approach to astronomy. They began studying philosophy dealing with the ideal nature of the universe and began employing an internal logic within their predictive planetary systems. This was an important contribution to astronomy and the philosophy of science, and some scholars have referred to this new approach as the first scientific revolution. And was closely related to the fact most of these early astronomers were actually priest-scribes specializing in astrology and other forms of divination. This new approach to astronomy was adopted and further developed in Hellenistic (Greek) astronomy.

Around 300 years later, in the fourth century BC, the Greek, Eudoxus of Cnidus wrote a book on the fixed stars, with his descriptions of many constellations, especially the twelve signs of the zodiac, are suspiciously very similar to Babylonian originals. One hundred years later the Greek, Aristarchus of Samos, used an eclipse cycle of Babylonian origin called the Saros cycle to determine the year’s length. It is clear that by this time, many other Greek astronomers had a complete list of eclipse observations covering many centuries, and mostly all compiled from the earlier mentioned Sumerian’s clay tablets, the Enu-ma Anu Enlil, and from the relevant observations that the Babylonians had routinely made and recorded also.             

Around the same time, back in Babylonia, the astronomer/priest Kidinnu worked out the duration of the solar year to within 4min 33sec, which western astronomers did not achieve until less than 150 years ago. The Babylonians observed Halley’s Comet in 164 BC, and again in 87 BC, and determined that it passes the Earth every seventy-seven years.

During the rise of Islam, to assist in their observations, the Chaldean made use of an early rudimentary instrument called an astrolabe, invented by the Greeks in either the first or second centuries BC, and is often attributed to Hipparchus. (190-120 BC). It was effectively, an analog calculator, capable of working out several different kinds of problems in spherical astronomy. They also began to use an armillary sphere. The name of this device comes ultimately from the Latin armilla (circle or bracelet); since it has a skeleton made of graduated metal circles linking the poles, and represented the equator, the ecliptic, meridians and parallels. Usually a ball represented the Earth as the centre, such a sphere is known as a Ptolemaic, while the later spheres with the Sun at the centre were known as the Copernican. The armillary sphere was used to demonstrate the motion of the stars around the Earth.

While in its simplest form, consisting of a ring fixed in the plane of the equator, the armillary sphere was one of the most ancient of astronomical instruments. Slightly developed, it was crossed by another ring fixed in the plane of the meridian, with the first being an equinoctial, and the second, a solstitial armilla. Shadows were used as indications of the Sun’s positions, in combinations with angular divisions. When several rings or circles were combined representing the great circles of the heavens, the instrument became an armillary sphere.

Brass astrolabes on the other hand, were developed in the later Mesopotamia ages of the medieval Islamic world, chiefly as an aid to navigation but also as a way of finding the qibla, the direction of Mecca. Muslim astronomers produced an improved version of the Greek armillary sphere in the 8th century AD. Abbas Ibn Firnas (d.887) is thought to have produced another instrument with rings in 9th century, which he gifted to Caliph Muhammad I (ruled 852‑886).

The spherical astrolabe, a variation of both the astrolabe and the armillary sphere, was invented during the Middle Ages by astronomers and inventors in the Islamic world. The earliest description of the spherical astrolabe dates back to Al Nayrizi (892‑902 AD). Muslim astronomers also independently invented the celestial globe, which were used primarily for solving problems in celestial astronomy. Today, 126 such instruments remain worldwide, the oldest from the 11th century. The altitude of the Sun, and the right ascension and declination of stars could be calculated with these instruments by inputting the location of the observer on the meridian ring of the globe.

Astrolabe – Pinterest

In the Islamic world, astrolabes were used to find the times of sunrise and the rising of fixed stars, and were also used to help schedule morning prayers (salat). In the 10th century, al Sufi first described more than 1,000 different uses of an astrolabe, in areas as diverse as astronomy, astrology, horoscopes, navigation, surveying, timekeeping, and prayer.

After 700AD, Islam also advised Muslims to find ways of using the stars and on the basis of this advice, Muslims began to develop better observational and navigational instruments, thus most navigational stars today have Arabic names.

Influences of the Qur’an on Islamic astronomy included its “insistence that the universe is ruled by a single set of laws,” which was rooted in the Islamic concept, “the unity of God” (tawhid). There was also more respect for empirical data than was common in the preceding Greek civilization. Muslims were inspired to place a greater emphasis on empirical observation, instead of the ancient Greek philosophers such as the Plato and Aristotle, who expressed a general distrust toward the senses and instead viewed reason alone as being sufficient to understanding nature. The Qur’an’s insistence on observation, reason and contemplation, (see, think, and contemplate), led Muslims to develop an early scientific method based on these principles. For the Qur’an said; “And it is he who ordained the stars for you that you may be guided thereby in the darkness of the land and the sea.” There are also several cosmological verses in the Qur’an which some modern writers have interpreted as foreshadowing the expansion of the universe and possibly even the Big Bang theory. These include the verses, “Don’t those who reject faith see that the heavens and the earth were a single entity then we ripped them apart?” (Qur’an21:30), and “And the heavens we did create with Our Hands, and we do cause it to expand.”(Qur’an 51:47)

Though several texts attributed to Muhammad, show that he was generally opposed to astrology as well as superstition in general. An example of this is when an eclipse occurred during his son Ibrahim ibn Muhammad’s death, and rumours began spreading about this being a personal show of sympathy from God himself. Muhammad is said to have replied: “An eclipse is a phenomenon of nature. It is foolish to attribute such things to the death or birth of a human being.”

In observational astronomy, the first major original, Muslim work of astronomy was the “Zij-al Sindh” by al Khwarizimi in 830 AD. The work contains tables for the movements of the Sun, the moon and the other five planets known at the time. He used Hindu-Arabic numerals in his calculations, while Muhammad ibn Ja‑bir al Harra-ni al Batta-ni (Albatenius) (853‑929), discovered that the direction of the Sun’s eccentric was changing, which in modern astronomy is equivalent to the Earth moving in an elliptical orbit around the Sun. His times for the new moon, lengths for the solar year and sidereal year, prediction of eclipses, and work on the phenomenon of parallax, carried astronomers closer and closer to understanding the laws of relativity and which would not happen for another 500 years.

In the 9th century, Ja’far Muhammad ibn Mu sa ‑ ibn Sha‑kir, would make significant contributions to astrophysics and celestial mechanics, he was the first to hypothesize that the heavenly bodies and celestial spheres are subject to the same laws of physics as Earth, unlike the ancients who believed that the celestial spheres followed their own set of physical laws different from that of Earth. In his “Astral Motion and The Force of Attraction,” he would also propose that there is a force of attraction between heavenly bodies, which foreshadows Newton’s law of universal gravitation. Ahmad ibn Muhammad ibn Kathi-r al-Fargha-ni, in 850, gave values for the obliquity of the ecliptic and the processional movements of the sun, when it is at its farthest distance from the earth.

In the 10th century A.D., Abd al Rahman al Sufi (Azophi) carried out observations on the stars and described their positions, magnitudes, brightness, and colour, through drawings of each constellation in his book, the “Book of Fixed Stars,” where he also mentions the “nebula.” He also gave the first descriptions and pictures of what he called, “a little cloud,” which is now known as the Andromeda Galaxy, and along with the Large Magellanic Cloud, are the first galaxies other than the Milky Way to be observed from Earth. He mentions it as lying before the mouth of the Big Fish, an Arabic constellation.

The astronomer, Ibn Yunis, used an astrolabe with a diameter of nearly 1.4 metres, and spent years observing and then recording more than 10,000 entries for the Sun’s position. Around 1000 the Persian astronomer Abu-Rayha-n al-Bi-ru-ni, described the Milky Way as a collection of many nebulous stars, and in 1019 observes and gives a detailed description of the solar eclipse on April 8 and the lunar eclipse on September 17, and then gives the exact latitudes of the stars during the lunar eclipse. He also calculates the distance between the Earth and the Sun in his work, the “Mas’udicus.” Then in 1006, Ali ibn Ridwan, as well as Chinese astronomers, observed SN 1006, the brightest supernova in recorded history, and left a detailed description of the temporary star.

The 11th century would become a landmark time for the Islamic astronomers, who diligently kept studying the celestial realm and furthered knowledge in most all of the sciences. In the beginning of the century, Omar Khayyám would compile many tables, and perform a reformation of the calendar that was more accurate than the Julian calendar, and came close to the Gregorian. An amazing feat was his calculation of the year to be 365.24219858156 days long, which is accurate to the 6th decimal place. Later that year the Arabian astronomer Ibn al-Haytham (Alhacen) discovered and recorded that the celestial spheres do not consist of solid matter, and that the heavens are less dense than air, in his “Book of Optics.” He also refutes Aristotle’s theory on the Milky Way by making the first attempt at observing and measuring the Milky Way’s parallax. It’s angular displacement due to it being observed from the surface, instead of the centre of the Earth, and the difference of it being observed from the Earth instead of the Sun. He determined that because the Milky Way had no parallax, it had to be very far from the Earth and did not belong to the Earth’s atmosphere. Then in 1054, Arabian, and once again, Chinese astronomers, observe the star SN 1054, which becomes responsible for the creation of the Crab Nebula, the only nebula whose creation has ever been observed.

The hits kept coming, when in 1350, Ibn al-Shatir, anticipated Copernicus by more than a hundred years, and by abandoning the theory of Ptolemy, that all axis are the same length, he provided new calculations of planetary motion, which provided the first provable model of lunar motions which accurately match observations. Around the same time, Ibn Qayyim Al-Jawziyya of Syria, proposes that the Milky Way galaxy to be a great number of tiny stars packed together in the sphere of the fixed stars, and that these stars are larger than the planets.

In the 15th century, Ali Kus-cu provided empirical evidence for the Earth’s rotation on its axis, and rejects the stationary Earth theories of Aristotle and Ptolemy.

In the 16th century, Taqi al-Din measured the right ascension of the stars at his observatory in Istanbul, using an “observational clock” in which he invented, and described as a mechanical clock with three dials which show the hours, minutes and seconds. And to think, all this combined knowledge that had been achieved up until this time, had been reached through dedicated observing of the universe, with the naked eye, and the use of mathematics.            

Up until the 17th century the Chaldean civilizations had a profound effect on astronomy and cosmology. They had the advantage of being some of the first humans ever, to study the skies and record what they were seeing, as well as having the advantage that their astronomers, scientists, and mathematicians had the freedom and security to advance along in their quest for seeking knowledge. Much unlike the West, where after the Greeks, Christianity would, more often than not, prosecute or murder an individual who was interested in science. Though there were many who would continue on from the Greeks in Europe, in most cases, they had to achieve this in secrecy and were supported privately.


Megaliths and Mounds – Sunshine Supermen

Adams Calendar, South Africa Realhistoryww
Adams Calendar, South Africa

Chapter II – Megaliths and Mounds

Megaliths are structures made of large stones by ancient cultures, without the use of any mortar or cement. As to not knowing what exactly their roles were, we can only surmise that they fulfilled both astronomical and religious functions, due to the astronomical significance of their alignments. In general, megaliths do not include structures built by developed and well expressed cultures like the Romans or Maya, and their pyramids, but rather the more ancient cultures.

Pyramids themselves were first used in ancient Mesopotamia as mud-brick structures known as ziggurats. Egypt would go on and build over 70 pyramids, with recent archaeological finds there and elsewhere, supporting the theory that most pyramid’s were centers of stargazing, worship, work, commerce, and social life rather than lone tombs erected on empty plains.

Pyramids continued to be used by the Greeks and Romans, and are found throughout the world, most notably in Central and South America, India and China.

Megaliths and mounds meanwhile are also found around the world. Especially in large areas of the Middle East, from the Turkish border, through Syria, Lebanon, Iraq, Israel, Jordan, Saudi Arabia and Yemen. Undoubtedly because of its large population at the time with agriculture blooming, the largest concentration of megaliths can be found in southern Syria and along the Jordan Rift Valley. Many of them are found to align with the summer solstice sunrise, and may have been used as a place to gaze at and track the stars, with their rock formations working like a kind of ancient calendar.

The oldest megalithic structure in the world, which we know of, is Adam’s Calendar, South Africa, (shown above) with some studies suggesting it could have been made around 75,000 years ago. It’s one of an estimated 100,000 such structures in the hills around Mpumalanga (Zulu name for “the place where the sun rises”) a province in eastern South Africa, bordering the nations of Swaziland and Mozambique.

But the majority of megaliths seem to have been erected during the Neolithic period, the final stage of cultural evolution and technological development among prehistoric humans, and the final division of the Stone Age. The Neolithic began about 12,000 years ago (10,000 BC) with the development of farming, and ended around 3000 BC. Overtaken then by the Bronze Age, which denoted the first period in which metal was used.

One of the oldest megalithic places of worship in the world, erected around 11,000 years ago, is Gobekli Tepe, in Turkey. Four stone circles have been excavated from an estimated 20, with some 3 meters high and up to 30 m across. The stones have a variety of carved reliefs and pictograms depicting boars, foxes, lions, birds, snakes and scorpions. Predating Stonehenge by 6,000 years, the people of the time hadn’t yet developed pottery or metal tools but managed to build this place with massive carved stones.

Gobekli Tepe, Turkey / Anadolu Agency

While at Nabta Playa, in Egypt, which will be discussed later on, stone circles, groups of megalithic structures, and alignments of upright stones, dating from about 4,500 BC, was a vast star chart.

Other notable Middle Eastern megaliths, include, Rujm-el-Hiri (3000 BC) at Quneitra in Syria, which is currently in the Israeli-occupied portion of the Golan Heights. An enormous megalithic monument consisting of several concentric stone rings made up of more than 42,000 basalt rocks, it resembles a giant target from above and boasts intricate stone arrangements within its circle. The stones range from 2.5 m in height to 4.5 m tall in the center.

Foundation Stones of Baalbek, Lebanon/ Hidden Inca Tours April/2019

The Trilithon of Baalbek, Lebanon, in the ruins of the former city of Heliopolis has some of the largest cut stones ever known to have been created by human civilization. At the base of the ruins of the Jupiter Baal temple are three stones, called the Trilithon, and each weighs more than seven hundred and fifty tons. Researchers remain divided as to who created these monsters.

Foundation stone – Temple of Jupiter

Many European stone sentinels, megaliths and stone groupings, also conformed to celestial alignments, which required skilled observation, measurement, and prediction. In some locations, such as Stonehenge, on the Salisbury Plain, in Wiltshire England, the massive standing stones, around 4m high and 2m wide, and weighing around 25 tons, had some astronomical purpose, and of course, used for ceremonies and rituals. As in most all other cases, these observatories were employed to determine the seasons, an important factor in knowing when to plant crops, as well as in understanding the length of the year. Stonehenge was built around 3000 BC and constructed to calculate the moment of sunrise and moonrise, over an 18.6 year cycle. By standing at the centre of the circle, one can face either the sunrise or the moonrise, and foretell the season according to its position behind the “markers”.

In the English Midlands, limestone monuments called The Rollright Stones; date back to as early as 4000 BC. The Stones consist of three major formations, constructed at different times throughout the Neolithic and Bronze Age: the Whispering Nights dolmen, the King’s Men stone circle, and the King Stone.

The Standing Stones of Callanish on the isle of Lewis, in Scotland’s Outer Hebrides, form a megalithic complex also based on astronomy. Built in about 3000 BC, lines can be identified to the moon, Sun, and stars, and seems to have been a huge lunar calendar.

Newgrange, in the County of Meath, Ireland, is a tomb hill, 76 m wide and 12 m high. It was built between 5500 and 3200 BC. Renowned due to its astronomic positioning: at the dawn of winter solstice day the Sun shines through its 18 m long main passage. Also in Ireland sits the Drombeg megaliths, formed into a circle that aligns with the sunset on the winter solstice. Human remains suggest the monument was used from as early as 1100 BC.

In Brittany, France, at Carnac, more than 3,000 stones have stood in careful rows since as early as 4500 BC. It is the largest collection of prehistoric hand cut stones in the world. Carnac’s megaliths cover the countryside, along with dolmens (tombs), burial mounds, and individual memorials. Some arrangements align with the stars, while local legend says the stones were once soldiers, frozen in place for all eternity. Other theories point to the sky. Also in France, The Grand Menhir of Locmariaquer, is one of the largest freestanding stones to have been erected anywhere in Europe and is a part of a wider site of significance in the area. It is estimated to have been erected over six thousand five hundred years ago. Though having fallen over perhaps a thousand years ago and now lying in four pieces, it is estimated to have weighed as much as three hundred and fifty tons and stood nearly twenty meters tall.

On the island of Menorca in the Mediterranean Sea, off of Spain, are the Talati de Dalt megalithic monuments, called taulas (Catalan for “tables”), and dated between 1000 and 3000 BC. They are visually very similar to Stonehenge, but are a mystery to what religious or astronomical significance they had. Another theory suggested they were centers of healing for the Talaiotic people who built them. Also in the Mediterranean, and submerged by around 7200 BC, a 12 m long monolith, probably weighing around 15,000 kg was found 40 m under water in the Strait of Sicily, south-west of Sicily, but whose function is unknown. Nearby, the megalithic structures on the nearby island of Malta are believed to be one the oldest in Europe, in particular the Skorba Temples, which were built around 4850 BC, while the Ggantija (giant), is a temple on the island of Gozo, a part of Malta, and dates back to 3600 BC. It is made up of huge limestone blocks with an innermost section, passageways, altars, carvings and libation holes.

Elsewhere, the eastern North American Native peoples, the Hopewell (200 BC-500 AD), and the Adena (1000 BC-200 BC), built huge earth mounds, many in the shape of an octagon as well as pyramid mounds which were square, rectangular and circular.

The pre-Columbian city Cahokia, beside the Mississippi river, near St. Louis, built earthen pyramids that still stand today. The largest one covers sixteen acres at its base and rises 30 metres, making it one of the biggest buildings of any period, and the largest in the United States before the 20th century. Many are burial tombs, though just as many are also thought to encode various sunrise and moon-rise patterns, including the winter and summer solstices, equinoxes, and minimum and maximum lunar risings and settings on the local horizon.

The “Big Horn Medicine Wheel” in Wyoming, USA, is a stone setting resembling an enormous spiked wheel. Historically on native Crow land, oral history from several indigenous nations sets the Big Horn Medicine Wheel as already existing before them, having been built by “people without iron”. It has been dated archaeologically to 3200 BC.

Big Horn Medicine Wheel, Wyoming/ by Airphoto NA

The Wheel is one of four or five astronomically complex wheels that are publicly known to exist in the Rocky Mountain region. It is of a type termed “Subgroup 6”, for its prominent central stone cairn surrounded by a stone ring, while two or more interior stone lines connect the stone ring to the cairn in the center. Smaller, less complex wheels may also have astronomical significance, such as solstice alignments and east-west orientations. The larger complex wheels are capable of tracking several different cosmic cycles, including the precession of the equinoxes, the Moon’s phases, lunar and solar eclipse cycles, and planets’ orbital cycles. These astronomical wheels mirror the north ecliptic polar region of the sky, and are useful as celestial grids to track changes over the millennia.

While in central and South America, megaliths run into the hundreds. The Calçoene megalithic observatory (the Amazon Stonehenge), erected sometime in the 1st to 10th centuries AD, in Amapá, Brazil, is a circle marked with 127 blocks of granite, and stones up to 3 m high. Other South American megaliths include The Chilla Pyramids, and the Banos Del Inca, in Ecuador, and the Huaca del Sol, in Peru.

While, 3,512 kilometers east off the coast of Chile lays the island of Rapa Nui, a remote volcanic island in Polynesia. The nearest inhabited land to it is Pitcairn Island, 2,075 km away. Rapa Nui has nearly 1,000 massive upright stone statues called moai. Created during the 13th and 16th centuries, the moai are carved human figures with oversize heads, often resting on massive stone pedestals called ahus. The largest standing moai was estimated to weigh at least 86 tons.

Other notable megaliths include Padang Hill in West Jawa, Indonesia. It is the largest concentration of megalithic stones in Southeast Asia, consisting of thousands of stone blocks. And the Diquis Spheres in Puntarenas, Costa Rica, a very unusual megalith in that it is made up of perfectly round stone spheres, some up to 16 tons in weight. While ancient, the exact timing of its building and culture, are unknown.

And finally Inuksuk Point, on Baffin Island, in Nunavut, Canada. Inuksuk Point is a group of over 100 vertical stone settings, which serve as navigation and reference points. The word inuksuk (also called inukshuk), could be translated as “somebody/something who acts on behalf of a human”. An Inuksuk in the shape of a person signifies safety, hope and friendship, which today has been transformed into a symbol of hope and friendship that transcends borders to reach people all over the world.

Inunnguaq at Rankin Inlet, Nunavit, Canada / photo by Ansgar Walk

Chapter One – Sunshine Supermen